Usermanual AUTOGRID5 87

User Manual
AutoGrid5 v8
Automated Grid Generator for Turbomachinery
- March 2010 -
NUMERICAL MECHANICS APPLICATIONS
User Manual
AutoGrid5 v8 Documentation v8d
NUMECA International 5, Avenue Franklin Roosevelt 1050 Brussels Belgium Tel: +32 2 647.83.11 Fax: +32 2 647.93.98 Web: http://www.numeca.com
NUMERICAL MECHANICS APPLICATIONS
Contents
CHAPTER 1: Getting Started 1-1 Overview 1-2 Introduction What is AutoGrid5 Features Structured vs. Unstructured Approach Project Management Mesh files Template files 1-3 How To Use This Manual Outline Conventions 1-4 First Time Use Basic Installation Expert Graphics Options Graphics Driver Background & Foreground Colors 1-5 How to Start AutoGrid5 Interface 1-6 Required Licenses Standard AutoGrid5 License Additional Licenses CHAPTER 2: Graphical User Interface 2-1 Overview 2-2 Project Selection Create New Template/Project Open Existing Template/Project 2-3 Main Menu Bar File Menu Open Project New Project Save Project / Save Project As Save Template / Save Template As Save Grid -> Save Grid As Save Grid -> Save Grid As Fine 7.4 Save Grid -> Save Grid As Fine 8.6 Save Grid -> Merge Project Grid Save Grid -> Save Fluid Domain(s) Project List -> Transfer File List Project List -> Open File List Scripts -> Edit Scripts -> Save All Scripts -> Execute Scripts -> Re-execute Last Print -> As PostScript
1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-2 1-2 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-6 1-6 1-7 1-7 1-7 2-1 2-1 2-2 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-5 2-5 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7
AutoGrid5
iii
Contents
Print -> As Bitmap PostScript Print -> As PNG Export -> IGES Export -> Geometry Selection Export -> Geometry Control Points Export -> Block Coor Export -> Face Coor Export -> Patch Coor Export -> Plot3D Import -> IGG Project Prefix Importation operations Import -> IGG Data Import -> External Grid Import -> Face Grid Import -> Topology Import -> CATIA V5 Import -> Parasolid Import -> IGES Import -> PLOT3D Import -> CGNS Import -> GridPro Preferences Saving Page Graphics Page Layout Page Quit Geometry Menu View Menu Patch Viewer Sweep Surfaces Coarse Grid Repetition Face Displacement View Depth Toggle 3D Solid View View/Hide 3D Solid Mesh View 3D Solid Block Toggle Throughflow Mesh Toggle Tool Bar / Symbolic View / Configuration/IGG Panel Grid Menu Periodicity Boundary Conditions Patch Browser Filters Patch Type Specification Patch Definition & Editing Automatic Connectivity Search Manual Connectivity Settings
2-7 2-7 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-10 2-10 2-10 2-11 2-11 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-13 2-14 2-15 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-17 2-18 2-18 2-18 2-19 2-19 2-20 2-21 2-22 2-22 2-22 2-23 2-23 2-24 2-24 2-24 2-25 2-25 2-26 2-26 2-27 2-27 2-28 2-28 2-30
iv
AutoGrid5
Contents
Full Non Matching Connections Rotor/Stator Connections Grid Quality Quality Criterion Definitions (Block Page) Quality Criterion Definitions (Boundaries Page) Quality Criterion Definitions (FNMB Page) Grid Quality Report Grid Quality Report (HTML) Negative Cells Compute All Fnmbs Create Face / Create Block 2-4 Toolbar User Mode Project Management Icons Mesh Generation Buttons View & Mesh Quality Management Icons Mesh Control Icons Contextual Icons Row Management Icons Blade Management Icons Shroud & Hub Gap Management Icons 2-5 Quick Access Pad Rows Definition Subpad Project Management Buttons Configuration Tree Contextual Popup Menu of Tree Items Geometry Definition Subpad Mesh Control Subpad Grid Level Page Row Mesh Control Page Active B2B Layer Page View Subpad Geometry Groups Page Block Groups Page Grid Configuration Page Main Project Management Duplicate Main Project Merge Main Project SubProject Management Rename SubProject Duplicate SubProject Save SubProject Load SubProject Merge SubProject Delete SubProject Domain Management Domain Properties Rename Domain
2-31 2-33 2-34 2-36 2-38 2-39 2-41 2-41 2-43 2-44 2-44 2-44 2-45 2-45 2-45 2-46 2-46 2-47 2-47 2-47 2-48 2-48 2-50 2-50 2-50 2-51 2-52 2-53 2-53 2-54 2-54 2-55 2-55 2-57 2-58 2-59 2-59 2-60 2-60 2-60 2-61 2-61 2-61 2-62 2-62 2-62 2-63 2-63
AutoGrid5
Contents
Group Domain Delete Domain Domain Interface Management Domain Boundary Properties Rename Domain Boundary Group Domain Boundaries Ungroup Domain Boundaries Connect Domain Boundaries Interface Viewer Export Surfaces Grid Page 2-6 Control Area Message Area Keyboard Input Area Mouse Coordinates Information Area Grid Parameters Area Generation Status Area Viewing Buttons X, Y & Z Projection Buttons Coordinate Axis Scrolling 3D Viewing Button Rotate Around X, Y or Z axis Zoom In/Out Region Zoom Fit Button Original Button Cutting Plane 2-7 Graphics Area & Views Symbolic View Meridional View Blade to Blade View 3D View View & User Interaction 2-8 File Chooser CHAPTER 3: Meshing Fundamentals 3-1 Overview 3-2 Mesh Domain Definition Hub & Shroud Definition Blade Definition Inlet & Outlet Limits Technological Effects Meridional Technological Effects 3D Technological Effects Cooling & Conjugate Heat Transfer
2-63 2-64 2-64 2-65 2-65 2-65 2-66 2-66 2-68 2-68 2-68 2-69 2-70 2-70 2-70 2-70 2-70 2-71 2-72 2-72 2-72 2-72 2-73 2-73 2-73 2-73 2-74 2-74 2-74 2-74 2-75 2-75 2-76 2-76 2-77 2-77 3-1 3-1 3-2 3-2 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-3
vi
AutoGrid5
Contents
3-3 Geometry Definition The ".geomTurbo" File Format Channel Format Basic Curves Channel Curves Row(s) Definition Format. Row Type Row Periodicity Blade Definition External CAD Format 3-4 Mesh Generation Steps Project Initialization Project Setup Row Properties Periodicity Number of Geometry Periodicity Row Information Hub/Shroud/Shroud Gap Non-Axisymmetric Tandem Row Full Mesh Generation Low Memory Use Number of Repetition Hub/Shroud Gap (Expert Mode) Cell Width Mesh Control Flow Paths Control Blade to Blade Control Conformal Mapping Blade to Blade Mesh Initialization Default (O4H) Blade to Blade Topology Grid Points Clustering Initial Mesh Blade to Blade Mesh Optimization Blade to Blade View Control Display Update Active Layer 3D Mesh Generation Project Persistency Create New Project Overwrite Existing Project Project Library Project Info Project Files Mesh files Template files Open Project File Select Project File Project File Library
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-6 3-7 3-7 3-7 3-9 3-10 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-12 3-12 3-12 3-12 3-13 3-13 3-13 3-13 3-13 3-13 3-13 3-14 3-14 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-17 3-17 3-18 3-18 3-18 3-18 3-20 3-20 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-22 3-22 3-22 3-23
AutoGrid5
vii
Contents
Project Information Area 3-5 Meshing Similar Geometry & Batch Mode CHAPTER 4: Wizard Mode 4-1 Overview 4-2 Wizard Mode GUI Main Menu Bar Toolbar User Mode Project Management Icons Mesh Generation Buttons View & Mesh Quality Management Icons View Management Icons Copy/Paste Row Topology Icons Quick Access Pad Rows Definition Subpad Geometry Definition Subpad Mesh Control Subpad View Subpad 4-3 Row Wizard Geometry Check Machine Characteristics Definition Gap/Fillet Definition Flow Path Definition Blade-to-Blade Mesh Definition Initialization End MultiStage Management Automatic Blade-to-Blade Settings Global Settings Upstream & Downstream H blocks Definition Blade-to-Blade Topology High Staggered Topology Blade-to-Blade Grid Points Throat Control Sharp & Rounded Treatment B2B Mesh Parameters Optimization Parameters Machine Dedicated Settings Wind Turbine Settings Axial Turbine Settings Francis Turbine Settings Kaplan Turbine Settings Inducer Settings Axial Compressor Settings Centrifugal Impeller Settings Radial Diffuser Settings Return Channel Settings
3-23 3-23 4-1 4-1 4-2 4-2 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-7 4-7 4-7 4-8 4-8 4-9 4-9 4-10 4-10 4-11 4-13 4-13 4-14 4-14 4-14 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-16 4-16 4-16 4-16 4-17 4-17 4-20 4-20 4-21 4-21 4-22 4-22 4-22 4-23
viii
AutoGrid5
Contents
Counter Rotative Fan Settings SHF Pump Settings Axial Fan Settings CHAPTER 5: Geometry Definition 5-1 Overview 5-2 Import ".geomTurbo" File 5-3 Import CAD Menu Bar File Menu Open... Open IGES Export... Close Exit Geometry Menu Edit Menu Geometry Axis... View Menu View Solid Select Menu Surfaces Curves Surface List ... Curve List ... Invert Selection Hide Selection Viewing Buttons Quick Access Pad Graphics Area Interaction Overview "Link to..." Description Link to Hub Link to Shroud Link Non Axi to Hub Link Non Axi to Shroud Link Non Axi to Shroud Gap Link to Nozzle Link to Fin Up/Down Import Meridional Link to 3D Effect Link to Blade Link to Pressure/Suction Side Link to Leading Edge Link to Trailing Edge Link to Hub Gap Link to Shroud Gap
4-23 4-23 4-24 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-8 5-8 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-10 5-10 5-10 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12
AutoGrid5
ix
Contents
Link to Inlet Link to Outlet Link to Outlet Up 5-4 Hub/Shroud Edition Edit Hub/Shroud Non-Axisymmetric Hub/Shroud From ".geomTurbo" File From Import CAD Mesh Generation Control 5-5 Blade Edition Blade Expansion Force Blunt at Leading Edge Force Blunt at Trailing Edge Stick Leading/Trailing Edge Apply a Rotation Sewing Tolerance Expansion at Hub Unchanged Expand Treat blend Treat blend with offset Expansion at Shroud Unchanged Expand Treat blend Treat blend with offset Blade Fillet Leading/Trailing Edge Wizard Control Layers Definition Control Layer Limits Control Layer Clustering Global Layer Control Expert Layer Control Leading/Trailing Edge Location Definition Active Layer Edge Location Control. Edge Expansion Control View B2B & Solid Body Sheet on Blade Non-Axisymmetric Shroud Gap From ".geomTurbo" File From Import CAD Mesh Generation Control 5-6 Cascade Configuration 5-7 Blade Geometry Check Check Geometry Blade Definition Check Streamwise Orientation Check
5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-16 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-19 5-19 5-19 5-19 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-21 5-21 5-23 5-23 5-24 5-24 5-24 5-25 5-25 5-26 5-26 5-27 5-27 5-28 5-30 5-31 5-31 5-32 5-33 5-34 5-34 5-34 5-35
AutoGrid5
Contents
Loop Detection - Distance Check Loop Detection - Angle Check Adapt Geometry Data Reduction Blade Sections Interpolation Loops Blade Rotation 5-8 Blade Geometry Export CHAPTER 6: Meridional Control 6-1 Overview 6-2 Geometry Control Basic Curves Creation Discretization Deletion Check Geometry Hub - Shroud - Nozzle Rotor/Stator Properties Control Points Editing Meridional Control Lines Creation Deletion Edition Properties Specific Cases: Bypass, Fin & Bulb Channel Control Meridional Curve Checks 6-3 Mesh Control Flow Paths Control Flow Paths Manual Editing Hub/Shroud Gaps Control Blade Fillet Bulb Control Bypass Control Fin Control Copy - Merge Distributions Conditions of Use Representation Mesh Quality Checks CHAPTER 7: Blade to Blade Control 7-1 Overview 7-2 Blade to Blade Topology Management Overview Topology Selection
5-35 5-35 5-36 5-36 5-36 5-37 5-37 6-1 6-1 6-1 6-1 6-1 6-2 6-2 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-6 6-7 6-7 6-7 6-7 6-9 6-11 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-16 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-20 6-20 6-21 6-21 6-22 7-1 7-1 7-3 7-3 7-3
AutoGrid5
xi
Contents
Copy/Paste Topology 7-3 Default Topology (O4H Topology) Default Topology Control Control Number of Grid Points Control Periodic Boundary Condition Type Control Skin Mesh Clustering around the Blade Grid Point Number Control Leading Edge & Trailing Edge Clustering Control Move Leading Edge & Trailing Edge Location Control Boundary Layer in the Skin Mesh. Control Hub/Shroud Gap Mesh Blend/Sharp/Rounded Treatment at Leading/Trailing Edge Grid Points in Throat Wake Control Inlet & Outlet Boundary Control Relax Inlet & Outlet Clustering Blunt at Leading/Trailing Edge Topology for High Staggered Blades Overview High Staggered Blade Topology Optimization Grid Points - Periodic Boundary - Gap Control Tandem Row Main Blade/Splitter Configuration Multi-Rows Configuration Control Lines & Blade to Blade Mesh. Upstream & Downstream Control Lines. Control Line on Blade Cell Width around Control Line Mesh Quality Improvement with Control Line Intersection Control Options 7-4 HOH Topology Overview HOH Blade to Blade Mesh Control Upstream & Downstream Extension Control Number of Points Control Blade Clustering Control Butterfly Mesh Topology for Hub/Shroud Gap Hub to Shroud Mesh Control Intersection Control Options 7-5 H&I Topology Overview H&I Topology Control Control Number of Grid Points Control Skin Mesh Clustering around the Blade Control Hub/Shroud Gap Mesh Blend/Sharp/Rounded Treatment at Leading/Trailing Edge Inlet & Outlet Boundary Control Control Clustering at Projection Points
7-6 7-7 7-7 7-7 7-9 7-9 7-10 7-10 7-11 7-12 7-13 7-14 7-15 7-17 7-18 7-18 7-20 7-21 7-21 7-22 7-23 7-24 7-25 7-26 7-27 7-28 7-29 7-29 7-29 7-30 7-32 7-32 7-32 7-33 7-34 7-35 7-36 7-37 7-37 7-38 7-38 7-39 7-43 7-43 7-44 7-44 7-44 7-44
xii
AutoGrid5
Contents
Topology for High Staggered Blades Intersection Control Options 7-6 User Defined Topology Geometry Control Mesh Control Control Layer Page Create - Connect Pages View Control 7-7 Blade to Blade Optimization Introduction Optimization Control Optimization Steps Skewness Control Orthogonality Control Wake Control Level Multigrid Acceleration Non-Matching Control Periodic Boundary Optimization Multisplitter Control Skin Mesh Control Advice to Users Theoretical Aspect CHAPTER 8: 3D Generation 8-1 Overview 8-2 Application Field 8-3 3D Mesh - Interpolation 3D Blocks Naming Row Mesh Default Topology - H&I Topology - HOH Topology User Defined Topology Mesh in Bulb Mesh around Nozzle (Bypass) Mesh in Meridional Technological Effect Mesh in 3D Technological Effect 3D Boundary Condition Patches Generation Patch Naming Block Order Generate Full Mesh Number of Mesh Points. 8-4 Mesh Quality 8-5 Template & Mesh Files Mesh Files Template Files 8-6 B2B Cut Edit B2B Cut
7-45 7-46 7-47 7-48 7-49 7-51 7-51 7-54 7-55 7-55 7-55 7-56 7-56 7-57 7-58 7-59 7-59 7-59 7-60 7-60 7-60 7-60 8-1 8-1 8-2 8-2 8-3 8-3 8-3 8-4 8-4 8-4 8-4 8-4 8-4 8-4 8-4 8-5 8-5 8-5 8-6 8-6 8-7 8-7 8-7 8-8
AutoGrid5
xiii
Contents
Delete B2B Cut Create B2B Cut CHAPTER 9: Meridional Technological Effect 9-1 Overview 9-2 Configuration Management 9-3 Geometry Definition The ".geomTurbo" File CAD Import User Defined 9-4 Definition of Meridional Mesh Start Edition Mode Edition Mode Geometry Control Topology Control Create & Modify New Block Delete Existing Blocks Insert New Control Vertices Grid Points Clustering Grid Point Number Control Automatic Default Topology Optimization Steps Radial Expansion Automatic Detection Tools 9-5 Connection with Main Blade Channel Connection Types Multiple Connections 9-6 3D Generation CHAPTER 10:3D Technological Effect 10-1 Overview 10-2 Configuration Management 10-3 Geometry Definition External Data File CAD Import 10-4 Edition Mode 10-5 Topology Management 3D effect library Copy/Paste Feature 10-6 3D Generation & Persistency CHAPTER 11:Cooling & Conjugate Heat Transfer Modules 11-1 Overview 11-2 Conjugate Heat Transfer
8-9 8-9 9-1 9-1 9-2 9-2 9-3 9-3 9-3 9-4 9-4 9-5 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-8 9-8 9-8 9-8 9-9 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-12 9-12 9-13 9-14 10-1 10-1 10-1 10-2 10-2 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-4 10-5 10-6 11-1 11-1 11-1
xiv
AutoGrid5
Contents
Mesh of Blade Solid Body Solid Body Configuration Solid Body Configuration (Default) Solid Body + Spanwise Holes Configuration Solid Body + Cooling Channel Configuration Solid Body + Basin Configuration Solid Body + Basin + Cooling Channel Configuration Solid Body + Cooling Channel Configuration Solid Body + Penny Configuration Solid Body + Squiller Tip Configuration Internal Offset Shape Control Parametric Mode External ".geomTurbo" File External CAD Data File Leading/Trailing Edge Wizard Basin / Tip Wall / Basin Bottom Wall Definition Mesh Generation Control Blade to Blade Control Internal Cooling Wall Streamwise Distribution. Number of Points in O-Mesh (Solid Blade Area) Special Configuration: Inserted Cooling Tube 3D Control Mesh of End Wall Solid Body Geometry Definition Topology Definition 3D Mesh Generation 11-3 Cooling - Blade Holes Blade Holes Methodology Blade Holes Properties Geometry Control Holes Number Control Holes Shape Control Holes Location Control Parametric Mode XYZ Mode (Px,Py,Pz) RTHZ Mode (Pr,Pth,Pz) Holes Axis Control Parametric Mode XYZ Mode (Vx,Vy,Vz) RTHZ Mode (Pr,Pth,Pz) Holes Dimension Control Circular Shape Rectangular & Oval Shapes Trailing Edge Groove Shape 4-Sided Shape Holes Orientation Control External Holes Definition File Data File for Circular Shape Holes Line
11-1 11-3 11-3 11-3 11-4 11-4 11-4 11-5 11-5 11-5 11-6 11-6 11-7 11-7 11-8 11-8 11-8 11-9 11-9 11-10 11-10 11-12 11-12 11-13 11-13 11-14 11-14 11-14 11-16 11-17 11-17 11-17 11-18 11-18 11-18 11-18 11-19 11-19 11-19 11-19 11-19 11-19 11-19 11-20 11-20 11-20 11-20 11-20
AutoGrid5
xv
Contents
Data File for Rectangular Shape Holes Line Data File for Oval Shape Holes Line Data File for Trailing Edge Groove Holes Line Data File for Trailing Edge Circular Holes File Data File for 4-Sided Shape Holes Line Mesh Control Grid Points Distribution Optimization Control Wake Control Mesh Shape Control Global Control Blade Holes Mesh Generation Blade Holes Project Management 11-4 Cooling - Basin Holes/Separator Basin Holes/Separator Methodology Basin Holes Properties Geometry Control Parametric Mode XYZ Mode External Holes Definition File Mesh Control Basin Separator Properties Basin Holes/Separator Mesh Generation 11-5 Cooling - End Wall Holes End Wall Holes Methodology End Wall Holes Properties End Wall Holes Mesh Generation 11-6 Cooling - Pin Fins Pin Fins Properties Pin Fins Box Definition From IGG Edit Mode From External Block File Pin Fins Lines Definition Pin Fins Mesh Generation 11-7 Cooling - Ribs Ribs Properties Ribs Box Definition From IGG Edit Mode From 3D View Ribs Geometry Control Ribs Mesh Control Ribs Mesh Generation CHAPTER 12:Python Script 12-1 Overview 12-2 Running a Script File 12-3 Commands Description
11-21 11-21 11-21 11-22 11-22 11-23 11-23 11-24 11-25 11-25 11-25 11-26 11-27 11-27 11-28 11-29 11-30 11-30 11-30 11-31 11-32 11-33 11-34 11-34 11-35 11-35 11-36 11-37 11-38 11-38 11-38 11-38 11-38 11-40 11-41 11-41 11-41 11-42 11-42 11-42 11-44 11-45 12-1 12-1 12-1 12-2
xvi
AutoGrid5
Contents
Configuration Commands Geometry Import Commands Viewing Commands NIConfigurationEntities Class Commands RowWizard Class Commands WindTurbine Class Commands B2B Cut Class Commands Row Class Commands Topology Management Row Boundaries Access Row Technological Effects 3D Access Row Blades Properties Row Properties Row Hub/Shroud Non-Axisymmetric Row Shroud Gap Non-Axisymmetric Row Hub/Shroud Solid Mesh Flow Paths Control Optimization Blade Class Commands Blade Expansion & Rotation Parameters Blunt & Sharp Blade Parameters Default Topology Parameters Topology Control Grid Points Control Mesh Control Intersection Control HOH Topology Parameters Topology Control Grid Points Control Leading Edge Grid Points Distribution Control Trailing Edge Grid Points Distribution Control Mesh Control H&I Topology Parameters Topology Control Grid Points Control Mesh Control Cooling - Conjugate Heat Transfer Parameters Blade Cooling Holes Control Cooling Channel & Basin Control Basin Holes & Separator Control Pin Fins & Ribs Control Gap Class Commands Fillet Class Commands WizardLETE Class Commands Blade Sheet Class Commands RSInterface Class Commands BasicCurve Class Commands StagnationPoint Class Commands TechnologicalEffectZR Class Commands
12-2 12-4 12-5 12-6 12-6 12-7 12-8 12-8 12-9 12-9 12-9 12-9 12-9 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-12 12-12 12-13 12-14 12-14 12-15 12-15 12-15 12-16 12-17 12-17 12-17 12-18 12-19 12-19 12-20 12-20 12-20 12-20 12-21 12-21 12-21 12-21 12-22 12-22 12-23 12-23 12-24 12-25 12-26 12-27 12-27 12-27
AutoGrid5
xvii
Contents
TechnologicalEffect3D Class Commands Cooling Channel Class Commands Hole Class Commands Hole Location Control Parametric Mode (all hole type excepted grooves) XYZ Mode RTHZ Mode Hole Axis Control Parametric Mode (all hole type excepted grooves) XYZ Mode (all hole type excepted grooves) RTHZ Mode (all hole type excepted grooves) Hole Dimension Control Circular Shape Rectangular/Oval Shape Grooves (Parametric Mode) Quadrilateral Shape (4-Sided) Hole Orientation Control HolesLine Class Commands External File Control Hole Line Geometry Control Holes Number Hole Shape Hole Location Hole Axis Hole Dimension Hole Orientation Hole Line Mesh Control Grid Points Number Optimization Wake Control Holes Line Mesh Shape Control Global Mesh Control Basin Class Commands Global Parameters Hole Parameters Basin Hole Separator Penny PinFinsChannel Class Commands PinFinsLine Class Commands External File Control Pin Fins Line Geometry Control Pin Fins Number Pin Fin Shape Pin Fin Location Pin Fin Axis Control Pin Fin Dimension Control Pin Fin Orientation Control Pin Fin Mesh Control
12-28 12-28 12-28 12-29 12-29 12-29 12-29 12-30 12-30 12-30 12-30 12-30 12-30 12-30 12-30 12-31 12-31 12-31 12-31 12-32 12-32 12-32 12-32 12-33 12-34 12-35 12-35 12-35 12-35 12-36 12-36 12-36 12-36 12-36 12-36 12-37 12-37 12-37 12-37 12-38 12-38 12-38 12-38 12-38 12-39 12-39 12-40 12-40 12-41
xviii
AutoGrid5
Contents
Grid Points Number Optimization Wake Control Holes Line Mesh Shape Control Global Mesh Control PinFin Class Commands Pin Fin Location Parametric Mode XYZ Mode UV Mode Pin Fin Axis Control Parametric Mode XYZ Mode Pin Fin Dimension Control Circular Shape Rectangular/Oval Shape Quadrilateral Shape (4-Sided) Pin Fin Orientation Control EndWall Class Commands End Wall Generation Control End Wall Parameters Control EndWallHole Class Commands Hole Location Control XYZ Mode MTheta Mode Hole Axis Control Parametric Mode XYZ Mode Hole Dimension Control Circular Shape Rectangular/Oval Shape Quadrilateral Shape (4-Sided) Hole Dimension Control EndWallHolesLine Class Commands External File Control Hole Line Geometry Control Holes Number Hole Shape Hole Location Hole Axis Hole Dimension Hole Orientation Hole Line Mesh Control Grid Points Number Optimization Wake Control Holes Line Mesh Shape Control Global Mesh Control
12-41 12-41 12-41 12-41 12-42 12-42 12-42 12-42 12-42 12-42 12-43 12-43 12-43 12-43 12-43 12-43 12-43 12-44 12-44 12-44 12-44 12-44 12-45 12-45 12-45 12-45 12-45 12-45 12-45 12-45 12-46 12-46 12-46 12-46 12-46 12-47 12-47 12-47 12-47 12-48 12-48 12-49 12-49 12-49 12-49 12-50 12-50 12-50
AutoGrid5
xix
Contents
xx
AutoGrid5
CHAPTER 1:
Getting Started
1-1
Overview
Welcome to the AutoGrid5 Users Guide, a presentation of NUMECAs fully automatic grid generator for turbomachines. This chapter presents the basic concepts of AutoGrid5 and shows how to get started with the program by describing:
what is AutoGrid5, how to use this guide, how to start AutoGrid5.
1-2
1-2.1
Introduction
What is AutoGrid5
AutoGrid5 is an automatic meshing system for turbomachinery configurations developed to ease pre-processing for numerical computations on such configurations. Pre-processing consists of defining the geometrical description of the to-be-studied model and the discretization (mesh generation) of the to-be-studied domain. The number of computational nodes needed increases rapidly with the detail in the model. For 3D geometries, this easily reaches from 100,000 to 1,000,000 nodes and even higher. This vast number of nodes, along with the description of the complex geometries, necessitates the use of a powerful mesh generator that allows providing a computational mesh with sufficient quality in an automatic way. AutoGrid5 enables to deal with complex geometries resulting in a structured mesh of high quality.
1-2.2
Features
The advanced tools of AutoGrid5 enable to create mesh for a large range of gas turbines, fans and compressors:
turbofan, turboprop, turboshaft,
AutoGrid5
1-1
Getting Started
Introduction
turbojet and after burning turbojet, axial or centrifugal, single or multistage, including or not bulbs on the hub, with one or multiple splitter blades (centrifugal), with hub or shroud clearances, with bypass, with seal leakages, with meridional or 3D technological effects.
1-2.3
Structured vs. Unstructured
Depending on the geometry complexity, the user should define the requested mesh type: structured or unstructured. Structured meshes are to be preferred for reasons of accuracy in cases of aligned flow even if their generation can sometimes be difficult and cumbersome. Unstructured meshes can be easily generated independently of the geometrical complexity and owing to their nature generally tend to generate less points than in the structured case. For turbomachinery design, because of a request of high accuracy, it is recommended to use AutoGrid5 which enables to provide adapted structured meshes. Users requiring an unstructured mesh may consider the use of the NUMECA automatic hexahedral mesh generation software Hexpress.
1-2.4
Approach
To obtain fully automatic or semi-automatic grids with an optimal quality control, AutoGrid5 takes advantage of the characteristics of turbomachinery configurations by creating blade to blade grids onto surfaces of revolution. The generation based on a conformal mapping between the 3D Cartesian space (XYZ coordinates) and the cylindrical surfaces of the 2D blade to blade space (dm/ r- plane) follows 4 main steps:
1.
Definition of the geometry:
The blade surface description. The curves for the definition of the hub and shroud surfaces of revolution. The additional data needed to handle special features such as splitters, meridional or 3D
technological effects.
2. 3.
Generation of meridional flow paths. These flow paths define the meridional trace of the surfaces of revolution on which the 3D mesh will be built. Generation and control of 2D meshes on spanwise surfaces. This 2D generation enables the user to control the mesh topology, the grid clustering and the mesh orthogonality along the solid walls. Generation of the final 3D mesh. This generation combines the meridional flow paths and the 2D blade to blade meshes to create the mesh on surfaces of revolution. The use of the conformal mapping between the 3D Cartesian space and the 2D blade to blade space ensures conservation of quality in terms of orthogonality and clustering for each axisymmetric surface mesh.
4.
The settings used to create a mesh are controlled interactively through dialog boxes. At the end of the grid generation process, all the parameters can be saved in a template file (".trb"). Meshes for similar geometries can be created automatically using this file.
1-2
AutoGrid5
Introduction
Getting Started
1-2.5
Project Management
To manage complete mesh generation, AutoGrid5 integrates the concept of project. An AutoGrid5 project involves template files and mesh files:
a) Mesh files
The mesh files contains the multiblock mesh topology, geometry, grid points, patch grouping and the boundary condition types:
new_prefix.bcs: boundary conditions files new_prefix.cgns: grid points files (CGNS format) new_prefix.geom and new_prefix.xmt_txt (.X_T): geometry files new_prefix.igg: topology file new_prefix.qualityReport: mesh quality report file new_prefix.config: mesh configuration file used for the grouping in FINE GUI and for the subProject (more details in FINE User Manual)
These files can be loaded into the structured multiblock grid generation system IGG and by the CFD integrated environment FINE/Turbo. The mesh quality file is saved at the end of the grid generation. If the new project has not yet been saved before launching the 3D generation, no grid quality report file will be saved because the system is not able to determine automatically the file location.
b) Template files
The template files contain the parameters and the geometry needed to reproduced the mesh with AutoGrid5:
new_prefix.geomTurbo and new_prefix.geomTurbo.xmt_txt (.geomTurbo.X_T): the geometry

files (geomTurbo format)
new_prefix.trb: the template file containing the grid generation parameters. new_prefix.info: the information file new_prefix_b2b.png: a picture of the blade to blade view new_prefix_merid.png: a picture of the meridional view
FIGURE 1.2.5-1 Example
of file management for an AutoGrid5 project
AutoGrid5
1-3
Getting Started
How To Use This Manual
1-3
1-3.1

How To Use This Manual

Outline
Chapters 1and 2: Introduction and description of the interface, Chapter 3: Mesh fundamentals, Chapter 4: Mesh generation wizard, Chapters 5 to 8: Mesh generation and parameters, Chapters 9 and 10: Meridional and 3D technological effects. Chapter 11: Cooling & Conjugate Heat Transfer Modules. Chapter 12: Script within AutoGrid5.
This manual consists of four distinct parts:
At first time use of AutoGrid5 it is recommended to read this first chapter carefully and certainly section 1-4 to section 1-6. Chapters 2, 3 and 4 give a general overview of the AutoGrid5 interface and the way to manage a project. For every mesh generation, the input parameters can be defined as described in the Chapters 5 to 8. Chapters 9 and 10 give an overview of how to add technological effects in the Meridional or in the 3D view. Chapter 11 is describing how to define cooling holes, basin, cooling channel with pin fins/ribs and to mesh the solid body (blade and end walls). Chapter 12 is presenting python commands available within AutoGrid5.
1-3.2

Conventions
Some conventions are used to ease information access throughout this guide: Commands to type in are in italic. Keys to press are in italic and surrounded by <> (e.g.: press <Ctrl>). Names of menu or sub-menu items are in bold. Names of buttons that appear in dialog boxes are in italic. Numbered sentences are steps to follow to complete a task. Sentences that follow a step and are preceded with a dot () are substeps; they describe in detail how to accomplish the step. The hand indicates an important note. The pair of scissors indicates a keyboard shortcut. A light bulb in the margin indicates a section with a description of expert parameters.
1-4
AutoGrid5
First Time Use
Getting Started
1-4
1-4.1
First Time Use

Basic Installation
When using AutoGrid5 for first time it is necessary that AutoGrid5 is properly installed according to the installation note. The installation note provided with the installation software should be read carefully and the following points are specifically important:
Hardware and operating system requirements should be verified to see whether the chosen
machine is supported.
Installation of AutoGrid5 according to the described procedure in a directory chosen by the

user and referenced in the installation note as NUMECA_INSTALLATION_DIRECTORY.
A license should be requested that allows for the use of AutoGrid5 and the desired component and modules (see section 1-6 for all available licenses). The license should be installed according to the described procedure in the installation note.
Each user willing to use AutoGrid5 or any other NUMECA software must perform a user
configuration as described in the installation note. When these points are checked the software can be started as described in the installation note or section 1-5 of this users guide.
1-4.2
Expert Graphics Options
a) Graphics Driver
The graphics area of AutoGrid5 interface uses by default an OPENGL driver that takes advantage of the available graphics card. When the activation of OPENGL is causing problems, AutoGrid5 uses an X11 driver (on UNIX) or MSW driver (for Windows) instead. It is possible to explicitly change the driver used by FINE in the following ways: On UNIX: in csh, tcsh or bash shell: setenv NI_DRIVER X11 in korn shell: NI_DRIVER=X11 export NI_DRIVER The selection will take effect at the next session. On Windows:
Log in as Administrator. Launch regedit from the Start/Run menu. Go to the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/SOFTWARE/NUMECA International/Fine# or autogrid# register. Modify the DRIVER entry to either OPENGL or MSW. The selection will take effect at the next session.
AutoGrid5
1-5
Getting Started
How to Start AutoGrid5 Interface
b) Background & Foreground Colors

The background color of the graphics area can be changed by setting the environment variable NI_IGG_REVERSEVIDEO on UNIX/LINUX platforms or IGG_REVERSEVIDEO on Windows platforms. Set the variable to ON to have a black background (white axis) and set it to OFF to have a white background (black axis). The variable can be manually specified through the following commands: On UNIX: in csh, tcsh or bash shell: setenv NI_IGG_REVERSEVIDEO ON in korn shell: NI_IGG_REVERSEVIDEO=ON export NI_IGG_REVERSEVIDEO The selection will take effect at the next session. On Windows:
Log in as Administrator. Launch System Properties from the Start/Settings/Control Panel/System menu. Go in the Environment Variables. Modify or add the IGG_REVERSEVIDEO entry to either ON or OFF.
The selection will take effect at the next session. Furthermore, the background and foreground colors of the graphics area can be adapted through File/Preferences menu available within IGG in the Colors page.
1-5
How to Start AutoGrid5 Interface
In order to run AutoGrid5, the following command should be executed: On UNIX and LINUX platforms type: igg -niversion # -autogrid5 <Enter> On Windows platforms:
1.
click on the IGG icon in Start/Programs/NUMECA software/Fine# or in Start/Programs/ NUMECA software/autogrid#. Then AutoGrid5 is accessible through the menu Modules/ AutoGrid5. alternatively AutoGrid can be launched from a dos shell by typing:
2.
<NUMECA_INSTALLATION_DIRECTORY>\Fine#\bin\igg.exe <Enter> or <NUMECA_INSTALLATION_DIRECTORY>\autogrid#\bin\igg.exe <Enter> where NUMECA_INSTALLATION_DIRECTORY is the directory indicated in section 1-4.1. Then AutoGrid5 is accessible through the menu Modules/AutoGrid5.
1-6
AutoGrid5
Required Licenses
Getting Started
1-6
1-6.1
Required Licenses
Standard AutoGrid5 License
The standard license for AutoGrid5 allows for the use of all basic features of AutoGrid5 including:
CAD importation and geometry management (except CATIA v5), single row and multistage management, skin, HOH and H&I blade-to-blade topology management, wind turbine mesh wizard, introduction of blade to blade cut, no meridional technological effect, no 3D technological effect, no solid mesh, cooling channel, holes, pin fins and ribs.
1-6.2

Additional Licenses
Within AutoGrid5 the following features are available that require a separate license: CATIA v5 importation, introduction of bypass configuration, introduction of meridional technological effect, user-defined blade-to-blade topology management, introduction of 3D technological effect, introduction of solid mesh, cooling channel, holes, pin fins and ribs.
Next to AutoGrid5 other products are available that require a separate license: FINE/Turbo (structured mesh generator - solver - visualization software), FINE/Design 3D (3D inverse design), Hexpress (unstructured mesh generator), FINE/Hexa (unstructured mesh generator - solver - visualization software), FINE/Marine (unstructured mesh generator - solver - visualization software).
AutoGrid5
1-7
Getting Started
Required Licenses
1-8
AutoGrid5
CHAPTER 2:
Graphical User Interface
2-1
Overview
When launching AutoGrid5 as described in Chapter 1 the interface appears in its default layout as shown in Figure 2.1.0-1. An overview of the complete layout of the AutoGrid5 Expert Mode interface (see Chapter 4 for AutoGrid5 Wizard Mode interface) is shown on the next page in Figure 2.1.0-2. In the next sections the items in this interface are described in more detail.
FIGURE 2.1.0-1 AutoGrid5
Expert Mode Interface.
Together with the AutoGrid5 interface, a Open Turbo Project Wizard window is opened, which allows to open an existing project. See section 2-2.2 for description of this window.
AutoGrid5
2-1
Project Selection
A File Chooser window is available for browsing through the file system and to select a file. More detail on the File Chooser window is given in section 2-8.
Menu bar (section 2-3) Toolbar (section 2-4)
Graphics area (section 2-7)
Quick Access Pad (section 2-5)

Message area KeyBoard Input Area Mouse coordinates Generation Status Grid parameters area Information area Viewing Buttons
Control area (section 2-6)
Graphical User Interface (Expert Mode)
2-2
Project Selection
Together with the AutoGrid5 interface, a Open Turbo Project Wizard window is opened, which allows to open an existing template with or without the corresponding mesh. See section 2-2.2 for description of this window. After use of this window it is closed. To create or open a template or a project is also possible using the File menu.
2-2.1
1.
Create New Template/Project
To create a new template or project when launching the AutoGrid5 interface: close the Open Turbo Project Wizard window.
2-2
AutoGrid5
Project Selection
2.
select File/New Project or click on the New Project icon ( which allows to confirm. Click yes to confirm.
). A new window will appear,
3.
A project initialization window appears to assign a geometry to the new project. There are five possibilities: to start a new project presenting a bypass (if license key) from scratch.
to start a new project presenting a bypass and a fin on fan (if license key) from scratch. to start a new project presenting no bypass and no fin on fan from scratch. to start a new project presenting a cascade configuration from scratch. to initialize a new project from an existing ".geomTurbo" file. Then a File Chooser window is available for browsing through the file system and to select a file. When clicking on OK (Open) the geometry is loaded in AutoGrid5.
2-2.2
Open Existing Template/Project
If the Open Turbo Project Wizard window is closed, select File/Open Project. A new window will appear, which allows to confirm. Click yes to confirm.
To open an existing project the following possibilities are available in the Open Turbo Project Wizard window:
Click on the icon Select a Project File. A File Chooser will appear that allows to browse to the
location of the existing template. Automatically the filter in the File Chooser is set to display only the files with extension ".trb", the default extension for a template file. If the option Load Mesh is active, the corresponding mesh will also be loaded. Select a Project in the List by left clicking on it, this list contains all projects available in the local AutoGrid5 library. To view all information on the selected template, click on Info>>. To remove the selected template from the list, click on Hide. To open the selected template click on Open Template or double-click on the selected template. To open the selected project (the template with the corresponding mesh) click on Open Project.
AutoGrid5
2-3
Main Menu Bar
2-3
Main Menu Bar
The menu bar contains a part of available options of AutoGrid5. Menu items can be activated using click and drag or click and release modes.
2-3.1
File Menu
2-3.1.1 Open Project

The menu item File/Open Project allows to open an existing AutoGrid5 project. When clicking on File/Open Project a new window will appear, which allows to confirm. Click yes to confirm and to open the Open Turbo Project Wizard window presented in section 2-2.2.
2-3.1.2 New Project

The menu item File/New Project allows to create a new AutoGrid5 project. When clicking on File/New Project a new window will appear, which allows to confirm. Click yes to confirm an to open the project initialization window presented in section 2-2.1.
2-4
AutoGrid5
Main Menu Bar
2-3.1.3 Save Project / Save Project As

The File/Save Project or File/Save Project As menu item stores the project file (template and mesh) on disk. When clicking on File/Save Project As a new window will appear, which allows to:
Save the project (template and grid) under a new name when clicking on the icon Select a new
Project File Name.
Save the project (template and grid) under an existing name selected in the list when clicking
on the icon Overwrite the Selected Project. Add information to the project in the Enter Project Info area.
2-3.1.4 Save Template / Save Template As

The File/Save Template or File/Save Template As menu item stores the template files (template ".trb" and geometry ".geomTurbo") on disk. When clicking on File/Save Template As a new window will appear, which allows to:
Save the template under a new name when clicking on the icon Select a new Template File
Name. Save the template under an existing name selected in the list when clicking on the icon Overwrite the Selected Template. Add information to the project in the Enter Template Info area.
AutoGrid5
2-5
Main Menu Bar
2-3.1.5 Save Grid -> Save Grid As

The File/Save Grid/Save Grid As menu item stores the grid files on disk to enable to launch a computation within FINE/Turbo 8.7.
2-3.1.7 Save Grid -> Save Grid As Fine 7.4

The File/Save Grid/Save Grid As Fine 7.4 allows to save the grids generated in the current version of AutoGrid5 in a format compatible with IGG 5.7 (FINE/Turbo 7.4).
2-3.1.7 Save Grid -> Save Grid As Fine 8.6

The File/Save Grid/Save Grid As Fine 8.6 allows to save the grids generated in the current version of AutoGrid5 in a format compatible with IGG 8.6.
2-3.1.8 Save Grid -> Merge Project Grid

The File/Save Grid/Merge Project Grid menu item allows when dealing with multistage machine already generated to adapt the ".cgns" file when regenerating one or more rows of the machine based on a new geometry but still meshed with the same topology. Steps
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Generate full mesh of the multistage machine, Save project, Change geometry of one or more rows, Regenerate mesh of rows presenting new geometry but keep same topology, Merge project grid
2-3.1.9 Save Grid -> Save Fluid Domain(s)

In addition to the save subproject feature (more details in section 2-5.4.3 and in FINE User Manual), the menu Save Fluid Domain(s) creates and saves a subproject named SubProject Fluid containing only the fluid blocks of the project.
Transfer File List
2-3.1.10 Project List -> Transfer File List

The File/Project List/Transfer File List menu item enables to store a library of project files contained in the project list when selecting File/Open Project.
2-3.1.11 Project List -> Open File List

The File/Project List/Open File List menu item enables to load a library of project files accessible afterwards through the Project Selection and Template Selection windows
2-3.1.12 Scripts -> Edit

File/Scripts/Edit... opens a dialog box displaying some of the commands performed by the user when defining the geometry using Import CAD window, when performing a technological effect,... The user can easily edit this script (add, remove and modify commands). More details on the available commands are presented in the Chapter 12.
2-6
AutoGrid5
Main Menu Bar
The dialog box contains two pull-down menus. File menu allows to open a script in a separate dialog box and to save the script in a file. Run menu allows to run the script shown in the window under the current session ("Rerun on top").
2-3.1.13 Scripts -> Save All

File/Scripts/Save All... is used to save the dynamic recording of all commands performed by the user since the beginning of its session.
2-3.1.14 Scripts -> Execute

File/Script/Execute... is used to run a python script file containing IGG commands. A file chooser is opened to select a file with a ".py" extension. Upon selection of a valid file, the script is executed in the current session and the result is visualized in the graphical window. Depending on the content of the script, operations will be added to the current project or a new project will be automatically opened before operations are performed (The previous project is closed). If the script being run contains a syntactical error it will be aborted and a message will appear in the shell.
2-3.1.15 Scripts -> Re-execute Last

File/Script/Re-execute Last can be used to rerun the last script that was run using the Scripts/Execute... command. This option is most useful when writing own scripts manually to rapidly test it on the fly.
2-3.1.16 Print -> As PostScript

File/Print/As PostScript is used to dump the graphics area in a true PostScript file. This option uses true Postscript statements to save the graphics content and can produce compact files when all graphics entities in AutoGrid5 consist of lines (i.e. visualization of the grid in wireframe). When displaying surfaces in solid model, the quality of the saving reduces considerably while the size of the file can become very large.
2-3.1.17 Print -> As Bitmap PostScript

File/Print/As Bitmap PostScript is used to dump the graphics area in a bitmap PostScript file. In this mode each pixel of the graphics area is saved in the file. The size of the file can be very large. Bitmap saving may be more advantageous than true postscript when solid surfaces in hidden line mode appear in the graphics area.
2-3.1.18 Print -> As PNG

File/Print/As PNG is used to dump the graphics area in a PNG file.
AutoGrid5
2-7
Main Menu Bar
2-3.1.19 Export -> IGES

File/Export/IGES... menu is used to export geometry entities in the standard IGES format. The entire geometry repository can be saved or only the selected curves and surfaces. The length unit must also be specified through the following dialog box:
2-3.1.20 Export -> Geometry Selection

File/Export/Geometry Selection... is used to save the selected geometry curves and surfaces into an ASCII file. Only the curves and surfaces selected respectively by the Geometry/Select/Curves and by the Geometry/Select/Surfaces options are saved. When selected geometry is containing Parasolid and/or CATIA V5 entities, a Parasolid file will also be saved in addition of ".dat" file.
2-3.1.21 Export -> Geometry Control Points

File/Export/Geometry Control Points... is used to save the control points of the selected geometry curves into an ASCII file. It does not save the complete information about the curve (type, parametrization,...). The files created in this way are not intended to be directly read by AutoGrid5. Their main use is to print out the coordinates of the control points of the curves. This option is only available for curves, not for surfaces.
2-3.1.22 Export -> Block Coor

File/Export/Block Coor... is used to save the coordinates of an active block range in ASCII format, according to the level of coarseness selected for the grid (set by using View/Coarse Grid menu item). A warning is given if the grid has not been created yet. The standard block grid file format is used and is detailed in IGG User Manual - Chapter 11. The block range to save must be determined by two points, specified by their IJK coordinates in the keyboard input area (indices start at 1): Enter imin jmin kmin (q) Enter imax jmax kmax (q) By default, values for the full block range are displayed.
2-3.1.23 Export -> Face Coor

File/Export/Face Coor... is used to save the coordinates of the active face in ASCII format, according to the level of coarseness selected for the grid (set by using the View/Coarse Grid menu item). The standard surface grid file format is used and is detailed in the IGG User Manual - Chapter 11.
2-8
AutoGrid5
Main Menu Bar
2-3.1.24 Export -> Patch Coor

File/Export/Patch Coor... is used to save the coordinates of the active face patches in ASCII format, according to the level of coarseness selected for the grid (set by using the View/Coarse Grid menu item). The standard face grid file format is used and is detailed in the IGG User Manual - Chapter 11. One file is created for each patch of the active face and is named automatically by appending the patch number to the specified file name. The files are written with a ".dat" extension.
2-3.1.25 Export -> Plot3D

File/Export/PLOT3D... is used to save the coordinates of all grid blocks in a PLOT3D format file. The saved file will have a ".g" extension and its format is described in the IGG User Manual Chapter 11. The following dialog box is opened to select a file with a ".g" extension and the corresponding file format.
FIGURE 2.3.1-1 Output
file and file format selection
The following file types can be selected in the File type entry:
ASCII Binary single Binary double Unformatted single Unformatted double
Binary stands for C binary files whereas Unformatted stands for Fortran binary files. Single and double describe the precision of reals. Then two radio buttons are provided to select the binary order desired in the output file: little or big endian. This information must be specified only for binary files (the buttons are deactivated when ASCII type is selected). The desired file can be selected by entering its full path name into the Plot3D File entry or through a file chooser opened by pressing the icon ( ) next to the file entry.
2-3.1.26 Import -> IGG Project

File/Import/IGG Project... is used to merge an existing IGG project stored on disk with the currently opened project. It allows several people working on large projects to perform the meshing in separate sessions and to merge their work at a later stage.
AutoGrid5
2-9
Main Menu Bar
a) Prefix
To easily recognize blocks and groups of an imported project from those in the current project, a prefix can be specified during importation. For this purpose, a dialog box is provided:
Upon proper prefix specification, all the names of patches, blocks, geometry groups and block groups will be automatically prepended with the prefix. For example, if a block being imported is named "Inlet"and a prefix "stage1" is specified, the name of the block within the current session will be "stage1#Inlet". Due to limitations in the CGNS format, the length of the prefix should be limited to 5 characters. Moreover it cannot begin with a number. If no prefix is specified blocks and groups names will not be modified. Exception to this rule holds however when an imported block has the same name as a block in the current project. In that case an underscore will be automatically appended to the name. Pressing on the Cancel button will cancel the importation of the selected project in AutoGrid5.
b) Importation operations
During project importation the following operations are performed:
All the curves and surfaces from the imported project are added to the current project. When a
name clashing occurs with existing curves or surfaces, AutoGrid5 automatically renames the imported entities. The prefix currently does not apply to curves and surfaces.
All the blocks of the imported project are appended to the existing blocks. The index of the
imported blocks is adapted automatically to follow the last block of the current project. The name of the patches and blocks follow the rule described here above.
The geometry and block groups are imported in the current project. The names of the groups
follow the rule described here above.
2-3.1.27 Import -> IGG Data

File/Import/IGG Data... is used to read external curves and surfaces stored in an ASCII IGG format. The file formats are specific to IGG (Curve & Surface data files) and are described in IGG User Manual - Chapter 11. When using the option, a file chooser is opened to select files with ".dat" or ".dst" extensions. Upon acceptance, the entities are automatically stored in the geometry repository and displayed in the graphical area. A fitting of the view may be needed to see all the entities properly. Since AutoGrid5 uses the name of curves and surfaces to access them, no duplicate is allowed. During importation of a geometry file, AutoGrid5 checks for name duplication. When an entity being loaded has the same name as an existing entity in the current session, a dialog box is opened with different possibilities:
2-10
AutoGrid5
Main Menu Bar
FIGURE 2.3.1-2 Importation
options dialog box.
Replace: When using this mode, AutoGrid5 replaces the existing curve or surface by the one being imported. At the end of importation, AutoGrid5 remaps all the vertices and edges lying on the replaced entities so that the topology of the grid fits onto the new geometry. This mode should be used when using the current project as a template. See the chapter related to templates for additional information. Dont Load: When using this mode, the entity having the same name will NOT be imported in the session. Auto Rename: When using this mode, AutoGrid5 imports the entity and automatically modifies its name so that it becomes unique in the current session. If no replacement is desired (as described above), this option should be used.
2-3.1.28 Import -> External Grid

File/Import/External Grid... is used to import inside the current AutoGrid5 project a block grid generated either by IGG/AutoGrid5 (using File/Export/Block Coor... menu item) or by another grid generator. A file chooser is opened to select a file with a ".dat" extension. Several file formats are available:
Block data file Surface data file (2D or 3D wireframe) Multiple surface data file (2D or 3D wireframe)
See the IGG User Manual - Chapter 11 for a detailed description of the formats. Upon selection of a valid file, a new block (or several for multiple data files) is created and put at the end of the list of blocks. For "Surface data file", which represent surfacic meshes, only face 1 of the block is created. For 2D meshes, the z coordinate is set automatically to 0 for all the points. AutoGrid5 automatically creates the block topology (edges) by using the boundary grid points of the block.
2-3.1.29 Import -> Face Grid

File/Import/Face Grid... is used to import and copy a 2D or 3D grid surface to the active face or to a BC patch on this face. A file chooser is opened to select a file, which must have a ".dat" extension and have the Surface data file format (see the IGG User Manual - Chapter 11 for more information about this format). The type of surface and the edge creation mode are indicated from the key-
AutoGrid5
2-11
Main Menu Bar
board input area. If the edges of selected surface are on the boundaries and the edge creation flag is on, the segments of that edge are created as polylines. When the active face contains several patches, the imported grid can be copied on the entire face or on one of its patches. In this case, the following prompt(s) appear: Surface (=0) or Patch (=1) ? (q) >> 1 Patch number (1...3) ? (q) (if previous answer is 1) >> 2 Then the following prompt will appear to specify if edges must be reconstructed by using the face boundary grid points: Create boundary segments (y/n) ? >> y
2-3.1.30 Import -> Topology

The option File/Import/Topology... allows to re-use an existing IGG/AutoGrid5 project on a similar geometry by importing all the topology and grid information from the related ".igg" file. The complete current project is deleted before importing. During the import operation, the following happens:
all the geometry entities are discarded from the imported project. the geometry groups are loaded, emptied from any curve or surface. the grid information like number of blocks, connection between blocks, clustering,... is
kept.
the blocks topology (vertices and edges) is kept, as well as their position and shape. the face generation recording, including the projection on geometry groups is kept.
Then, to use the imported topology on a similar geometry, do the following:
Import the new geometry with the File/Import/IGG Data... or IGES... options. Redefine the geometry groups by selecting the proper surfaces and by adding them to the
existing groups (right button press on a geometry group pops up a menu for adding or removing the current geometry selection).
Remap all the vertices manually onto the new geometry. New vertices may be added if the
topology of the new geometry has changed. Regenerate the faces with the Regenerate Face option. It is to be noted that face projected onto a geometry group will be successfully re-projected if the groups have been redefined as described in the previous operation.
2-3.1.31 Import -> CATIA V5

The option File/Import/CATIA V5... reads external geometry files in CATIA format. Several CATIA files can be opened when defining the geometry before the domain creation. CATIA importation is optional and subject to an additional license file allowing the user to import CATIA V5 file within AutoGrid5.
2-3.1.32 Import -> Parasolid

The option File/Import/Parasolid... reads external geometry files in Parasolid format ".x_t". Several Parasolid files (Parasolid and CATIA v5) can be opened when defining the geometry before the domain creation.
2-12
AutoGrid5
Main Menu Bar
Importation is not available on 64 bits platforms except LINUX x86_64. Please refer to the installation note for more information about the 64 bits supported platforms. The supported Parasolid version is 19.
2-3.1.33 Import -> IGES

File/Import/IGES... menu is used to import CAD data stored in the standard IGES format. When names are defined for entities the IGES file, AutoGrid5 uses them for the new entities created in the repository. When these names are already used by existing entities, a dialog box is opened to resolve the conflict. See the menu option File/Import/IGG Data... for details about the dialog box.
FIGURE 2.3.1-3
IGES file browser
This option provides a powerful browser to scan the content of an IGES file and selectively import IGES entities recognized by AutoGrid5. In the case of composite curves and surfaces, the browser allows to view each component defining the entity and to select them individually. Filters, reserved to expert users, allows to filter the data viewed by the browser. Each filter corresponds to a criterion defining if entities with the corresponding attribute set accordingly will be displayed in the browser/imported. It might be useful to uncheck the Blank Filter/Blanked item in order to import only the entities meant to be visible and get a clear view of the intended geometry. The same holds for the Entity Use Filter with only the geometry item checked. For the Subordinate Filter items, it might be useful to also have the both item checked if top-level entities cannot be translated, preventing the importation of their depending entities.
AutoGrid5
2-13
Main Menu Bar
The Filters default settings have the following items checked: all Blank Filter items, all Entity Use Filter items but the definition item, the Subordinate Filter independent and logical items, all Hierarchy Filter items. See the IGES reference manual for a complete understanding of all filter values. The list of available IGES entities that can be imported in AutoGrid5 are presented in the table below.
Entity Type Nr 100 102 104 106 110 112 114 116 120 122 126 128 130 140 142 144 158 196 Entity Type Circular Arc Composite Curve Conic Arc Copious Data (only curves and not points in AutoGrid5 ) Line Parametric Spline Curve Parametric Spline Surface Point Surface of Revolution Tabulated Cylinder Rational B-spline Curve
Rational B-Spline Surface Offset Curve AutoGrid5)

Offset Surface
(only
uniform
offset
in
Curve On Parametric Surface Trimmed Parametric Surface Sphere

Spherical surface
2-3.1.34 Import -> PLOT3D

File/Import/PLOT3D... is used to import inside the current AutoGrid5 project block(s) generated either by IGG/AutoGrid5 (using File/Export/PLOT3D... menu item) or by another grid generator. The imported file must have a ".g" extension and have the PLOT3D file format, as described in IGG User Manual - Chapter 11. The following dialog box is opened to select a file with a ".g" extension and the corresponding file format.
2-14
AutoGrid5
Main Menu Bar
FIGURE 2.3.1-4 Input
file and file format selection
The following file types can be selected in the File type entry:
ASCII Binary single Binary double Unformatted single Unformatted double
Binary stands for C binary files whereas Unformatted stands for Fortran binary files. Single and double describe the precision of reals. Then three buttons are provided to select the remaining file specifications. These ones must be specified only for binary files (the buttons are deactivated when ASCII type is selected). The two first radio buttons allow to select the binary order in the file: little or big ending. The last button specifies if the file is single or multi-block. The desired file can be selected by entering its full path name into the Plot3D File entry or through a file chooser opened by pressing the icon ( ) next to the file entry.
Upon selection of a valid file, the blocks of the imported file are created and put at the end of the current list of blocks. AutoGrid5 automatically creates the block topology by using the block coordinates.
2-3.1.35 Import -> CGNS

File/Import/CGNS... is used to import CGNS grid files inside the current AutoGrid5 project. CGNS is a widely used standard for the exchange of CFD data. In particular it is very well suited to exchange meshes and boundary conditions between heterogeneous systems. Block coordinates and boundary conditions are read from the ".cgns" file. Only connections of type CON can be read and performed automatically by AutoGrid5. It is to be noticed that a CGNS file is automatically created during the saving of a project, using the File/Save options. This file can be reread by AutoGrid5 using this option or exchanged with other CGNS compliant systems. The imported file must have a ".cgns" extension and must be a valid CGNS format, as described in IGG User Manual - Chapter 11. A file chooser is opened to select a file with a ".cgns" extension. Upon selection of a valid file, the blocks of the imported file are created and put at the end of the current list of blocks. AutoGrid5 automatically creates the block topology by using the block coordinates.
AutoGrid5
2-15
Main Menu Bar
2-3.1.36 Import -> GridPro

File/Import/GridPro... is used to import inside the current AutoGrid5 project block(s) created by the GridPro grid generator. A file chooser is opened to select a GridPro file. Upon selection of a valid file, the blocks of the imported file are created and put at the end of the current list of blocks. A message indicating what block is read appears in the AutoGrid5 message area. AutoGrid5 automatically creates the block topology by using the block coordinates. Blocks connection information is read by IGG and patch decomposition is automatically performed. Periodicity information is not read from the file and must be specified manually within AutoGrid5, when required, using the Grid/Periodicity... and Grid/Boundary Conditions... menu items.
2-3.1.37 Preferences
The File/Preferences opens a dialog box to control the default settings of AutoGrid5. This dialog box contains three pages. All the parameters are validated by pressing the Apply button, which applies the option and automatically saves them in the file ~/.numeca/igg.preferences. When starting AutoGrid5, this file is read automatically and the preferences are restored directly. If this file cannot be found, the system is initialized with default settings.
a) Saving Page
Backup when saving is used to make a backup of the geometry and topology files at saving. AutoGrid5 backups the project using a ".bak" extension (<projectname>.igg.bak). Ask quality check when saving option is used to make automatically some tests on the grid each time a project is saved. It includes:
A calculation of the number of multigrid levels available in the I, J and K directions for the
whole grid.
A calculation of the negative cells in single and double precision.
2-16
AutoGrid5
Main Menu Bar
A rough idea of the grid quality (extremum values) in terms of orthogonality, aspect ratio
and expansion ratio. The results are displayed in a dialog box appearing automatically just after the saving. Save CGNS patch info option is used to save automatically boundary conditions information as connection type, full non matching connection definition,... in the ".cgns" file. The Keep Row(s) Name option is used to control the way the row names and blade names are saved in the cgns file:
"ROW(<i>)" and "BLADE(<i>)" where i is the row and blade number when Keep Row(s)
Name is not active.
row and blade names imposed in AutoGrid5 (Quick Access Pad/Rows Definition) when Keep Row(s) Name is active.
Keep Left Handed Orientation After Saving option (when deactivated) is used to keep lefthanded blocks when saving in order to decrease the time needed for saving or loading intermediate meshes including multiple blocks (e.g. blade with cooling holes and channel with ribs and pin fins).
b) Graphics Page
The Graphics Driver flag is used to select the driver X11. The Visibility flag is used to control the rendering of graphic objects during dynamic viewing operations. With full visibility, all graphic objects are displayed during viewing operations, which may slow down the system response. When partial visibility is selected, only grid boundaries are displayed during viewing operations. Turn On Additional Lights option allows to enhance the lightening for shaded representations. Edges width frame allows to control the width of the block edges displayed in the graphics area. The width of the active block edges can be controlled by Highlight width and the width of other block edges by Normal width. Grid Line Width allows to control the width of the grid lines displayed in the graphics area.
AutoGrid5
2-17
Main Menu Bar
Geometry Curve Width allows to control the width of the geometry curves displayed in the graphics area. Meridional channel shading option allows to have the channel in the meridional view represented with shading. B2B Full Mesh Visibility option allows to see the mesh moving in the blade to blade view when applying the modified blade to blade mesh parameters. This option is interesting for demo purposes but it is not recommended to keep it active when generating the 3D mesh. B2B Full Quality Visibility option allows to see the mesh skewness (orthogonality) field moving in the blade to blade view when applying the modified blade to blade mesh parameters. This option is interesting for demo purposes but it is not recommended to keep it active when generating the 3D mesh. Automatic 3D Mesh Viewing option allows to see the 3D solid mesh (section 2-3.3.8) when loading a project or after generating the mesh.
c) Layout Page
This page allows to control some aspects of the AutoGrid5TM graphical interface. Quick Access Pad is used to toggle the Quick Access Pad. Control Area toggles the visibility of the control area at the bottom of AutoGrid5 main window. It allows to use a larger part of the screen for better graphics rendering, but cannot be used during the interactive generation of a mesh, since it hides the keyboard input area and the viewing buttons. Balloon Help is used to activate or deactivate the on-line balloon help available in AutoGrid5TM. When activated, help balloons are displayed when the cursor is located on some buttons or icons. Progress Status is used to toggle the progress status window when performing the mesh generation. Optimization Convergence History toggles the convergence history window when performing the mesh generation.
2-3.1.38 Quit
File/Quit is used to end the interactive session. A dialog box is inserted to confirm the end of the session. Please notice that the current work is NOT automatically saved when exiting AutoGrid5.
2-3.2
Geometry Menu
All menus are described in detail in the dedicated IGG User Manual - Chapter 9. This menu is only available when selecting the 3D view or when adding a 3D technological effects (AutoGrid5 User Manual - Chapter 10).
2-18
AutoGrid5
Main Menu Bar
2-3.3
View Menu
The View menu options provide a set of display options to visualize the grid boundaries, surface and block grids, repetition, hidden lines and rendered surfaces. The viewing parameters and projection can also be modified interactively.
2-3.3.1 Patch Viewer

View/Patch Viewer... is used to visualize selected patches in wireframe or solid mode to produce full rendered pictures of the grid. The dialog box provides control over the colour and transparency effects for each patch. Patch Browser: The patch browser (see figure below) lists all the patches in the grid, according to the current Block, Face, Patch or Type filters. In this browser, one or more patches can be selected with the left mouse button. It is possible to select several patches at once in the following way:
While holding the <Ctrl> key down, select the desired patches in the browser. While holding the <Shift> key down, select two patches delimiting a range of patches. While pressing the left mouse button, drag the mouse and release the left button to select a range of
patches. Patch browser, allowing to select the current patch(es)
Visibility control during transparency setting
Wireframe visualization control
Solid visualization control
Show the selected patches as wireframe Hide solid for selected patches Hide wireframe for selected patches
FIGURE 2.3.3-1 Patch
Show the selected patches as solid Viewer dialog box
Filters: The different filters allow to display specific patches of a grid in the browser while hiding the others. The Block, Face and Patch filters work together and allow to display patches by indices. For example: Block Filter: Face filter: Patch filter: * 1 2 *
AutoGrid5
2-19
Main Menu Bar
shows in the browser all the patches of faces 1 and 2 of all the blocks. * means ALL. The Face filter allows also to select a boundary face by choosing imin, imax, jmin, jmax, kmin or kmax. These items can be shown and selected by left-clicking on the Face filter arrow. The Type filter is very useful to list all the patches of a given type (according to the other filters). In particular it allows to easily identify the periodic and connected patches (PER, PERNM, CON, NMB) and the patches that have not any type yet (UND). Patch visualization: To assign a color to one or several patches:
1. Select 2. Select 3.
the patches in the patch browser, one color from the predefined colors or from customized colours (Ed. button),
Press the Show Grid (wireframe representation) or the Show Solid (solid representation) button.
To hide the patches representation, proceed in the same way by pressing the Hide Grid or the Hide Solid button. It is possible to make some patches semi-transparent by specifying a transparency factor on the selected patches. The transparency factor can vary from 0 (no transparency) to 1 (highly transparent). By default, the transparency factor is only applied when pressing the Show Solid button. This default may be overwritten by activating the Full Visibility toggle button. In this case, the transparency effect will be recomputed each time the transparency slider is moved. Since the rendering of transparent patches is computationally intensive and may take up to several minutes, it is not advised to use the Full Visibility flag on large grids.
2-3.3.2 Sweep Surfaces

View/Sweep Surfaces... is used to scroll the constant grid index surfaces within 3D grid blocks. If the active block is not generated or has been modified since the last generation (by moving a vertex, for example), the following message will appear:
FIGURE 2.3.3-2 Message indicating
that the block may be regenerated
It asks for block regeneration. If the block is not generated and that the no button is pressed, the dialog box of the next figure will appear but without being able to do something except pressing the Close button. If the block has been modified since the last generation (a block is not automatically regenerated after modifications of its topology) and that the no button is pressed, the mesh that will be interactively displayed (see below) may look quite strange. Mesh sweeping is done through the following dialog box:
FIGURE 2.3.3-3 Sweep
Surfaces dialog box.
2-20
AutoGrid5
Main Menu Bar
The Block box allows to choose the active block in which the surface grids will be scrolled. Next to this box, the active block name and the amount of grid points in each direction (according to the coarse grid levels selected) are displayed. It is to be noticed that setting the Block to 0 allows to scroll the grid surface on all blocks. The I, J and K scrollers allow to interactively sweep the surface grid along the three directions. While scrolling, surface grids are displayed for each constant index direction.
2-3.3.3 Coarse Grid

View/Coarse Grid is used to view in the meridional, blade to blade and 3D views the selected coarse grid level in the active view. When selecting the menu, a dialog box allows to impose the Coarse Grid Level to plot.
FIGURE 2.3.3-4 Coarse
level viewer
In the meridional and blade to blade views, the option is available when respectively the flow paths and the blade to blade mesh are generated. In the 3D view, the coarse grid levels can be plotted on the active block or grid. To select the scope (active block or grid), set the viewing scope (see the Quick Access Pad/View/Grid page description) to Block or Grid mode. The active coarse grid levels are taken into consideration while:
displaying the block faces and boundary conditions patches on all active views, saving the block or face coordinates, scrolling the block surface grids or cells.
These graphical representations are automatically updated after each change to the coarse grid levels. The finest grid level is identified as 1. The smallest number of grid points for coarse levels is 2. The coarsest level is computed and updated in each index direction separately. The keyboard input area is used to enter the desired levels within available ranges.
AutoGrid5
2-21
Main Menu Bar
2-3.3.4 Repetition
View/Repetition... opens the following dialog box to control the repetition of the blocks on the active view (in 3D and blade-to-blade views only):
FIGURE 2.3.3-5 View
Repetition dialog box
For each block, the number of repetition desired can be set in the Nb Repet entry. The repetition of all blocks can be displayed or hidden respectively by pressing the Show or Hide button. To perform a repetition, AutoGrid5TM takes the information about the periodicity of each block (angle, rotation axis,...) in the Grid/Periodicity dialog box. By default, the repetition is not displayed.
2-3.3.5 Face Displacement

View/Face Displacement menu allows to adapt the view if interferences are appearing between the grid lines and the shading. When the block face grids are visualized, in both wireframe and solid modes (shading), visual interference may be produced between the grid lines and the shading. For this reason, AutoGrid5 slightly shifts the grid lines towards the user to get a correct picture. This shift is controlled by the Face displacement. This parameter represents the amount by which the grid is shifted along the view plane normal vector (normal to the screen), and is used to correct the display when combining wireframe and solid representations. The following window is shown to enter the face displacement (higher or equal to 1).
Apply and Close to respectively apply the new parameter and close the window.
2-3.3.6 View Depth

View/View Depth menu allows to control the view depth. This depth is used for all interactive geometry editing operations with the mouse. When using the option, the new depth for the active view is imposed by entering the coordinates of the reference point: New reference pt coordinates (q) >> 0 0 0
2-22
AutoGrid5
Main Menu Bar
All subsequent inputs with the mouse will be at z = 0. To quit this option, enter <q> and press <Enter>.
2-3.3.7 Toggle 3D Solid View

View/toggle 3D Solid View is used as a toggle to show shaded view of the complete hub and single blade on each of the rows of the turbomachine in the 3D view. The number of blades in the graphics area can be repeated for each row individually using the Number Of Graphics Repetition parameter available in the Row Properties dialog box. Activate the Default option to see a complete view of all the blades of the selected row.
FIGURE 2.3.3-6 3D
solid view with graphics repetition
2-3.3.8 View/Hide 3D Solid Mesh

View/view 3D Solid Mesh and View/hide 3D Solid Mesh are used to respectively show or hide in the 3D view the mesh on hub and blades (shading and mesh on hub/blades). Furthermore, the View/ Patch Viewer... menu can be used to adapt or to clean the visualized solid mesh.
AutoGrid5
2-23
Graphical User Interface 2-3.3.9 View 3D Solid Block
Main Menu Bar
View/view 3D Solid Block is used to show in the 3D view the mesh on the solid blocks (shading and mesh).This option is not a toggle, the View/Patch Viewer... menu has to be used to adapt or to clean the visualized solid mesh.
basin Blade including basin cooling holes cooling holes
2-3.3.10 Toggle Throughflow Mesh

View/toggle throughflow mesh is used as a toggle to show the throughflow mesh in the meridional view. This mesh is used for the initial turbomachinery solution available in FINE GUI (EURANUS).
2-3.3.11 Toggle Tool Bar / Symbolic View / Configuration/IGG Panel

View/Toggle Tool Bar is used as a toggle to show or hide the toolbar presented in section 2-4. View/Toggle Symbolic View is used as a toggle to show or hide the symbolic view presented in section 2-7.1. View/Toggle Configuration Panel is used as a toggle to show or hide the quick access pad presented in section 2-5. View/Toggle IGG Panel is used as a toggle to show or hide the quick access pad of IGG available when activating the 3D view or performing a 3D technological effect as presented in section 10-4 and in IGG User Manual.
2-24
AutoGrid5
Main Menu Bar
2-3.4
Grid Menu
The Grid menu includes the connectivity and boundary conditions definitions, as well as the grid quality tools.
2-3.4.1 Periodicity
Grid/Periodicity... menu is used to check or to define the periodicity for each block of the grid to generate and it is defined automatically depending of the number of blades in the row in the following dialog box. Index of the block affected by "Apply" (0 applies the settings to all the blocks) Periodicity parameters, function of the periodicity type
Periodicity type
Clears the parameters
Close the box Applies the current settings to the specified block dialog box
FIGURE 2.3.4-1 Periodicity
In this box, the following things can be specified: Block number: The periodicity can be defined block by block or for the whole grid. To define the periodicity for the whole grid, the block number should be set to 0. All subsequent "Apply" will affect ALL the blocks of the grid, overwriting previous settings. Periodicity type: Three types of periodicity can be specified:
Rotation: A rotation periodicity rotates a block around a given axis by a specified angle. The
rotation axis is specified by a rotation axis direction (axis) and an anchor point (origin). The angle is indirectly specified by indicating the number of periodicities for the block, e.g. a compressor with 4 blades should have a number of periodicities of 4, and the number of meshed passages is directly specified.
Translation: A translation periodicity, e.g. a cascade in turbomachinery, is obtained by specifying a translation vector, in direction and magnitude. For example, a translation vector of (0,0,2) will repeat a block along the Z axis by 2 absolute units.
Mirror: A mirror periodicity mirrors a block with respect to a symmetry plane and is specified by the origin and normal of the mirror plane. To choose among these types, simply left-click on it. The dialog box contains also three buttons at the bottom:
AutoGrid5
2-25
Main Menu Bar
Apply: it applies the current settings to the specified block(s). Clear: it resets the periodicity parameters to default values for the specified block(s). Close: it closes the dialog box.
2-3.4.2 Boundary Conditions

Grid/Boundary Conditions... menu item allows to check or to serve three different purposes performed automatically within AutoGrid5:
1. 2. 3.
To divide the faces of the grid into patches, for grid generation purposes. To specify the boundary conditions on these patches, as input to a flow solver. To establish connection between the patches.
When invoking the menu item, a dialog box is opened:
FIGURE 2.3.4-2 Boundary
Conditions dialog box
a) Patch Browser
The patch browser (see Figure 2.3.4-2) lists all the patches in the grid, according to the current "Block", "Face", "Patch", "Type", "MG.Level" or "Name" filters. In this browser, a patch can be selected with the left mouse button. This patch is automatically visualized in the graphics area according to the visualization options in the dialog box:
Show Grid will display the grid of the patch. Show Solid will display the patch as a solid face.
It is possible to select several patches at once in the following ways:
1.
While holding the <Ctrl> key down, select the desired patches in the browser.
2-26
AutoGrid5
Main Menu Bar
2. 3.
While holding the <Shift> key down, select two patches delimitating a range of patches. While pressing the left mouse button, drag the mouse and release the left button to select a range of patches.
The last patch selected is always the current patch for manual connections and patch editing.
b) Filters
The different filters allow to display specific patches in the browser while hiding the others. The "Block", "Face" and "Patch" filters are cumulative and allow to display patches by indices. For example: Block Filter: Face filter: Patch filter: * (* means ALL) 1 2 *
shows in the browser all the patches of faces 1 and 2 of all the blocks. The "Face" filter allows also to select a boundary face by choosing imin, imax, jmin, jmax, kmin or kmax. These items can be shown and selected by left-clicking on the "Face" filter arrow. The "Type" filter is very useful to list all the patches of a given type (according to the other filters). In particular it allows to easily identify the connected patches (CON, NMB, PER, PERNM) and the patches that have not any type yet (UND). The "MG.Level" filter can be used to see the list of patches for a given multigrid level. The "Name" filter allows to display patches by name. Enter or choose an expression. All the patches of which the name contains this expression will be listed.
c) Patch Type Specification

An option menu allows the setting of the boundary condition type for the selected patch(es). The possible boundary condition types are the following:
UND : undefined type. INL : inlet. OUT : outlet. EXT : external. Used to impose farfield conditions. SOL : solid. Used for walls. SNG : singular. Used for patch degenerated into a line. MIR : mirror. Used to impose a symmetry plane. ROT : rotating. Used for rotor-stator interaction. CON : matching connection. NMB : non matching connection. PER : periodic matching connection. PERNM : periodic non matching connection.
The following types can be set manually: INL, OUT, EXT, SOL, SNG, ROT, MIR. To set such a type, left-press on the Set Patch Type button of the dialog box; a list with all the types that can be set manually appears. Move the cursor to the desired type and release the left button to set it to the selected patch(es). If a patch is involved in a full non matching connection, a "*" will appear next to the patch type.
AutoGrid5
2-27
Main Menu Bar
d) Patch Definition & Editing

The patch definition mode is enabled by pressing the Edit Patch >> button. The dialog box is then enlarged to show a symbolic definition of the current face, as shown in the following figure.
Edit Patch area

Symbolic face representation
patch limits
Clicking the right mouse button pulls down a menu for deleting or dividing the patch: Current patch
Clicking on the border allows to change the patch limits Close Edit Patch area Current patch info
FIGURE 2.3.4-3 Patch
editing
In this example the active face has three patches with a topology indicated in the figure. The current patch is represented in yellow. The current patch can be changed by clicking with the left mouse button within the rectangle corresponding to the desired patch. The current patch is automatically updated in the browser and in the graphics area. An information area is used to display information about the current patch (limits, indices and relative orientation of the connected patch if existing, and patch type). See Manual Connectivity Settings section for information about the relative orientation. The patch definition mode is disabled by pressing the "<<" button (see Figure 2.3.4-3).
e) Automatic Connectivity Search

Automatic connectivity search allows to perform connections between patches (matching and non matching, periodic or not). For periodic connections, the block periodicity must be set previously by using the Grid/Periodicity... menu item. Matching connections are obtained between two patches with same number of grid points along the two directions, and when all their points are matching at a specified tolerance. Non matching connections are obtained when some patches points are not matching at the specified tolerance, or when the number of grid points is not the same in one or both directions.
2-28
AutoGrid5
Main Menu Bar
A periodic connection between two patches (PER or PERNM) is equivalent to a simple connection, after application of the periodicity of the block to one of the patch. The following checks are performed by AutoGrid when trying to connect two patches:
Four patch corners must be matching at the given tolerance ("patch corner" means the
patch grid point at the corner of the patch).
Four patch boundaries must be matching at the given tolerance ("patch boundaries" means
curves passing through the patch grid points defining the patch limits).
Patch points must lie on a same common surface. For this, some points of the first patch are
projected on the surfacic cells of the second patch. An intersection must be found and the distance between the point and its projection must be lower than an internally calculated value based on the given tolerance and the patch dimension.
All the patch points must be matching at the given tolerance. Obviously, when number of
grid points is different in one or both directions, this test is never satisfied. The three first tests are performed for both matching and non matching connections and determine if a connection is possible between the two considered patches. The last test determines if the connection is matching or non-matching. The relative orientation of the two patches is automatically found after the three first tests and is assigned to the connection. Three interactors are provided with the automatic connectivity search: one field to input the absolute tolerance used to compare point coordinates, another one to delete all connections currently set (CON, NMB, PER, PERNM types) and one to start the search.
FIGURE 2.3.4-4 Automatic
connectivity search interactors
To make a new automatic connectivity search on all the patches, left-click on the Delete All button to delete all connections currently set. To delete only some connections, select the corresponding patches and set the patch type to UND by using the related button. Before starting the automatic search, the tolerance must be adjusted. It is specified in absolute units in the Tol input field. For example, if the mesh coordinates range from 0 to 1, a possible value is 1e5, whereas if the mesh coordinates range from 0 to 10000, a value of 1e-3 is more appropriate. The default value that is set at the dialog box opening is 1e-5. It is highly recommended to avoid setting a tolerance close to the patch size, otherwise connection can be wrongly found. For example, having two square patches of size 1 and distant of 2, a tolerance of 3 will connect them whereas they should remain disconnected. The search can be started by clicking on the Search button. At the end of the operation, the number of simple connections found as well as the number of periodic connections are displayed in the information area. The "Type" filter is automatically set to CON and the corresponding patches are listed in the Patch browser. It is advised to do this search operation after all the blocks have been properly defined and are ready to be used by the solver.
AutoGrid5
2-29
Main Menu Bar
f) Manual Connectivity Settings

When automatic connectivity search fails, the manual connectivity option can be activated by pressing the Manual... button. Within this option, the relative orientation of the two selected patches must be entered manually and checks are performed according to the connection type selected to detect if the connection is possible or not. This option opens a dialog box shown below:
Connected patch
Connection type
Relative orientation of the patches
FIGURE 2.3.4-5 Manual
Connectivity dialog box
Firstly, specify the indices of the patch that will be connected to the current patch and the connection type. Patch indices are defined as follows: Block, Face and Patch index. Enter them with the keyboard and validate them by pressing <Enter>. Secondly, the correct relative orientation of the two patches must be chosen. To define this, a reference patch is needed, which is always in this case the current patch selected in the "Patch browser". In general, with a couple of patches, by taking either the first or the second one as reference, the relative orientation will be different. In fact, for each patch, two axis can be defined, which are equal in direction and orientation to those of the block to which it belongs. So, there are three possibilities: I, J or K. To connect two patches, their relative orientation must be determined by specifying the correspondence between their axis. It is done by assigning an expression (such as "Ilow", "Khigh") for each axis. (expression = dir 1 for first axis and expression = dir 2 for second one). Dir 1 and dir 2 are determined as follows:
1. 2. 3. 4.
Take the first axis of the reference patch. Search the axis of the connected patch which has the same direction, that is to say X (where X is I, J or K). If the two axis have the same orientation, dir 1 = "Xhigh", else dir 1 = "Xlow". Do the same with the second axis of the reference patch to determine dir 2.
The first axis of the reference patch has to be chosen as follows:
axis (I, J) -> I axis (J, K) -> J axis (I, K) -> I

Example:
2-30
AutoGrid5
Main Menu Bar
Reference patch: Patch 1 - Patch 1 first axis: I - Dir 1: Klow - Dir 2: Ihigh Indeed, it can be seen that Patch 1 axis I increasing corresponds to Patch 2 axis K decreasing, while Patch 1 axis J increasing corresponds to Patch 2 axis I increasing. The correct relative orientation specification should consequently be: "Klow", "Ihigh". After pressing "Apply", AutoGrid5 checks whether the connection is possible or not. A warning appears if the connection cannot be set.
g) Full Non Matching Connections

This type of connection allows to connect several patches of several blocks with non matching boundaries. The definition of such connection consists of the following:
A connection name. A list of left patches defining one side of the connection. A list of right patches defining the other side of the connection.
The patches in one list are not restricted to belong to the same face or same block. It is to be noticed that full non matching connections are always defined on top of existing patches and that these ones must have a valid basic type (no undefined type (UND)), even if the patch is entirely contained in the connection region. In the case a patch has an undefined type (UND) and is used in the definition of the FNMB (full non matching boundary), AutoGrid automatically sets its type to solid (SOL). This is required by the solver to run properly. However, the type is not reset to UND when deleting a FNMB connection, even if the SOL type has been set automatically by AutoGrid. Following rules must be respected when performing FNMB connections:
1.
A patch can be contained in only one list (either the left patches list or the right one) and one type of FNMB connection (fluid-solid or solid-solid). Patch contained in two FNMB connections For periodic FNMB connections, all the patches defining the connection must have the same periodicity information.
2.
FIGURE 2.3.4-6 Full
Non Matching Connections dialog box
To define and edit full non matching connections: Press the Full Non Matching/Define... button of the Patch Selector dialog box (Grid/Boundary Conditions... menu). It opens the dialog box shown on Figure 2.3.4-6.
AutoGrid5
2-31
Main Menu Bar
This dialog box contains two patch browsers to define the left and right patches lists. The use of the patch browsers and filters is the same as for the Patch Selector dialog box. A list containing the connections already defined is displayed on the right of the dialog box. To define a FNMB connection:
Select the patches defining the left side. These patches are highlighted in yellow in the graphics
area.
Select the patches defining the "right" side. These patches are highlighted in blue. Enter a name for the connection. Select the Periodic button to define a periodic FNMB connection. Select the Repetition number to allow periodic FNMB connection that is not covering the same area (option compatible with EURANUS starting from FINE/Turbo 7.1-1). The number of repetition has to be set in order to fully cover one side (yellow patch(es) - "left" side list of patch(es)) with the other side (blue patch(es) - "right" side list of patch(es)) and its repetition.
NOT CORRECT
Press on the Create/update button to define the FNMB connection. This connection will appear in the connection list.
CORRECT
Once a connection is created, patches can be added and/or removed from it. Simply update patches lists by clicking on them and press the Create/update button. To compute a FNMB connection: Once a connection is defined, it is possible to visualize the triangulation of the common region by pressing the Compute & Show button. This triangulation is not directly used in AutoGrid but only serves to visualize the triangulation that will be used by the solver and to verify that the connection is correctly performed. Calling this item is optional in AutoGrid. This calculation can be performed on the desired grid level by selecting it freely in the Grid level computed entry (this parameter is global and not saved in connections). Moreover several parameters can be controlled by pressing the Options button. It opens an additional frame:
FIGURE 2.3.4-7 FNMB
computing parameters
2-32
AutoGrid5
Main Menu Bar
The process of the computation involves that one side of the connection is triangulated whereas the other side is projected on it. Default values should normally be used. If the computation fails, parameters can be tuned. These parameters are local to each connection and saved into it, therefore to be taken into account they must be set before creating the connection or the button Create/update must be pressed once a parameter is modified. ADT algorithm: to use the new projection algorithm based on the use of the Alternating Digital Trees (ADT). The main advantage of this method is a decrease of the time required by the projection stage. Reverse triangulated side: to reverse the triangulated side which is by default the one containing the greater number of points. Maximum projection distance: when the projection distance of a point is greater than this value, it is rejected. Minimum projection distance: when all the points of a patch (contained in the projected side of the connection) have a projection distance greater than this value, the patch projection is rejected. Normals smoothing steps: before projection, some smoothing steps are done on the projection normals. Edge attraction: after the triangulation process, while projecting the vertices on both the sides of the FNMB, sometimes the projections end close to some boundary of the triangles, which impacts negatively on the robustness of the treatment. The edge attraction tolerance removes this impact and forces the projected point to belong to the triangle boundaries whenever necessary. To view and/or delete an existing FNMB connection:
Left-click on the desired connection in the connection list to select it. The patches participating in the definition of the connection will be automatically highlighted in the dialog box as well as in the graphics area. A "*" is also displayed next to the patch type to indicate that the patch is involved in a FNMB connection. If the computation of the triangulation was performed for this connection, it will also be shown on the screen.
To list only the patches involved in the desired connection, middle-click on it in the connection list.
Press the Delete button to delete the selected FNMB connection (the type of the corresponding patches is unchanged).
h) Rotor/Stator Connections
This type of connection allows to connect several patches of several blocks with rotor/stator boundaries. The definition of such connection consists of the following:
A connection name. A list of left patches defining one side of the connection. A list of right patches defining the other side of the connection.
The patches in one list are not restricted to belong to the same face or same block. It is to be noticed that such connections are only required to have the information in ".cgns" file.
AutoGrid5
2-33
Main Menu Bar
2-3.4.3 Grid Quality

This item gives access to a tool for performing an analysis of the flow paths quality (if meridional view active), of the grid quality of the blade-to-blade mesh (if blade-to-blade view active) and on the final 3D mesh generated (if 3D view active). The following dialog box will appear:
3D View Meridional View Blade-to-Blade View
FIGURE 2.3.4-10 Mesh
Quality dialog box
This dialog box contains two or three pages, one dedicated to analyse the grid quality on whole block cells, and the second to the grid quality at the block boundaries (boundary faces), including matching connections with adjacent blocks. The items for both pages are similar and described here after. The quality criteria are just slightly different. The last page (FNMB) only available for the 3D mesh allows to control the mesh quality along the full non matching connections. The Row list or Block entry allows to choose the row or block in which the quality will be analyzed. It is selected by respectively its name or its number. Each change must be validated by pressing <Enter> to recompute the quality checking.
In meridional and blade-to-blade views, if all rows selected (left-click and <Shift>), the mesh
quality is analyzed on all rows.
2-34
AutoGrid5
Main Menu Bar
In 3D view, if 0 is entered, the mesh quality is analyzed on all the blocks of the grid. Next to this
entry, the selected block name and the grid points number in each direction are displayed. By default, when opening this dialog box, the active block is selected. If the selected block is not generated or has been modified since the last generation (by moving a vertex, for example), the following message will appear:
FIGURE 2.3.4-11 Message
indicating that the block may be regenerated
It asks for block regeneration. If the no button is pressed, the quality analysis is not performed. The next entry Butterfly block is a special item dedicated to butterfly topologies allowing to choose the butterfly block in which the quality will be checked. When the block selected in the first entry is a parent block, the second entry is activated, displaying the number of the butterfly block which is analyzed. The range goes from 0 to 6. The number 0 represents the inner block and is therefore always present. The other numbers between 1 and 6 represent the parent face number and thus the associated buffer blocks. If there is no associated buffer, the corresponding number does not appear. The Quality Criterion frame is used to choose the criterion type which will be used to analyze the block cells quality. The criterion is chosen through the Type pull-down menu. According to the criterion, a preferential direction can be chosen through the second pull-down menu Direction (only for Block page in 3D view). It is used when the criterion gives different results along different directions (for example 2D criterions applied on surfacic cells). When it is not the case, this menu is deactivated. The following possibilities are available: All, I, J or K. All is equivalent to the three directions I, J, K. Moreover, a range can be selected for each criterion; each range modification must be validated by pressing <Enter>. The Visualization control frame is used to select the representation mode of the cells. Cells can be displayed with markers and/or with a shaded representation (Cells button). Markers are useful to detect cells that cannot be seen with the shaded representation only. Moreover, cells shading can be deactivated to greatly improve the speed of representation. In the shaded representation, cells are shaded with a different color according to their quality value. The link between colors and values is established by a colormap which is displayed in the graphics area after the tool selection. The range of the colormap is automatically updated according to the criterion range. The cells can be displayed as surfaces (in meridional, blade-to-blade and 3D views) or volumes (in 3D view) by switching on the corresponding button.
Blade-to-Blade View
3D View
AutoGrid5
2-35
Main Menu Bar
The Display frame is used to show in the AutoGrid5 graphics area the cells falling inside the quality criterion range. The Display all cells (All cells) button shows all the bad quality cells of the selected block(s). The Sweep cells scrollers, only available in 3D view, allow to sweep the selected block to display cells by constant I,J,K face. The Show chart button is used to toggle a histogram displaying the result of the quality checking. Left-clicking on a bar displays the corresponding cells in the AutoGrid graphics area.
FIGURE 2.3.4-12 Quality
analysis histogram
The entry Number of intervals is used to select the number of bars of the histogram. The default value is 5 and the maximum number is 10. Each new number must be validated by pressing <Enter>. The More info button is used to toggle a window giving more information about the quality checking: minimum and maximum values with their location (and possibly the block number in which they are detected if the check is performed on all the blocks in the 3D view).
a) Quality Criterion Definitions (Block Page)

These criteria are dedicated to evaluate the grid quality on whole cells of a block.
Criterion class
Two classes can be defined according to the type of element on which criterion is applied:
2D criterions: application on surfacic cells (quadrilateral cells) 3D criterions: application on volumic cells (hexahedral cells)
Obviously, the number of cells falling in the criterion range is always greater for a 2D criterion than for the equivalent 3D one because an hexahedral cell contains six quadrilateral cells. This means that, for a 2D criterion, the number of cells falling in the range can easily be greater than the block number of points. On the other hand, as 2D criteria are applied on surfacic cells, they are all direction dependent.
Criteria definition
Following criteria are available:
Overlap, Orthogonality,
2-36
AutoGrid5
Main Menu Bar
Angular Deviation, Aspect Ratio, Expansion Ratio, Cell Width.
Each one is described here below. Overlap 2D criterion available in meridional view. Range: 0 - 1. Overlap allows to detect overlapping cells (flow paths) in the meridional view when the value is set to 1. Orthogonality 2D criterion available in blade-to-blade and in 3D views. Range: 0 - 90 degrees. Orthogonality is a measure of the minimum angle between edges of the element. If angle between two edges is greater than 90 degrees, the value taken into account is (180 - real angle). Angular deviation 3D criterion available in 3D view. Range: 0 - 180 degrees. Angular deviation is a measure of the angular variation between two adjacent cells in I, J and K directions. Cell 2
b1
Cell 1
a1 b4 b2 a4 a2 a3
FIGURE 2.3.4-13 Angular
a 1 + a2 + a 3 + a4 x I = ---------------------------------------4 b1 + b 2 + b3 + b 4 y I = ---------------------------------------4
b3 Angular deviation along I-direction = ( x I, y I )
deviation definition
Aspect ratio 2D criterion available in blade-to-blade and 3D views. Range: 1 - 50,000. If the calculated value is outside the range, the value is reset to 50,000.3 c a d
a+b x = ----------2 c+d y = ----------2
max ( x, y ) Aspect Ratio = ----------------------min ( x, y )

FIGURE 2.3.4-14 Aspect
Ratio definition
AutoGrid5
2-37
Main Menu Bar
Expansion ratio 3D criterion available in meridional, blade-to-blade and 3D views. Range: 1 - 100. Expansion Ratio is a measure of the size variation between two adjacent cells. It is direction dependent. If the calculated value is outside the range, the value is reset to 100. Obviously, this criterion is nonsense if there is only one cell in the selected direction.
b1
a1 a4 a2 a3 max ( x, y ) Expansion Ratio (K) = ----------------------min ( x, y )
b4
b2 b3 a1 + a2 + a3 + a4 x = ---------------------------------------4 b 1 + b2 + b3 + b4 y = ---------------------------------------4
FIGURE 2.3.4-15 Expansion
Ratio definition
Cell width 3D criterion available in 3D view. Range: 0 - 1,000,000. Cell width is the height of the cell measured along I, J and K directions. If the calculated value is outside the range, the value is reset to 1,000,000.
b) Quality Criterion Definitions (Boundaries Page)

These criteria are dedicated to evaluate the grid quality at the boundaries of a block (boundary faces), including matching connections with adjacent blocks (only CON and PER boundary faces are considered). Following criteria are available:
Orthogonality (available in blade-to-blade and 3D views), Angular Deviation (available in blade-to-blade and 3D views), Expansion Ratio (available in meridional, blade-to-blade and 3D views), Cell Width (available in 3D view).
Each one is described here below. Orthogonality Range: 0 - 90 degrees. Orthogonality is a measure of the cell angle relatively to the block boundary (face). If angle is greater than 90 degrees, the value taken into account is (180 - real angle).
2-38
AutoGrid5
Main Menu Bar
a1
Block boundary face

N
a4 a2 a3 a1 + a2 + a3 + a4 x = ---------------------------------------4
Orthogonality = ( x, N )
FIGURE 2.3.4-16
Orthogonality definition
Angular deviation Range: 0 - 90 degrees. Angular deviation is a measure of the angular variation between two adjacent cells, the first one being in the current block and the adjacent one in the matching connected block. Obviously, this criterion is nonsense if there is no matching connected block. Connected block
b1
Current block
a1 b4 b2 a4 a2 a3
FIGURE 2.3.4-17 Angular
a 1 + a2 + a3 + a4 x = ---------------------------------------4 b1 + b 2 + b3 + b4 y = ---------------------------------------4
b3 Angular deviation = ( x, y )
deviation definition
Expansion ratio Range: 1 - 100. Expansion Ratio is a measure of the size variation between two adjacent cells, the first one being in the current block and the adjacent one in the matching connected block. Obviously, this criterion is nonsense if there is no matching connected block. The definition is the same as for the Block page (see before). Cell width Range: 0 - 1,000. Cell width is the height of the cell measured normally to the block boundary (face). If the calculated value is outside the range, the value is reset to 1,000.
c) Quality Criterion Definitions (FNMB Page)

These criteria are dedicated to evaluate the grid quality across fully non-matching boundary (FNMB) connections. FNMB connection must be computed with the fine mesh level before checking the quality. Following criteria are available:
Expansion ratio Cell Width Ratio
AutoGrid5
2-39
Main Menu Bar
Inner Gap Relative Inner Gap

Each definition is described here below. Expansion Ratio Range: 1 - 100. This computes the expansion ratio perpendicularly and through the FNMB for each cell involved in the FNMB connection. This criterion is symmetric, which means the result is the same on the left and right parts of the FNMB. Cell Width Ratio Range: 1 - 1000. This computes the difference of cell size between each side of the FNMB. It is available for each cell involved in the FNMB connection. It identifies how many cells are connected to the cell considered. The criterion takes into account the "wall fraction", which means one left cell is connected to only a part of a right cell. Then the ratio will be balanced according to the size of the connected part. This criterion is not symmetric, which means the result is not the same on the left and right parts of the FNMB. Example: One cell (A) on the left, four cells (B, C, D and E) on the right covering exactly the left cell. The result will be 4 for cell A (because this cell is connected to 4 right cells) and 0.25 for each right cell, B, C, D or E (because each one is connected to only 0.25 part of the left cell).
Inner Gap Range: 1 - 1e6. This computes the gap between the left and right side of the FNMB (absolute distance). It is available for each cell involved in the FNMB connection. This criterion is symmetric. Relative Inner Gap Range: 1 - 1000. It is exactly the same as the previous criterion except that the result is balanced with the cell size perpendicular to the FNMB. It enables the user to have a better idea on how the order of magnitude of the gap is compared to the cell size around FNMB. The cell size taken into account can be either the one of the left or the right side (depending on which side has been done the FNMB projection) but it does not matter as if the cell size is too different on both sides, the expansion ratio criterion will be bad.
2-40
AutoGrid5
Main Menu Bar 2-3.4.4 Grid Quality Report
A mesh quality report can be displayed with the top menu item Grid/Grid Quality Report. It includes the characteristics of the mesh in terms of minimum and maximum of the expansion ratio, the expansion ratio and the angular deviation along spanwise direction (J), the aspect ratio and the cells skewness. These data are available for the entire mesh or by configurations entity (row, technological effect, bulb).
FIGURE 2.3.4-18
3D grid generation and quality check
Negative cells are detected and indicated on top of the histogram as well as the blocks where there are located at the bottom of the histogram. The number of multigrid levels of each entity (row and technological effects) is listed in the Mg. Level column. If the spanwise angular deviation exceeds 40 degrees, a warning appears at the bottom of the window that indicates the blocks where the maximum value has been reached.
2-3.4.5 Grid Quality Report (HTML)

The Grid/Grid Quality Report (HTML) menu (not available on Windows) allows to automatically write a mesh quality report. When selecting the menu, a window enables to select the images that will be inserted into the report and provides disk usage necessary for the report and images.
AutoGrid5
2-41
Main Menu Bar
projectname_main.html
Quality Report
3D Mesh of Whole Machine
projectname_rowname.html
left-click
Quality Data
Blade-to-Blade Images
3D Mesh Images
2-42
AutoGrid5
Main Menu Bar 2-3.4.6 Negative Cells
Grid/Negative cells... is used to compute, store the indices and show the cells with a negative volume. The following dialog box is provided to select calculation preferences:
FIGURE 2.3.4-19 Preferences
dialog box for Negative cells calculation
Four preferences can be controlled:
Scope: determines whether the calculation will proceed on the active block or on all blocks. Coord Sys: specifies whether calculation should proceed using a left-handed local reference
frame for each cell or a right-handed one.
Precision: specifies whether to perform calculation in single or double precision.

This preference is the most important to control. Indeed, AutoGrid5 always works in double precision. However some solvers may work in single precision. Consequently, checking negative cells in double precision in AutoGrid5, with no negative cells as a result, may give negative cells in the solver !
Coarse Levels: specifies on which multigrid level the calculation should proceed. The All button allows to perform the calculation on all the available uniform multigrid levels at once, "uniform" meaning that the levels are equal in the three directions I, J and K, for example "0 0 0", "1 1 1" and "2 2 2". The "Custom" button allows to select a specific multigrid level, like "1 2 2". The Apply button performs the negative volumes calculation. If the active block is not generated or has been modified since the last generation (by moving a vertex, for example), the following message will appear:
FIGURE 2.3.4-20
Message indicating that the block may be regenerated
The View neg cells button allows to visualize cells with negative volume. The computation of the negative volumes is performed automatically as a first step. Cells with negative volumes are displayed in a shaded representation and with markers, which are useful to detect cells that cannot be seen only with the shaded representation. Beware that the visualization of negative cells can be memory consuming when a large number of cells must be displayed. It is then advised to first check the number of negative cells by pressing the Apply button.
AutoGrid5
2-43

If no cell with negative volume is detected, the message "No negative cells" appears. On the contrary, if there are cells with negative volumes after the complete search, a message like the following will appear:
Toolbar
FIGURE 2.3.4-21
Grid contains cells with negative volume
It shows the number of each block containing negative cells and the corresponding number of negative cells. For butterfly topologies, the calculation is performed on all the butterfly blocks of the corresponding parent block. The number of negative cells of each butterfly block is added and displayed in the previous dialog box by referencing the parent block.
2-3.4.7 Compute All Fnmbs

Grid/Compute All Fnmbs is used to ease the calculation of the full non matching connections by computing all full non matching connections defined in the menu Grid/Boundary Conditions at once on all available grid levels. A window appear when full non matchings are failing on specific grid level(s).
2-3.4.8 Create Face / Create Block

Grid/Create Face... and Grid/Create Block... are used to respectively create and adapt the mesh on a face or in the block. The available features are fully described in the Chapter 9 of the IGG User Manual.
2-4
Toolbar
The toolbar contains icons and buttons providing fast input/output options (See in the related chapters the complete description of the icon functions). These are divided into 6 sections.
Project Management Icons
Mesh Generation Buttons
User Mode
View & Mesh Quality Icons
Mesh Control Icons
Contextual Icons
FIGURE 2.4.0-1 Top
toolbar
2-44
AutoGrid5
Toolbar
2-4.1
User Mode
By clicking on the arrow at the right the user may select the user mode.
The Wizard Mode will give access to a mesh wizard presented in Chapter 4. For most projects the available parameters in the Wizard Mode are sufficient. When selecting Expert Mode, the user will have access to all parameters presented in Chapters 5 to 11. These parameters may be useful in some more complex projects.
2-4.2
These icons are related to the most often used options of project management.
TABLE 1. Project
Management icons
Icon
Description Opens an existing project previously created by AutoGrid5. See the File/Open Project menu item description on section 2-3.1.1. Closes the current project and opens a new empty one. See the File/New Project menu item description on section 2-3.1.2. Saves the current work in the files of the current project. See the File/Save Project menu item description on section 2-3.1.3.
2-4.3
These buttons are used to start the mesh generation with different scope of application.
TABLE 2. Mesh
Generation buttons
Description Reset all topology and the grid points number according to the grid level chosen by the user AutoGrid5. Generate the flow paths of the selected rows See the Generate Flow Paths button description on Chapter 6. Generate the flow paths and the blade to blade mesh of the selected rows. See the Generate B2B button description on Chapter 7. Generate the flow paths, the blade to blade mesh and the 3d mesh of the selected rows. See the Generate 3D button description on Chapter 8.
Buttons
AutoGrid5
2-45
Toolbar
2-4.4
View & Mesh Quality Management Icons
These icons are related to view management and the mesh quality analysis.
TABLE 3. View
& Mesh Quality Management icons

Description Open the Mesh Quality dialog box of AutoGrid5. See the Grid/Grid Quality menu item description on section 2-3.4.3. Open the Grid Quality Check dialog box of AutoGrid5. See the Grid/Grid Quality Report menu item description on section 2-3.4.4. Open the Negative Cells dialog box of AutoGrid5. See the Grid/Negative Cells menu item description on section 2-3.4.6. Open the Patch Selector dialog box of AutoGrid5. See the Grid/Boundary Conditions menu item description on section 2-3.4.2. Select the grid level used by AutoGrid5 to visualize the mesh. See the View/Coarse Grid menu item description on section 2-3.3.3. Open the Sweep Surface dialog box of AutoGrid5. See the View/Sweep Surface menu item description on section 2-3.3.2. Act as a toggle and perform a repetition in the blade-to-blade or 3D views based on the settings imposed by the user in the View Repetition dialog box of AutoGrid5. See the View/Repetition menu item description on section 2-3.3.4. Visualize or hide the solid model of the machine in the 3D view. See the View/toggle 3D Solid View menu item description on section 2-3.3.7. Set the active view in full display mode.
Icon
Reset the display mode to multiview.
2-4.5
Mesh Control Icons
These icons open dialog boxes use to change the mesh parameters.
TABLE 4. Mesh
Control icons
Description Select all the rows of the current project.
Icon
Create new control lines in the meridional view.
Open the Row: Flow Path Control dialog box.
Open the dialog box dedicated to the blade to blade topology control.
2-46
AutoGrid5
Toolbar
TABLE 4. Mesh

Control icons
Description Open the Optimization Properties dialog box.
Icon
Open the Inlet Bulb Mesh Topology dialog box. Displayed only if AutoGrid5 detects a bulb at inlet (hub reaches R=0). Open the Outlet Bulb Mesh Topology dialog box. Displayed only if AutoGrid5 detects a bulb at outlet (hub reaches R=0).
Open the Nozzle Mesh Topology dialog box. Displayed only in case of machine with by-pass
2-4.6
Contextual Icons
During an AutoGrid5 session, the contextual icons are updated according to the active entity (rows, blades, hub/shroud gap, fin, control lines). These icons are used to manage these entities.
2-4.6.1 Row Management Icons

TABLE 5. Row
Management icons
Description Remove the selected row(s) from the project database.
Icon
Copy the selected row topology into a buffer.
Replace the selected row(s) topology by the topology stored into the current buffer.
Open the Row Properties dialog box.
Open a file chooser used to select a ".geomTurbo" file which contains the (new) geometry of the row. Add a new blade to the selected row (s) (splitter blade or tandem blade).
Define a hub gap for the blade(s) of the selected row(s). Define a shroud gap for the blade(s) of the selected row(s).
2-4.6.2 Blade Management Icons

TABLE 6. Blade
Management icons
Description Remove the selected blade(s) from the project database.
Icon
AutoGrid5
2-47
Quick Access Pad
Icon
Description Copy the selected blade to blade topology into a buffer.
Replace the selected blade to blade topology by the topology stored into the current buffer. Open a file chooser used to select a ".geomTurbo" file which contains the (new) blade geometry. Open the Blade Expansion dialog box.
Define a hub gap for the selected blade(s).
Define a shroud gap for the selected blade(s).
2-4.6.3 Shroud & Hub Gap Management Icons

TABLE 7. Shroud
& Hub Gap Management icons
Icon
Description Remove the selected gap(s) from the project database.
Copy the selected gap(s) topology into a buffer.
Replace the selected gap(s) topology by the topology stored into the current buffer. Open a Gap Properties dialog box.
2-5
Quick Access Pad
The Quick Access Pad is located in the left part of the GUI. It contains icons and more evolved options providing a fast access to the more used functions of AutoGrid5. Some of these functions are only accessible through the Quick Access Pad whereas others are also accessible through the menu bar, so that their description will be referenced to these menus. The pad is divided into four subpads, each of which can be toggled by a simple mouse left-click:
Rows Definition subpad Geometry Definition subpad Mesh Control subpad View subpad
All the commands and options accessible with these subpads are described in detail in this section.
2-48
AutoGrid5
Quick Access Pad
The four subpads are composed of pages containing buttons, icons, input areas. The icons perform specific function related to the subpad and the page. Each page can also be toggled by a simple mouse left-click.
Rows Definition subpad to control the machine configuration
Geometry Definition subpad to define the geometry of hub, shroud, nozzle and blades
Mesh Control subpad to control the mesh in meridional and blade-to-blade views
View subpad to control the mesh representation
Grid Parameters area
FIGURE 2.5.0-1 Quick
Access Pad
AutoGrid5
2-49
Quick Access Pad
2-5.1
Rows Definition Subpad
The rows definition subpad is used to control the machine configuration through project management buttons and a tree. All the turbomachinery entities, rows or technological effects (seal leakage, cooling holes,...) composing a project are symbolically displayed into the tree.
FIGURE 2.5.1-1 Row
definition subpad
a) Project Management Buttons

These buttons are used to select or add entities into the tree.
TABLE 8. Project
Management buttons
Description Select all the entities of the tree: rows, meridional effects (bleed, seal leakage,...) and 3d effects (cooling holes,...). Select all the rows of the project. Add a meridional effect (seal leakage, bleed,...) into the tree of the project. Add a 3d effect (cooling holes,...) into the tree of the project. Add a row at the outlet of the machine. When the project has a configuration with bypass, the row is added before the nozzle. Available only if the project has a configuration with bypass. Add a row (arm) on the nozzle. Available only if the project has a configuration with bypass. Add a row near the outlet of the by-pass. Available only if the project has a configuration with bypass. Add a row near the outlet of the compressor. Add a B2B Cut into the tree of the project.
Icon
b) Configuration Tree
The configuration tree is used to navigate through the project configuration, to select and modify the configuration entities.
2-50
AutoGrid5
Quick Access Pad
Rows entities 3D Effect Meridional Effects
FIGURE 2.5.1-2 Configuration
Tree
The turbomachinery entities defining a project are:
The rows containing the blade(s), the upstream and downstream boundaries (inlet & outlet). The meridional effects defining seal leakage, bleed... Their domain is axisymmetric and define
in the meridional plane (ZR).
The 3D effects defining cooling holes,... Their domain is define in the XYZ space. These entities are considered as sub-entities of the rows.
The solid mesh of end walls and/or the blade. The basin, cooling channel with pin fins and/or ribs in the blade. The cooling holes in the end walls and/or the blade.
The selection of the entities and navigation through the tree is performed using left-click. Multiple selection is allowed. It can be performed by keeping the <Shift> or <Ctrl> button pressed during the selection process.
c) Contextual Popup Menu of Tree Items

The entities of the tree can be managed with the features available through their related quick access popup menu. After selection, right-click displays these menus. For quick access, they appears above the mouse location and allows the user to add, remove or modify the properties of all selected entity.
Meridional effect menu Domain limit menu
Rows menu
3D effect menu
Blade menu popup menus
Default menu
FIGURE 2.5.1-3 Contextual
AutoGrid5
2-51
Quick Access Pad
2-5.2
Geometry Definition Subpad
The geometry definition subpad contains button and interaction area used to define or modify the geometry of the configuration entities.
FIGURE 2.5.2-1 Geometry
definition subpad
The geometry defining the channel and the blades as well as the technological effects can be specified from external CAD files and/or from ".geomTurbo" file (native geometry format).
TABLE 9. Geometry
Management buttons
Description Start the editing tool used to define the axisymmetric lower limit defining the blade channel from the basic meridional curves defined in the geometry file. Start the editing tool used to define the axisymmetric upper limit defining the blade channel from the basic meridional curves defined in the geometry file. Start the editing tool used to define the meridional trace of the nozzle. Available only if the project has a configuration with bypass. Open a dialog box to control the number of control points defining the channel curves used to define the inlet, outlet, rotor-stator and control lines. Open a dialog box to control the completeness of the geometry as well as validity of the end walls, before starting the mesh generation. It also repairs the curves wherever it is required. Select and load a geometry file to define or replace the geometry of the entities found in the file. Start the import geometry manager to load external CAD file and define the geometry of the configuration entities. More details in chapter 4.
Icon
The Units page allows to change the "units" of the imported geometry in order to impose a scaling factor and a corresponding tolerance that will ensure correct treatment during the grid generation when computing for example the intersection. If not necessary, it is recommended to keep the default settings (Scale Factor set to 1)
2-52
AutoGrid5
Quick Access Pad
2-5.3
Mesh Control Subpad
The mesh control subpad is divided into three pages containing buttons and interaction areas used to control the mesh of the active row(s). Left click to open or close the desired page.
FIGURE 2.5.3-1 Mesh
control subpad
In this subpad, the number of points used to mesh the selected entities (rows and technological effects) is displayed and continuously updated following the modifications of the mesh generation parameters.
a) Grid Level Page

The buttons and the input area of the grid level page are used to set up a default mesh.Four grid levels are available to define the number of points used to mesh the selected row(s). The button Reset Default Topology (re)set a new default mesh topology according to the geometry configuration and the chosen grid level. The button Start Row Wizard allows to access the mesh wizard mode in order to mesh the selected row in few steps by defining few parameters (more details in Chapter 4).
FIGURE 2.5.3-2 Grid
level control
The option Streamwise Weights allows to increase the number of points in the streamwise direction respectively at the inlet, on the blade and the outlet (for more details, refer to section 7-2.2).
AutoGrid5
2-53
Graphical User Interface b) Row Mesh Control Page
Quick Access Pad
The buttons and input areas of the row mesh control page are used to control all the grid generation parameters of the selected row(s).
FIGURE 2.5.3-3
Row mesh control
Quick access is given for the main parameters defining the flow path number and the cell width and the spacing between the layer of control (blade to blade layer on which the mesh is optimized and used to interpolate the other layers. Additional buttons give access to several dialog boxes used to control all the expert grid generation parameters.
TABLE 10. Mesh
Control buttons
Description Open the flow path control dialog box. Open the dialog box dedicated to the blade to blade topology control. Open the optimization properties dialog box. Create new control lines in the meridional view.
Icon
c) Active B2B Layer Page
FIGURE 2.5.3-4
Active layer control
The input area of the active B2B layer page, is used to change the flow path on which the mesh is computed and displayed in the blade to blade view.
2-54
AutoGrid5
Quick Access Pad
2-5.4
View Subpad
When the blade-to-blade view active, the View subpad contains five buttons allowing viewing operations on the blade to blade grid. The selected rows define the scope of the buttons.
TABLE 11. View
buttons
Description Toggle the vertices of the blade to blade blocks of the selected row(s).
Icon
Toggle the fixed points of the blade to blade blocks of the selected row(s).
Toggle the grid points of the blade to blade blocks of the selected row(s).
Toggle the edge of the blade to blade blocks of the selected row(s).
Toggle the face grid of the blade to blade blocks of the selected row(s).
When the 3D view active, the View subpad provides commands and tools that allow viewing operations on the geometry and the grid. In particular, the three first pages provide options permitting the creation and the visualization of geometry and block groups. The four pages of this subpad are described in the following sections.
2-5.4.1 Geometry Groups Page

Geometry groups are powerful means of classifying geometrical entities by grouping them under the same name. This tool proves to be essential as soon as the input geometry gets a little complicated. Using groups, the user can easily perform selective visualization of parts of interest and focus on the current region being meshed. The geometry group page allows the creation, the deletion and the visualization of geometry groups, which can contain curves and/or surfaces. Different groups can contain the same curve(s) or surface(s).
Group browser
List of curves and surfaces in the group
Check button allowing selective visualization of items.
FIGURE 2.5.4-1
Geometry Groups page
AutoGrid5
2-55
Quick Access Pad
All the existing geometry groups are listed by name in the browser of the page. Each group name is preceded by two buttons. Left-clicking on the first one toggles the list of curves and surfaces of the corresponding group in the Quick Access Pad. Left-clicking on the second one toggles the display of curves and surfaces of the group in the graphics area. Each item in a group is also preceded with a check button that allows to individually show or hide the item. The page contains four buttons at the bottom:
Create Group. Before pressing this button, curves and surfaces that will be put in the new
group must be selected (see the Geometry/Select menu in IGG User Manual). The following dialog box will be opened:
Simply enter the new group name and press the Create button to create the new group.
Delete Group. It opens the following dialog box:
All existing geometry groups are listed in the box. Simply select a group by left-clicking on its name and press the Delete button to delete it (this will not delete the related geometrical entities).
Show All. This button shows all the geometry in the graphics area: curves, surfaces and Cartesian points.
Hide All. This button hides all the geometry in the graphics area: curves, surfaces and Cartesian
points. Two pop-up menus are also accessible by right-clicking on a group name or on a geometry entity in the page browser:
The first menu contains three items:
Add Selection. This adds the currently selected curves and surfaces to the group. Remove Selection. This removes the currently selected curves and surfaces of the group. If
some selected curves or surfaces are not in the group, the removal of these entities will have no effect on the group.
Delete. This deletes the geometry group.
2-56
AutoGrid5
Quick Access Pad
The second menu allows to remove of the group the geometry entity from which the menu is opened.
2-5.4.2 Block Groups Page

This page allows the creation, deletion and the visualization of block groups. Different groups can contain the same block(s).
Group browser
List of blocks in the group
Check button allowing selective visualization of items.
FIGURE 2.5.4-2 Block
Groups page
All the existing block groups are listed by name in the browser of the page. Each group name is preceded by two buttons. Left-clicking on the first one toggles the list of blocks of the corresponding group in the Quick Access Pad. Left-clicking on the second one toggles the display of blocks of the group in the graphics area. Each item in a group is also preceded with a check button that allows to individually show or hide the item. The page contains four buttons at the bottom:
Create Group. The following dialog box will open:
Simply enter the new group name and press the Create button to select the group blocks. The following prompt will appear: <1> Select a Block, <2> Add to Group, <3> Quit, <Keyboard Area>: Block Indices Left-click on a block to select it. The block will be highlighted. Then, middle-click to add the block to the group. This block will remain highlighted until leaving this tool. Add in the same manner as many blocks as desired. Blocks can also be added to the group by entering their number in the keyboard input area. In this case, the blocks are directly added to the group without being highlighted and without any validation. The numbers must be separated by spaces. A range of blocks can also be added by entering two numbers separated by a -. For example, enter 1 5 10-15 3 to add the blocks 1, 3, 5 and the range 10->15. The numbers do not have to be ordered and the same number can be entered more than one time. If a syntax error is made, a warning message will appear. Press <q> or the right mouse button to complete the group creation.
Delete Group. It opens the following dialog box:
AutoGrid5
2-57
Quick Access Pad
All existing block groups are listed in the box. Simply select a group by left-clicking on its name and press the Delete button to delete it (this will not delete the related blocks).
Show All. This button shows all the blocks in the graphics area. Hide All. This button hides all the blocks in the graphics area.
Two pop-up menus are also accessible by right-clicking on a group name or on a block in the page browser:
The first menu contains three items:
Add Selection. This adds the active block to the group. Remove Selection. This removes the active block of the group. If it is not in the group, this
operation will have no effect on the group.
Delete. This deletes the block group.

The second menu allows to remove of the group the block from which the menu is opened.
2-5.4.3 Grid Configuration Page

When creating a mesh with AutoGrid5, the multiblock data structure can becomes very complex. A new database, named Grid Configuration, is created by AutoGrid5 at the end of the mesh generation, saved together with the project into a file ".config". When loading the mesh in IGG, AutoGrid5 or in FINE GUI, the grid configuration is also loaded. The grid configuration describes the mesh structure of the project as a set of fluid and solid domains interconnected together through domain interfaces. Each domain contains a set of subdomains and a set of interfaces. Each domain interface contains a type of boundary condition, a type of free boundary condition and the possible connected domain reference. The domain encapsulates the list of structured blocks defining the domain. The domain interface encapsulated the list of structured patches defining the interface. This new data structure is very useful. It can be used to reduce the time needed to analyse the mesh of a project, to set up the boundary conditions into FINE GUI and to easily visualize the mesh. AutoGrid5 computes automatically the grid configuration of the meshed turbomachine after each 3D generation as well as after loading or saving a project. This configuration is composed by a tree of domains similar to the configuration tree used to set the template configuration. The Main
2-58
AutoGrid5
Quick Access Pad
Project of an AutoGrid5 configuration contains a single subdomain named "AG5 <project name>" where project name is the name of the template. The AutoGrid5 domain contains the list of subdomain related to each row and each technological effect 3D.
When navigating through the configuration, the boundary edges of the selected domain and the grid of the selected interface are automatically displayed and updated in the XYZ view. This behaviour can be switched off using the buttons Highlight Domain and Highlight Boundaries on the bottom of the Grid Configuration page. Selecting one or several item of the configuration and using right-click gives access to all the management options through contextual menus dedicated to each type of configuration item.
a) Main Project Management

Right-Click
a.1) Duplicate Main Project

The menu option Duplicate is used to create an new instance of the Main Project into the configuration. This new instance is called a SubProject and is a perfect copy of the main project configuration.
AutoGrid5
2-59
Quick Access Pad
a.2) Merge Main Project

The option Merge can be used to merge together subprojects with the main project. A new instance of the Main Project is created and if mesh and template files exist on disk for the selected subproject, new mesh and template files are created for the new merged subproject resulting of the concatenation of the main project mesh and template files with the subproject mesh and template files.
b) SubProject Management
Subprojects are useful when part of the main configuration must be analysed separately. In addition AutoGrid5 allows also to redefine geometry in a subproject through template manipulation and remeshing partially the machine. Each subproject can have its own mesh and template inside which the user can modify locally some part of the geometry (i.e. a blade definition). Once the computation is fruitful on the subproject a merge process allow the user to concatenate the main project with the selected subproject to analyse the complete configuration with the new geometry defined in the subproject.
Right-Click
b.1) Rename SubProject

This option can be used to rename the subproject. A entry prompts the user to enter a new name. Blank and special characters are allowed excepted tabulation. The system warns the user if the name is already used.
2-60
AutoGrid5
Quick Access Pad
When a new subproject name is accepted, the subproject files and directory are also renamed. Therefore it is strongly recommended to save also the main project (File/Save Project menu) after renaming process to keep consistency between the main project configuration stored on disk and the name of the subproject files.
b.2) Duplicate SubProject

The menu option Duplicate is used to create an new instance of the SubProject into the configuration.
b.3) Save SubProject

The menu item Save is used to save the mesh and the template of the selected subproject. By default, when a subproject is created from the main project, the mesh and the template files are not duplicated. Once the subproject edition done, the option Save creates a new directory <mainproject-file-name>_<subproject-name>. The partial mesh and template related to the subproject are automatically created and stored in this directory. All the structured patches boundary condition type of the mesh belonging to a domain interface connected to a subdomain removed in the subproject are switched to the free boundary condition define in the interface properties. In the below example, the patch type of the RS Connection With row 1 are switched to Inlet when saving the subproject mesh.
When saving the subproject, AutoGrid5 asks if the main project mesh and template must remain the active one. If not, the created subproject file or template are automatically loaded replacing the main project.
b.4) Load SubProject

The menu Load can be used to load the mesh (and the template) of a subproject if the file exists on disk. If not a warning prompts the user to first save the subproject.
AutoGrid5
2-61
Quick Access Pad
b.5) Merge SubProject

The menu Merge can be used to merge together subprojects and/or with the main project. The figure illustrates the process to merge together the subproject 1 & subproject 2 into a subproject 3.
This operation can takes some time because of the following steps needed to keep consistency:
An new subproject is created in the configuration as the result of the merging process between
the selected subproject,
The main project is saved (needed to keep consistency), The main project is duplicated and saved into the new subproject directory, The mesh and template of the selected subproject are loaded to replace partially the data into the
duplicated main project,
The domains which does not appear in the new subproject are removed from the mesh and the
template,
The final subproject is saved on disk.

At the end of the merging process the subproject 3 remains loaded. To retrieve the original interface status, the user must load again the main project (File/ Open Project).
b.6) Delete SubProject

The menu Delete can be used to delete the mesh (and the template) of a subproject if the file exists on disk.
c) Domain Management
Each domain edges are automatically highlighted in red in the XYZ view when selected (click-left) in the configuration.
2-62
AutoGrid5
Quick Access Pad
Each row domain contains a list of subdomains which depends of the option chosen by the user during the turbomachinery configuration setup. In the example, each row contains only a subdomain corresponding to the Main Blade definition. For each domain, a folder named Domain Boundaries contains the interface of the domain. Right-clicking on a domain gives access to the domain menu.
Right-Click
Each subdomain contains a list of IGG blocks. When dealing with butterfly topology created in IGG or as 3D technological effect in AutoGrid5, the button Update assumes that all the blocks are now included in the grid configuration except the parent blocks. This is a suitable behaviour for the usage of the grid configuration in the FINE GUI.
c.1) Domain Properties

The menu Properties opens the dialog box use to control the type and the rotation speed of the domain.
Each modification will affect all the blocks linked to the domain. The type Fluid-Solid means that the domain contains subdomains of different type. In the example, the Main Blade subdomain contains the core flow domain around the blade (fluid), the shroud gap domain (Fluid) and the solid body of the blade (Solid). Therefore the type of the domain Main Blade is set to the hybrid type Fluid-Solid.
c.2) Rename Domain

The menu Rename can be used to rename a domain.
c.3) Group Domain

The menu Group can be used to group the domain together. The resulting domain contains a list of subdomains equal to the selected list. This menu is available only in the grid configuration within IGG.
AutoGrid5
2-63
Quick Access Pad
c.4) Delete Domain

The menu Delete can be used to remove the selected domain from the related main project and/or from the related subprojects.
d) Domain Interface Management

Each domain of the main project or a subproject contains domain interfaces defining the physical boundaries of the configuration and the connections between the domains. These interfaces are stored in the Domain Boundaries folder of the domain. If the button Highlight Boundaries is checked, the selected domain interfaces are automatically displayed using grid and color shading representations as presented in the below figure.
In addition, the main project and the subprojects include also a Domain Boundaries folder containing the full list of the project domain interfaces. For more visibility, the list has been divided into several subfolder according to the boundary condition type of each interface: inlet, outlet, solid, external, rotor-stator, connection(Fluid->Fluid), connection(Solid->Solid), connection(Fluid>Solid), connection(Solid->Fluid).
Each subfolder contains a list of interfaces and/or subfolders. The interfaces are given by their full composite name. The composite name is composed by the name of the tree entity and all its parents separated by a character "/". The subfolders (i.e. row 1 Connection(Fluid->Fluid)) contain a list of interfaces. These subfolders represent interfaces groups and are defined for quick access. These
2-64
AutoGrid5
Quick Access Pad
groups are defined automatically by AutoGrid5 or manually using the features dedicated to the domain boundary management. These features are available through the right-click menu of the domain boundaries.
d.1) Domain Boundary Properties

The menu Properties opens a dialog box dedicated to the management of the interfaces properties.
In the dialog box, the rotation speed, the name, the type of the boundary in the main project (Boundary Condition Type) and in the subproject (Free Boundary Condition Type) are available. In a subproject, some domains can be removed by the user. When saving the grid of a subproject, all the boundary condition type of the domain boundaries connected to the removed domains are set to the free boundary condition type. In addition, when the interface selected is a rotor-stator, the side (upstream or downstream) of the interface can be setup (Rotor/Stator Side).
d.2) Rename Domain Boundary

The menu Rename can be used to rename a domain boundary.
d.3) Group Domain Boundaries

The menu Group can be used to group together domain boundaries of the same type within IGG. As the groups are stored in the main project or the subproject boundaries, the menu item group appears only when at least two boundaries of the same type of a subproject or the main project are selected. By default the name of the group is composed by the "type name" + "group id" (i.e. Solid 1). A new subfolder is automatically displayed in the tree and contains all the selected boundaries.
AutoGrid5
2-65
Quick Access Pad
d.4) Ungroup Domain Boundaries

The menu Ungroup is used to ungroup existing group or domain boundaries within IGG. Ungroup a group of domain boundaries results in removing the initial group.
Ungroup an existing domain boundary split it into a list of new domain boundaries. The number of new boundaries is equal to the number of grid patches defined in the selected domain boundaries. The name of the new domain boundaries is equal to B <block-id> F <face-id> P <patch-id>.
d.5) Connect Domain Boundaries

Three types of interfaces between domains of a grid configuration are available:
Interface with no connection with other domain (i.e: hub,shroud,),
2-66
AutoGrid5
Quick Access Pad
Interface connected with another domain: connection (Connect), full non matching connection (Connect As FNMB) and rotor/stator connection (Connect As Rotor/Stator),
Internal domain full non matching connections.

If the mesh (including patch connection and full non matching definition) is completed, the connected boundaries between domains are automatically defined by AutoGrid5 or by IGG when using the button Update of the grid configuration page.
In some circumstances, the complete mesh of a project results of a concatenation of submeshes created in separate session of IGG and/or AutoGrid5. During this mesh concatenation within IGG, the grid configuration is also concatenate. The menu Connect, Connect As FNMB and Connect As Rotor/Stator are used to establish the connection between the different concatenated configuration. The below example illustrates the concatenation between two meshes created in separate IGG session connected through one domain boundary:
1.
Two meshes are created separately and stored into the mesh files "mesh1-fluid.igg" and "mesh2fluid.igg". Both meshes have an inlet and an outlet. The inlet of mesh2 is equal to the outlet of mesh 1. Both meshes have similar grid configuration.
mesh1-fluid.igg
mesh2-fluid.igg
2.
A new IGG project is initialized and is composed by both meshes imported into this new project.
AutoGrid5
2-67
Quick Access Pad
3.
The Outlet 1 and Inlet 2 are selected than connected together using the menu Connect.
The same above steps can be repeated to connect with a full non matching connection. In this case, a new full non matching connection is created automatically using the mesh patches of the selected boundaries. Finally, a rotor/stator connection between two imported domains can also be established in such way.
d.6) Interface Viewer

The menu Interface Viewer opens a dialog box dedicated to the domain interface visualization. It allows to select the display of the grid and/or a solid representation of the selected interfaces.
d.7) Export Surfaces

The menu Export Surfaces is used to export a IGG data file format of the surfaces created as new wireframe of each patches defining the interface. The file name is defined automatically using as prefix the name of the configuration file (".config" file) and the name the interface.
2-5.4.4 Grid Page

This page provides visualization commands on the grid. It consists of two rows: a row of buttons and a row of icons.
The first row of buttons is used to determine the viewing scope, that is the grid scope on which the viewing commands provided by the icons of the second row will apply. There are five modes determining the scope, each one being represented by a button: Segment, Edge, Face, Block, Grid (all blocks). Only one mode is active at a time and the current mode is highlighted. Simply left-click on a button to select the desired mode.
2-68
AutoGrid5
Control Area
In Segment mode, a viewing operation applies to the active segment only. In Edge mode, a viewing operation applies to the active edge only. In Face mode, a viewing operation applies to the active face only. In Block mode, a viewing operation applies to the active block only.
In Grid mode, a viewing operation applies to all the blocks of the grid. The icons of the second row and their related commands are listed in the following table: buttons
Description
Toggles vertices
TABLE 12. View
Icon
Toggles fixed points
Toggles segment grid points
Toggles edges
Toggles face grid
Toggles shading
When the Grid configuration page is opened, the viewing button related to the grid topology acts on the selected configuration item. The user is now able to draw the grid edges row by row.
2-6

Control Area
The control area is composed of seven major areas: Message area Keyboard input area Mouse coordinates Information area Grid parameters area Generation Status area Viewing buttons
Each one is described in the following sections.
AutoGrid5
2-69
Control Area
2-6.1
Message Area
This area has several display functions:
Display of warning messages notifying the user Display of request messages asking the user for inputs from Keyboard input area or
Graphics area
Display of general information messages (current function options,...)
2-6.2
Keyboard Input Area
To mesh 3D technological effects, AutoGrid5 gives access to the structured multiblock grid generation module IGG. Some of the options in IGG require numerical inputs from the user. For example, rotating a curve around a given line requires to specify the direction of the line, its origin and the rotation angle. The keyboard input area is provided to allow such inputs. When an option requires numerical inputs, a message is indicated in the Message area. Without leaving the graphics area, the user can then type the required data. The keystrokes are automatically echoed in the keyboard input area and the user has the possibility to modify the inputs. The input is acknowledged after pressing <Enter>. Entering scalar values: a scalar value is specified by a floating number followed by <Enter>. Valid values are 5 1.32323 -0.1234 1.4E-5. Entering vectors: a vector is specified by typing its three components separated by a blank and followed by <Enter>. The Keyboard input area can also be used to select the active block, face, edge or segment. Simply enter the related indices separated by blanks and press <Enter> to make the corresponding entity active. This obviously causes the update of the Grid parameters area.
2-6.3
Mouse Coordinates
This area displays the mouse cursor coordinates in the Graphics area. If the cursor is out of it, it indicates the last cursor position in it.
2-6.4
Information Area
This area gives general informations (about edges, curves,...). For example, when moving a vertex and attracting it to a curve, the name of that curve is displayed in this area.
2-6.5
Grid Parameters Area

Active block, face, edge and segment indices Number of blocks, faces, edges and segments for the active topology
2-70
AutoGrid5
Control Area
This area shows very useful informations about the grid:
Active Block, Face, Edge and Segment indices Number of grid blocks, active block faces, active face edges, active edge segments Block: Number of active block points Number of grid points Name of the block Number of points in each block direction Face: constant direction and the corresponding index Edge: constant direction according to the active face and the corresponding index Segment: number of points on the segment The maximum multigrid level available in the I, J and K direction
If the name of the active block is "invalid", it means that any block has been created yet or all the blocks have been deleted.
2-6.6
Generation Status Area
During grid generation process, the status of each steps is displayed in this area. In addition two pop-up windows are also displayed to control the iteration process of the optimization steps and the progress status of all the other generation steps. These two windows are optional and can be deactivated by toggle the button Show this next time.
FIGURE 2.6.6-1 Progress
status & Optimization status windows
AutoGrid5
2-71
Control Area
2-6.7
Viewing Buttons
The Viewing buttons are used to perform viewing manipulations on the active view, such as scrolling, zooming and rotating. The manipulations use the left, middle and right buttons of the mouse in different ways. The sub-sections below describe the function associated with each mouse button for each viewing button. For systems that only accept a mouse with two buttons, the middle mouse button can be emulated for viewing options by holding the <Ctrl> key with the left mouse button. During viewing operations, AutoGrid automatically removes from the active view all heavy graphics representations such as solid model or color shading. This is done to keep a reasonable speed during rotation, translation or zoom operations. The complete picture is restored after a viewing operation is finished. A full visibility can be explicitly requested during viewing operations by calling the Autogrid Preferences dialog box and setting the visibility flag to Full in the Graphics page. Viewing manipulations can be done while another action is already undertaken (for example, a vertex displacement). That action is temporarily stopped until the viewing operation is finished; then, the action can be performed just like before the viewing. This is useful when operations have to be executed in very distant areas of the model.
2-6.7.1 X, Y & Z Projection Buttons

These buttons allow to view the graphics objects on X, Y or Z projection plane.
Left : press this mouse button to project the view on an X, Y or Z constant plane. If the same
button is pressed more than one time, the horizontal axis sense changes at each press.
2-6.7.2 Coordinate Axis

The coordinate axis button acts as a toggle to display different types of coordinate axis on the active view using the following mouse buttons:
Left : press to turn on/off the display of symbolic coordinate axis at the lower right corner of
the view.
Middle : press to turn on/off the display of scaled coordinate axis for the active view. The axis
surrounds all objects in the view and may not be visible when the view is zoomed in.
Right : press to turn on/off the display of IJK axis at the origin of the active block (in Block Viewing Scope) or of all the blocks (in Grid Viewing Scope). (For more information about the viewing scope, see the View/Grid page of the Quick Access Pad).
2-6.7.3 Scrolling
This button is used to translate the contents of active view within the plane of graphics window in the direction specified by the user. Following functions can be performed with the mouse buttons:
Left: press and drag the left mouse button to indicate the translation direction. The translation is
proportional to the mouse displacement. Release the button when finished. The translation magnitude is automatically calculated by measuring the distance between the initial clicked point and the current position of the cursor.
Middle : press and drag the middle mouse button to indicate the translation direction. The translation is continuous in the indicated direction. Release the button when finished. The translation speed is automatically calculated by measuring the distance between the initial clicked point and the current position of the cursor.
2-72
AutoGrid5
Control Area
2-6.7.4 3D Viewing Button

This button allows to perform viewing operations directly in the graphics area. Allowed operations are 3D rotation, scrolling and zooming. After having selected the option, move the mouse to the active view, then:
Press and drag the left mouse button to perform a 3D rotation Press and drag the middle mouse button to perform a translation Press and drag the middle mouse button, while holding the <Shift> key, to perform a zoom To select the centre of rotation, hold the <Shift> key and press the left mouse button on a geometry curve, a vertex or a surface (even if this one is visualized with a wireframe model). The centre of rotation is always located in the center of the screen. So, when changing it, the model is moved according to its new value. This 3D viewing tool is also accessible with the <F1> key.
2-6.7.5 Rotate Around X, Y or Z axis

The rotation buttons are used to rotate graphical objects on the active view around the X, Y or Z axis. The rotations are always performed around the centre of the active view. Following functions can be performed with the mouse buttons:
Left : press and drag the left mouse button to the left or to the right. A clockwise or counterclockwise rotation will be performed, proportional to the mouse displacement. Release the button when finished.
Middle : press and drag the middle mouse button to the left or to the right. A continuous rotation will be performed, clockwise or counterclockwise. Release the button when finished.
2-6.7.6 Zoom In/Out

This button is used for zooming operations on the active view. Zooming is always performed around the centre of the view. Following functions can be performed with the mouse buttons:
Left : press and drag the left mouse button to the left or to the right. A zoom in - zoom out will
be performed, proportional to the mouse displacement. Release the button when finished.
Middle : press and drag the middle mouse button to the left or to the right. A continuous zoom
in - zoom out will be performed. Release the button when finished.
2-6.7.7 Region Zoom

This button allows to specify a rectangular area of the active view that will be fitted to the view dimensions. After having selected the button,
Move the mouse to the active view Press and drag the left mouse button to select the rectangular region Release the button to perform the zoom operation
These operations can be repeated several times to perform more zooming.
Press <q> or the right mouse button to quit the option.

This tool is also accessible with the <F2> key.
AutoGrid5
2-73
Graphics Area & Views
2-6.7.8 Fit Button

The fit button is used to fit the content of the view to the view limits without changing the current orientation of the camera (which can be interpreted as the users eyes).
2-6.7.9 Original Button

The original button is used to fit the content of the view and to give a default orientation to the camera.
2-6.7.10 Cutting Plane

This option displays a movable plane that cuts the geometry and the blocks of the mesh. The plane is symbolically represented by four boundaries and its normal, and is by default semi-transparent. After having selected the button,
Press and drag the left mouse button to rotate the plane Press and drag the middle mouse button to translate the plane Press <x>, <y> or <z> to align the plane normal along the X, Y or Z axis Press <n> to revert the plane normal Press <t> to toggle the transparency of the plane (to make it semi-transparent or fully transparent). It is highly advised to deactivate the plane transparency when using X11 driver to increase the execution speed.
2-7
The graphics area is the region of the screen dedicated to the display of all graphical objects created by the system. These graphical objects may be distributed in different windows called views in the AutoGrid5 terminology.
FIGURE 2.7.0-1 Graphics
area
2-74
AutoGrid5
Four views are displayed simultaneously in the graphics area:
The symbolic view. The meridional view. The blade to blade view. The 3D View
Although four views can be visible at a time, only one can be active. This view is identified by a red border and is called the active view. The active view can be changed with the left mouse button. Right-click into a view gives access to contextual menu which always contains the two items dedicated to the view management
View management items Selecting the Full View item display the active view on the entire graphics area. To return to the multiview environment, right click on the item MultiView. Full View can also be accessed by double left-clicking in the view. MultiView mode can be retrieved by pressing <Esc>.
2-7.1
Symbolic View
The symbolic view displays a theoretical scheme of the turbomachinery row(s). Each entities (rows, blades, shroud & hub gaps) can be select using left click.
FIGURE 2.7.1-1
Symbolic view
2-7.2
Meridional View
The meridional view displays the entities of the machine projected in (z,r) coordinates. This view is mainly used to create and control the flow paths in each row.
FIGURE 2.7.2-1 Meridional
view
AutoGrid5
2-75
2-7.3
Blade to Blade View
The blade to blade view displays one blade to blade layer of the mesh in (dm/r,theta) coordinates. The m coordinates is the curvilinear arc length along the active layer (flow path). The angles (cell skewness) and the distances (expansion ratio and boundary cell width) are kept by the conformal mapping (x,y,z->dm/r,theta). The blade to blade view is mainly used to control blade to blade generation of the mesh.
FIGURE 2.7.3-1
Blade to blade view
2-7.4
3D View
The 3D view is used to display the solid body of the geometry and the 3D generated mesh, to check the mesh quality.
FIGURE 2.7.4-1 3D
view of solid body
2-76
AutoGrid5
File Chooser
2-7.5
View & User Interaction
The graphical object displayed in the symbolic, meridional and blade to blade view are related to entities of the configuration tree (row, blade, domain limit, shroud & hub gap). Object under the mouse are automatically highlighted in yellow indicating that their selection can be operated by left-click. Right-click displays contextual menus related to the underlying object. To unselect all objects, left-click on a empty location.
2-8
File Chooser
For file management (opening and saving of files) AutoGrid5 uses the standard file chooser window. The layout of the file chooser depends on the used operating system but a typical layout is shown in Figure 2.8.0-1. The directories and files list allows to browsing through the available directory structure to the project directory. In the case a file needs to be opened an existing file should be selected in the list of available files. In the case a new file needs to be created the user can type a new file name with the appropriate extension. In the Files of type bar the default file type is set by default to list only the files of the required type.
FIGURE 2.8.0-1 Typical
layout of a file chooser
AutoGrid5
2-77
File Chooser
2-78
AutoGrid5
CHAPTER 3:
Meshing Fundamentals
3-1
Overview
AutoGrid5 has been developed to ensure a quick management of the grid generation process of turbomachinery configurations. The software is able to take into account the most used components of a turbomachinery. These components are divided into five types:
the blade rows the meridional technological effects (seal leakage, bleed,...) the 3d technological effects (volute, cooling holes,...) the solid mesh the cooling holes, cooling channel and basin
The software provides a highly interactive user interface and a mesh wizard (Chapter 4) allowing an easy setup of the mesh generation process for complex geometries. Based on a template approach, it ensures reusability of the interactive work on similar geometries through the full batch mode capability. The application field of AutoGrid5 covers all the turbomachinery types:
axial and centrifugal machine multistage machine turbine, compressor multi-splitters tandem rows return channel inducer airplane engine compressor stages with fan and by-pass
AutoGrid5
3-1
Mesh Domain Definition
3-2
A turbomachinery configuration domain is defined by the space located between the hub, the shroud and the blades of the machine. Additional domains can be added to the configuration to mesh technological effects (bleed, seal leakage, cooling holes)
Technological Effect Shroud definition
Blade channel Inlet Outlet
Hub definition Blade definition
y x
FIGURE 3.2.0-1 Turbomachinery
domain
3-2.1
Hub & Shroud Definition
The hub & shroud are defined by their meridional trace (ZR coordinates). They define the spanwise boundaries of the domain. The 3D blade to blade domain is meshed on surface of revolution located
3-2
AutoGrid5
between the hub and the shroud definition. The geometry of the hub and the shroud are defined using curves in (x,y,z), (r,theta,z) or (r,z).
3-2.2
Blade Definition
The blades are defined (x,y,z coordinates) by several surfaces and two curves defining their leading and trailing edge locations. During the mesh generation the blades surfaces are intersected by surfaces of revolutions defined from the hub to the shroud.
3-2.3
Inlet & Outlet Limits
The inlet and outlet limits of the domain are by default automatically defined by AutoGrid5 using two straight lines joining the limits of the hub and shroud definitions. The shape and the location of the inlet and outlet boundaries can be interactively modified in the meridional view. In case of multistage configuration (multiple rows), the location of the rotor/stator mixing plane is also automatically defined by AutoGrid5. Their default location are set at the average streamwise location between the upstream trailing edge and the downstream leading edge. Furthermore, the shape and the location of the rotor/stator can be interactively modified in the meridional view.
3-2.4
Technological Effects
The technological effects are divided in two types: the meridional and the 3d effects. They define additional domains stuck to the main channel domain.
3-2.4.1 Meridional Technological Effects

The seal leakages, the cavities and the bleed belong to the meridional effect types. The meridional effect is axisymmetric and its geometry is defined by meridional curves (z,r coordinates). The domain of a meridional effect must always be connected to one or more blade row(s). The mesh of these configuration entities are generated in 3 steps:
manual blocking in the meridional space automatic settings of the number of grid points and the clustering in the meridional space 3D mesh generation obtained by the combination of the meridional blocking and the mesh at the
connection(s) with the blade row(s). More details are presented in Chapter 9 and in dedicated tutorial.
3-2.4.2 3D Technological Effects

The draft tube, pipe diffuser, volute belong to the 3D technological effects. These effects are defined by 3D surfaces or 3D curves (x,y,z coordinates). Their meshes are created manually using the structured multiblock grid generation system IGG. The steps used to create the mesh (more details in IGG user manual and in dedicated tutorial) are automatically saved and can be replayed on similar geometry.
3-2.5
Cooling & Conjugate Heat Transfer
AutoGrid5 allows the mesh generation of the blade and the end wall solid bodies (Conjugate Heat Transfer module). Furthermore, the cooling module allows the mesh generation of basin, basin holes, blade holes, end wall holes, cooling channel with or without pin fins and ribs. More details are presented in Chapter 10.
AutoGrid5
3-3
Geometry Definition
3-3
Geometry Definition
The geometry curves and surfaces defining the turbomachinery domain can be entered using two different ways:
".geomTurbo" native files (NUMECA turbomachinery geometry file format) external CAD files (Parasolid, CATIA v5, IGES format, ".geomTurbo" native, ".dat" files)
3-3.1
The ".geomTurbo" File Format
The ".geomTurbo" file format is structured in three main blocks: the header, the channel and the row(s) definitions. Following is a example of a ".geomTurbo" file format structure for a turbomachinery with three blade rows respectively named impeller, diffuser and return channel.
GEOMETRY TURBO VERSION 5.3 bypass no cascade no NI_BEGIN CHANNEL ... NI_END CHANNEL NI_BEGIN nirow NAME impeller ... NI_END nirow NI_BEGIN nirow NAME diffuser ... NI_END nirow NI_BEGIN nirow NAME return channel ... NI_END nirow
header
channel definition
row(s) definition
NI_END GEOMTURBO
NI_BEGIN GEOMETRY NI_END GEOMETRY
all geometry defined using import CAD window
The bypass parameter must be set to yes in case of a project configuration with bypass (airplane engine,...) The cascade parameter must be set to yes in case of a cascade configuration.
3-3.1.1 Channel Format

The channel format contains the definition of the turbomachinery meridional contour (hub, shroud, seal leakage, bleed,...). It is defined by two types of curves:
The basic curves defined by a set of points. The channel curves defined as a composite of basic curves.
NI_BEGIN CHANNEL NI_BEGIN basic_curve
basic curves definition
3-4
AutoGrid5
Geometry Definition
NAME curve_1 ... NI_END basic_curve NI_BEGIN basic_curve NAME curve_2 ... NI_END basic_curve NI_BEGIN channel_curve hub NAME hub ... NI_END channel_curve hub NI_BEGIN channel_curve shroud NAME shroud ... NI_END channel_curve shroud NI_END CHANNEL
channel curves definition
The number of basic curves is unlimited. The ".geomTurbo" file must contain two channel curves named respectively hub and shroud.
a) Basic Curves
The basic curve format is used to defined a curve and project it in the meridional space (z,r). The curve is defined by a name, an interpolation method (c-spline or polyline), the coordinate type, the number of control points and the points coordinates:
NI_BEGIN basic_curve NAME curve_1 DISCRETISATION 10 DATA_REDUCTION 0 NI_BEGIN zrcurve ZR 28 -0.0425 0.256692 -0.0312928 0.25656 ... NI_END zrcurve NI_END basic_curve
curve name
interpolation type - coordinate type number of control points points coordinates
The coordinate types are identified by the following keyword: ZR, XYZ, RTHZ, ZRTH, THRZ, RZTH,... where X,Y and Z are the 3 Cartesian coordinates and R,TH and Z are the 3 cylindrical coordinates.
By default a c-spline interpolation between the control points is applied. The keyword polyline can be added beside the coordinate type (ZR) to switch off the c-spline interpolation. In this case, the basic curve is defined by straight lines joining the control points. The DISCRETISATION number is the number of points defined between each control points of the c-spline. The DATA_REDUCTION when set to 1 allows to perform a data reduction of the basic curve based on DATA_REDUCTION_ANGLE and DATA_REDUCTION_DISTANCE.
AutoGrid5
3-5
Geometry Definition
b) Channel Curves
The channel curves are used to define the hub, the shroud and possibly the nozzle in case of bypass configuration. A channel curve is a composite of defined basic curves. It is defined by a name and vertices. Each vertex belong to a basic curves and is defined by its parametric location (normalized arc length).
NI_BEGIN channel_curve hub NAME hub VERTEX CURVE_P curve_1 0 VERTEX CURVE_P curve_1 1 NI_END channel_curve hub NI_BEGIN channel_curve shroud NAME shroud VERTEX CURVE_P curve_2 0 VERTEX CURVE_P curve_2 1 VERTEX CURVE_P curve_3 1 NI_END channel_curve shroud
hub keyword vertex definition
shroud keyword vertex definition
The nozzle curve is defined starting from the lower radius side from the outlet to the "inlet" (reverse hub direction) and then on the upper radius side from the "inlet" to the outlet (shroud direction).
FIGURE 3.3.1-1
Nozzle curve orientation
3-3.1.2 Row(s) Definition Format.

The row format contains the geometry definition of a complete row. It is defined by a row name, a row type, a periodicity and the definition of the main blade and possibly the splitter(s):
NI_BEGIN nirow NAME impeller TYPE normal PERIODICITY 36 NI_BEGIN 3d effect NAME 3d techno effect 1 NI_END 3d effect
row name row type row periodicity 3d technological effect definition
NI_BEGIN NINonAxiSurfaces hub NAMEnon axisymmetric hub

REPETITION0 NI_END NINonAxiSurfaces hub NI_BEGIN NINonAxiSurfaces shroud NAMEnon axisymmetric shroud REPETITION0 NI_END NINonAxiSurfaces shroud
hub/shroud non axisymmetric definition
3-6
AutoGrid5
Geometry Definition
NI_BEGIN NINonAxiSurfaces tip_gap NAMEnon axisymmetric tip gap REPETITION0 NI_END NINonAxiSurfaces tip_gap NI_BEGIN NIBlade NAME main Blade ... NI_END NIBlade NI_BEGIN NIBlade NAME splitter 1 ... NI_END NIBlade ... NI_END nirow
tip gap non axisymmetric definition
main blade definition
splitter definition
a) Row Type
The row type is used to specify the row location in case of bypass configuration. Four types, identified by the keyword NORMAL, ON_NOZZLE, IN_BYPASS and DOWN_BYPASS, are respectively used to locate the row before the nozzle (inlet fan), on the nozzle (arm), in the bypass and in the compressor.
b) Row Periodicity
The periodicity defines the number of main blades in the row.
c) Blade Definition
The blade(s) and possibly the splitter(s) are defined by a name and two surfaces defining the pressure and the suction side. The surfaces are identified by the keywords pressure and suction:
NI_BEGIN NIBlade NAME main Blade blade name NI_BEGIN nibladegeometry TYPE GEOMTURBO GEOMETRY_MODIFIED0 GEOMETRY TURBO VERSION 5 blade_expansion_factor_hub0.01 blade_expansion_factor_shroud0.01 intersection_npts 10 intersection_control 1 data_reduction 0 data_reduction_spacing_tolerance 1e-006 data_reduction_angle_tolerance 90 control_points_distribution 0 9 77 9 50 0.00622408226922942 0.119480980447523 units 1 blade units number_of_blades 36 number of blades
suction ... pressure ... NI_END nibladegeometry NI_END NIBlade
blade definition: pressure & suction keywords
AutoGrid5
3-7
Geometry Definition
The units allows to change the "units" of the imported geometry in order to impose a scaling factor and a corresponding tolerance that will ensure correct treatment during the grid generation when computing for example the intersection. If not necessary, it is recommended to keep the default settings (Scale Factor set to 1). The number_of_blades is the number of blades in the row and this must be an integer. This parameter comes from the old AutoGrid4 geomTurbo format. The PERIODICITY (AutoGrid5 geomTurbo format) specifies also the number of blades and this can be different from an integer especially for cascade configuration (section 5-6). For such configuration, only the PERIODICITY is used and correspond to the pitch distance between two consecutive blades. The pressure side and the suction side are defined by a set of cross sections of the blade at several spanwise location. Each section is defined by a set of points:
suction SECTIONAL 13 # section 1 XYZ 100 0.17669 -0.0208609 0.000351471 0.176691 -0.0208788 0.000370063 ... # section 2 XYZ 100 0.17669 -0.0208609 0.000351471 0.176691 -0.0208788 0.000370063 ...
suction keyword number of sections definition of section 1 - close to hub coordinate type number of control points points coordinates definition of section 2 coordinate type number of control points points coordinates
The coordinate types of each sections are identified by the following keyword: ZR, XYZ, RTHZ, ZRTH, THRZ, RZTH,... where X,Y and Z are the 3 Cartesian coordinates and R,TH and Z are the 3 cylindrical coordinates. In AutoGrid5 the rows and blades can be named by the user. These names are appearing in the ".geomTurbo" file and are used in the ".trb" file. In case the user wants to use a template for different ".geomTurbo" files, the row and blade names should be the same. Besides format description, as discussed in the above part, the following options can be considered in order to close the blade geometry using a Cspline curve technique. The options are however restricted to situations when either the leading or trailing edge are left undefined. To do so, the following can be added in the sections pressure or suction.
[ blend_inlet [nb_pt expan_ratio]]: providing the leading edge of the blade is not defined, the
user can add the key word blend_inlet to define automatically a rounded leading edge using a cspline curve that connects the pressure and suction sides of the blade. The parameters nb_pt and expan_ratio respectively represent the number of points selected to define the blend curve and the relative expansion size of the curve edge relative to the distance between the suction and pressure sides of the leading edge. Example: suction blend_inlet 10 1.2
[blend_outlet [nb_pt expan_ratio]]: providing the trailing edge of the blade is not defined, the
user can add the key word blend_outlet to define automatically a rounded trailing edge using a c-spline curve that connects the pressure and suction sides of the blade. The parameters nb_pt and expan_ratio respectively represent the number of points selected to define the blend curve and the relative expansion size of the curve edge relative to the distance between the suction and pressure sides of the trailing edge. Example: suction blend_outlet 12 1.1
[blend_inlet_outlet [nb_pt expan_ratio] [nb_pt expan_ratio]]: providing both the leading and
trailing edge of the blade are not defined, blend_inlet and blend_outlet optional key words can be concatenated into a single blend_inlet_outet key word. blend_inlet_outlet enables to define
3-8
AutoGrid5
Geometry Definition
automatically the edges using a c-spline curve that connects the pressure and suction sides of the blade. See blend_inlet and blend_outlet for the definition of parameters nb_pt and expan_ratio. Example: suction blend_inlet_outlet 10 1.2 12 1.1 When the surfaces defining the blade are physically ruled and that the blade is defined through a set of sections within the ".geomTurbo" file, user must take care to select the same number of points to define each section. In addition, when using the keyword uniform_parametrization, the ith point of the first section will be connected to ith point of the second section. Example:
Section_1 XYZ uniform_parametrization 36 0.5 0.3 0.1 ... Section_2 XYZ uniform_parametrization 36 0.55 0.35 0.11 ...
3-3.2
External CAD Format
AutoGrid5 is able to import the geometry defining the domain from various external CAD format (IGES, CATIA v5, Parasolid). The files containing the surfaces and the curves defining the blades and the meridional contour of the turbomachinery are loaded and displayed. Easy selection of the geometrical entities can be operated interactively and linked to the project configuration through contextual menu (see Chapter 5 for more details). The blade channel must be defined by a set of curves (i.e. axisymmetric boundary of a surface of revolution). The blade(s) of each row are defined by a set of surfaces and two curves defining the leading and the trailing edges. As long as these curves are not defined, AutoGrid5 is not able to create the inlet, outlet and mixing plane boundary of the domain. Parasolid and CATIA v5 import is not available on specific platforms. Please refer to the installation note for more details.
AutoGrid5
3-9
Mesh Generation Steps
3-4

Project Initialization
The mesh generation of a turbomachinery configuration is divided into 6 main steps:
Project set up
Flow path control

Optional
Blade to blade mesh control
3D mesh generation
Project persistency
FIGURE 3.4.0-1 Mesh
generation steps
Additional steps can be defined to mesh technological effects.
3-4.1
Project Initialization
AutoGrid5 provides two different ways to initialize a new project according to the type of the geometry definition (".geomTurbo" or external CAD file). The dialog box Create a new Project (available through the menu item File/New Project) lets the choice between a manual initialization from external CAD file and an automatic initialization from a ".geomTurbo" file.
Expert Mode
Wizard Mode
FIGURE 3.4.1-1
Project initialization dialog box
3-10
AutoGrid5
As mentioned in the previous chapter, the ".geomTurbo" file contains data used to set up automatically the number of rows and to link the geometry contained in the files.
3-4.2
Project Setup
Geometry & Configuration definition
The project setup can be divided in 3 main steps:
Global parameters settings
Default topology definition

The geometry & configuration definition step is only needed if the project is initialized from external CAD file. In this case, the configuration of the machine must be set through the subpad Rows Definition of the Quick Access Pad and the link with the geometry must be done manually through the Import CAD window before starting the grid generation. Expert Mode Wizard Mode
The global parameters settings involves the definition of the periodicity for each row (contextual menu Row/ Properties in Expert Mode or in the Blade row type dialog box in Wizard Mode), the shroud and hub gap definition (contextual menu Row/Define Shroud Gap & Row/Define Hub Gap in Expert Mode or in the Gap and Blending Control dialog box in Wizard Mode) and the first cell width at the solid wall definition (parameter Mesh Control/Row Mesh Control/Cell Width in the Quick Access Pad in Expert Mode or in the Layer Control dialog box in Wizard Mode).
Wizard Mode
AutoGrid5
3-11
3-4.2.1 Row Properties

The row contextual menu item Properties in Expert Mode opens the dialog box Row Properties. The options and parameters available into this dialog box controls the mesh generation of the rows.
a) Periodicity
The parameter Periodicity defines the number of main blade passage into the row. It defines the pitch angle of the blade to blade domain pitch = 2PI/periodicity.
b) Number of Geometry Periodicity

Usually the geometry is specified for one main blade passage: main blade and possibly the splitter surfaces. If the geometry is specified for 2 blade passages, the parameter Number Of Geometry Periodicity must be set to 2. This option is useful for dissymmetric blading.
c) Row Information
The parameters Row Type, Row Orientation, Multi-splitters and Rotation Speed are information not used by the grid generation process. However the Rotation Speed will be used in FINE GUI.
d) Hub/Shroud/Shroud Gap Non-Axisymmetric

These options allow to control the hub, shroud and shroud gap when non-axisymmetric. All these options are explained in details in section 5-4.2 and section 5-5.5.
3-12
AutoGrid5
Mesh Generation Steps e) Tandem Row
The parameters Tandem Row must be set to Yes or to With Next/With Previous in case of tandem row. This is taken into account during the blade to blade grid generation process to improve the quality of the initial mesh (before optimization). The blade to blade process is explained in details in section 7-3.3.
f) Full Mesh Generation

By default, the mesh is generated for 1 main blade passage. The parameter Generate Full Mesh can be switched on to generate all the blade passages. The mesh is obtained by repetition of the first blade passage.
g) Low Memory Use

To reduce the memory usage, the parameters Low Memory Use can be switch on to swap on disk some data (i.e. the computation of the intersections) performed during the grid generation process. It is recommended to switch on this option when meshing multiple channels of blades defined using import CAD window.
h) Number of Repetition
By default, when selecting the menu View/toggle 3D Solid View (section 2-3.3.7), a single blade of each row will appear in the 3D view. The number of blades in the graphics area can be repeated for each row individually using the Number Of Graphics Repetition parameter available in the Row Properties dialog box. Activate the Default option to see a complete view of all the blades of the selected row.
3-4.2.2 Hub/Shroud Gap (Expert Mode)

The row contextual menu item Define Hub/Shroud Gap in Expert Mode opens the dialog box allowing to control the geometry and the meshing parameters of the gap as presented in section 63.3.
3-4.2.3 Cell Width

The Cell Width imposed in the subpad Mesh Control in Expert Mode will allow to impose the cell width at the hub, shroud, shroud and hub gap, and the cell width at the wall in the blade to blade mesh. Afterwards, the cell width can be controlled in the meridional and in the blade to blade views (refer to chapters 5 and 6).
3-4.2.4 Mesh Control

The default topology is set up automatically using the button (Re)set Default Topology of the top menu bar in Expert Mode. It defines the topology and the grid points distribution in the mesh. During this process, AutoGrid5 searches an optimized topology according to some geometrical criterion and the grid level selected through the Mesh Control/Grid Level page of the Quick Access Pad:
AutoGrid5
3-13
The button (Re)set Default Topology applies to the active row(s). The total number of points resulting from the automatic default topology settings depends of the geometry, the number of splitter, the shroud and/or hub gap definition (Coarse 150,000 points, Medium 300,000 points and Fine 1,000,000 points per blade).
3-4.3
Flow Paths Control
The 3D row meshes generated with AutoGrid5 are obtained by stacking blade to blade meshes on surfaces of revolution generated from meridional curves called flow paths. Each row of the project has its own set of flow paths. In Expert Mode, the default number of flow paths is equal respectively to 33, 57, 97 (if the blade is without hub/shroud gap) according to the grid level chosen during the topology initialization (coarse, medium or fine mesh). This number can be modified through the Mesh Control/Row Mesh Control/Flow Paths Number parameter. In Wizard Mode, the number of flow paths is controlled in the Control Layer dialog box.
FIGURE 3.4.3-1 Flow
path definition
If the default flow path definition generated by AutoGrid5 is not suitable for the project configuration or for the CFD computation, the features of the dialog box Row: Flow Paths Control can be used to obtain a complete control of the flow path definition. This dialog box is available through the menu item Mesh Control/Row Mesh Control/Flow Path Control in Expert Mode.
3-4.4
Blade to Blade Control
The 3D row meshes generated with AutoGrid5 are obtained by stacking blade to blade meshes created in the (dm/r,theta) space. Each blade to blade mesh is related to a flow path. The "m" coordinate is equal to the curvilinear coordinate along this flow path. A blade to blade mesh is generated in four steps:
Blade(s) & Layer Intersection
Conformal Mapping
B2B Mesh Initialization
B2B Topology Optimization
3-14
AutoGrid5
The button (Re)set Default Topology (Expert Mode) and the button Preview B2B in the B2B Control dialog box (Wizard Mode) perform automatically these steps. Afterwards, the user is able to modify manually the default settings proposed by AutoGrid5 in Expert Mode.
3-4.4.1 Conformal Mapping

The flow paths defined in the meridional space are used to create surfaces of revolution named layers. These surfaces are intersected by the blade(s) definition to obtain 3d sections projected into the (dm/r,theta) space. The projection, named conformal mapping, ensures reciprocity of the angles and distances.
Blade Blades cross sections
Layer
FIGURE 3.4.4-1 Blade
cross section
3-4.4.2 Blade to Blade Mesh Initialization

The blade to blade mesh initialization is divided in 3 steps:
Definition of a default topology around the cross sections projected in the (dm/r,theta) space. Initialization of the grid point clustering. Initialization of the mesh by transfinite interpolation.
a) Default (O4H) Blade to Blade Topology

The default B2B topology computed by AutoGrid5 is composed by 5 Blocks:
(dm/r,theta) cross section
Upper block
Inlet block
Skin block
Outlet block
Lower block
FIGURE 3.4.4-2 Default
mesh topology
AutoGrid5
3-15
The inlet, outlet, upper and lower blocks use a H-topology. The skin block around the blade uses a O-topology. The (Re)set Default Topology settings algorithm can change the upper and/or the lower blocks topologies from H to C-topology if one of the following criteria is reached:
The inlet solid angle of the blade becomes higher than 45 degrees and the distance between the
inlet and the stagnation points (in the (dm/r,theta) space) becomes smaller than the pitch angle divided by 4.
The outlet solid angle of the blade becomes higher than 45 degrees and the distance between the
outlet and the trailing edge (in the (dm/r,theta) space) becomes smaller than the pitch angle divided by 4. This mesh topology adaptation is called high staggered blade topology optimization:
C block
H block
FIGURE 3.4.4-3 Mesh
topology for high staggered blade
Beside the default (O4H) topology (5 blocks), AutoGrid5 allows the use of HOH and H&I topology, and gives access to a manual blocking mode named User Defined Topology mode. In this mode, the user creates its own blocking and control manually the grid points clustering (more details in Chapter 7). The topology can be modified through the dialog box Define B2B Topology For Active Blade. This dialog box is available through the menu item Mesh Control/Row Mesh Control/B2B Mesh Topology Control in Expert Mode.
3-16
AutoGrid5
b) Grid Points Clustering

The feature (Re)set Default Topology computes the most appropriated grid points clustering on each block edge of the default topology (and possibly the HOH or H&I topology) according to the chosen grid level.
The grid point number can be modified through the dialog box Define B2B Topology For Active Blade. This dialog box is available through the menu item Mesh Control/Row Mesh Control/B2B Mesh Topology Control in Expert Mode.
c) Initial Mesh
The initial mesh is computed using transfinite interpolation techniques inside all the blocks of the default topology except in the skin block inside which a hyperbolic mesh is generated.
FIGURE 3.4.4-4 Initial
mesh for a normal blade
The parameters used to control the initial mesh can be modified through the dialog box Define B2B Topology For Active Blade. This dialog box is available through the menu item Mesh Control/Row Mesh Control/B2B Mesh Topology Control in Expert Mode.
AutoGrid5
3-17
3-4.4.3 Blade to Blade Mesh Optimization

The optimization system is based on a multiblock elliptic smoother with source terms. All the blocks of the initial mesh (all edges included except the solid wall) are optimized to reduce the cell skewness and the cells expansion ratio
FIGURE 3.4.4-5 High
staggered mesh optimization
The parameters used to control the optimization can be modified through the dialog box Optimization Properties. This dialog box is available through the menu item Mesh Control/Row Mesh Control/Optimization Control in Expert Mode.
3-4.4.4 Blade to Blade View Control

The blade to blade view is used to display and control the quality of the blade to blade mesh of the rows. The blade to blade mesh quality can also be controlled using the menu Grid/Grid Quality... or the corresponding icon ( )
a) Display Update
After each modification of the blade to blade topology, the grid points number, the initial mesh or the optimization parameters, the blade to blade view of the active row(s) can be updated using the top menu bar button Generate B2B in Expert Mode or the button Preview B2B in the B2B Control dialog box in Wizard Mode.
b) Active Layer
The blade to blade view of the row is related to an active layer. By default, the active layer is the hub of the machine. The interaction area Mesh Control/Active B2B Layer is used to change the active layer on which the blade to blade mesh is computed and displayed.
3-18
AutoGrid5
Active Layer
FIGURE 3.4.4-6
Active layer set to 100% (shroud) of the span
In multistage configuration, the user controls row by row the blade to blade display. A particular attention must be focused on the undesirable behaviour obtained when different blade to blade row meshes are displayed for different active layers: as the blade to blade view abscissa is the arc length on the active layer, the blade to blade mesh of different rows could overlap if they are displayed on different layers. To avoid this and retrieve a correct display, all the rows must be selected and the top menu bar button Generate B2B in Expert Mode or the button Update B2B View in the Mesh Control/Active B2B Layer area in Wizard Mode, applied after selecting the new active layer. In case of a blade to blade user-defined topology (see section 7-6), when defining an active layer which is not a control layer, internal faces are inserted in blocks to compute the mesh and then they are removed. Therefore this layer is not available for grid quality control.
AutoGrid5
3-19
3-4.5
3D Mesh Generation
The 3D mesh generation of the active blade rows is performed through the top menu bar button Generate 3D. The 3D mesh is automatically computed by AutoGrid5 and displayed in the 3D view. A mesh quality report can be computed and displayed with the top menu item Grid/Grid Quality Report ( ).
FIGURE 3.4.5-1 3D
grid generation & quality check
3-4.6
Project Persistency
The project persistency is performed using the menu items of the File menu. The name and the location of the project files are entered through the dialog box Save Project available through the top menu item File/Save Project.
3-20
AutoGrid5
New project Overwrite the project selected in the project library
Project library
Project Info
FIGURE 3.4.6-1 Save
Project dialog box
3-4.6.1 Create New Project

The button Select a new Project File Name opens a file chooser used to specify the location and the prefix use to save the new project files. The new prefix is automatically added in the project library.
3-4.6.2 Overwrite Existing Project

The button Overwrite the Selected Project overwrites all the project files of the project selected in the project library.
3-4.6.3 Project Library

The project library is the list of all projects saved previously. It is ordered using alphabetical order and a quick search can be performed using the Search interaction area.
3-4.6.4 Project Info

The interaction area Enter Project Info is used to specify or modify text information about the saved project. When scanning the library, the interaction area is automatically updated with the text of the selected project.
3-4.6.5 Project Files

Two types of files are saved by AutoGrid5: the mesh and the template files.
a) Mesh files
The mesh files contain the multiblock mesh topology, geometry, grid points, patch grouping and the boundary condition types:
AutoGrid5
3-21
new_prefix.bcs: boundary conditions files new_prefix.cgns: grid points files (CGNS format) new_prefix.geom and new_prefix.xmt_txt (.X_T): geometry files new_prefix.igg: topology file new_prefix.qualityReport: mesh quality report file new_prefix.config: mesh configuration file used for the grouping in FINE GUI and for the subProject (more details in FINE User Manual)
These files can be loaded into the structured multiblock grid generation system IGG and by the CFD integrated environment FINE/Turbo. The mesh quality file is saved at the end of the grid generation. If the new project has not yet been saved before launching the 3D generation, no grid quality report file will be saved because the system is not able to determine automatically the file location.
b) Template files
The template files contain the parameters and the geometry needed to reproduced the mesh with AutoGrid5:

files (geomTurbo format)
new_prefix.info: the information file new_prefix.trb: the template file containing the grid generation parameters. new_prefix_b2b.png: a picture of the blade to blade view new_prefix_merid.png: a picture of the meridional view In some cases, the Parasolid file (".X_T" (Windows) or ".xmt_txt" (UNIX)) is also needed in AutoGrid5 to replay the template (using ".geomTurbo.X_T") or to load the project (using ".X_T"):
If the Import CAD window is used with Parasolid or CATIAV5 entities. For IGES and
IGG native files the Parasolid file is not needed as these are stored in the ".geomTurbo" file.
If AutoGrid5 creates additional surfaces/curves in the available options, these are stored
in Parasolid file as well. For example, if the Import CAD window is used to define the geometry, the expansion is treated in Parasolid and the resulting surfaces are Parasolid entities, even if the initial geometry was IGES or native IGG.
3-4.6.6 Open Project File

Open an existing project is performed using the menu item Open Project of the top menu File. The geometry, the parameters and the existing mesh are loaded during this process. The project is opened by selecting its template file (".trb" extension). The template file of the project can be selected through a file chooser or through the project library of the Open Turbo Project Wizard. The Open Project Turbo Wizard is divided into three areas presented on Figure 3.4.6-2.
a) Select Project File

This button opens a file chooser used to select a template file (".trb" extension).
3-22
AutoGrid5
Meshing Similar Geometry & Batch Mode
b) Project File Library

All the previously generated projects can be selected in the list and opened using the button Open. The last opened project becomes the active project of the list.
c) Project Information Area

The button Info>> opens the information area containing two pictures of the selected project, the userdefined and global information of the project. This information are automatically updated when scanning the projects of the list.
(A)
(C)
(B)
FIGURE 3.4.6-2 Open
turbo project wizard
3-5

In AutoGrid5 when using an existing template for different geometry, it is not sufficient to rename the template as the ".geomTurbo" file (as in AutoGrid4). It is mandatory to use a ".geomTurbo" file presenting the same row and blade names as the ones used in the template (e.g. when using a new ".geomTurbo", only the geometrical entities
When a particular turbomachinery configuration has been meshed within AutoGrid5, the original template files of the project can be used to mesh automatically similar geometries.
AutoGrid5
3-23
with the same naming as the ones used in the template file will be replaced). The original template file and ".geomTurbo" file are first duplicated using the menu item File/Save Template As. The geometry in the duplicated ".geomTurbo" file is then replaced by the user by a similar geometry. Finally, AutoGrid5 is launched in batch mode using command lines arguments specifying the template ".trb" file, the geometry ".geomTurbo" file and the target location of the mesh files: igg -niversion <version> -autogrid5 -batch -trb <template file> -geomTurbo <geomTurbo file> mesh <mesh file> -print on UNIX/Linux, igg.exe -autogrid5 -batch -trb <template file> -geomTurbo <geomTurbo file> -mesh <mesh file> print on Windows. where <version>, <template file>, <geomTurbo file> and <mesh file> are respectively the version number and the full path names of the template file (".trb" extension), the geometry file (".geomTurbo" extension) and the mesh file (".igg" extension). For example: igg -niversion 87_2 -autogrid5 -batch -trb /usr/user1/template/template1.trb -geomTurbo /usr/ user1/geometry/geometry1.geomTurbo -mesh /usr/user1/mesh/mesh1.igg on UNIX/Linux, igg.exe -autogrid5 -batch -trb c:/usr/user1/template/template1.trb -geomTurbo c:/usr/user1/geometry/geometry1.geomTurbo -mesh c:/usr/user1/mesh/mesh1.igg on Windows.
The location of the grid quality report file can also be specified using the command line: -qualityReport <quality report file full path name>. The option -real_batch can also be specified to allow to generate the mesh in batch mode without the need of a display: igg -niversion 87_2 -real_batch -autogrid5 -trb ... When the original geometry has been specified through external CAD geometry files, the similar geometry CAD files can also be specified using the command lines: -dat <geometry file 1> -dat <geometry file 2> ...
Create Original Template
Duplicate Template
Replace Geometry
Generate New Mesh using Batch Mode
FIGURE 3.5.0-1
Batch Generation
3-24
AutoGrid5
CHAPTER 4:
Wizard Mode
4-1

Overview
The Wizard Mode is a simplified mode allowing to create meshes for a large range of turbomachinery configurations without technological effects and/or cooling effects such as: wind turbine axial, Francis, Kaplan turbine inducer axial compressor centrifugal impeller centrifugal diffuser return channel counter rotative fan SHF pump axial fan
The Wizard Mode has been designed to reduce drastically the number of options available in the interface in order to simplify the user life when meshing blade rows without technological effects and/or cooling effects. This mode is available in Expert Mode when selecting Wizard Mode in the top right toolbar by clicking on the arrow at the right of the user mode combo box. In addition to the simplified interface, a row wizard offers an easy way to set up the mesh generation parameters according to the type of the machine. The row wizard is available using the button Row Mesh Set Up of the top menu bar in Wizard Mode or using the button Start Row Wizard through the Mesh Control/Grid Level page of the Quick Access Pad in Expert Mode.
AutoGrid5
4-1
Wizard Mode
Wizard Mode GUI
4-2
Wizard Mode GUI
The Wizard Mode has been designed to reduce drastically the number of options available in the interface in order to simplify the user life when meshing blade rows without technological effects and/or cooling effects. In Expert Mode, this mode is available when selecting Wizard Mode in the top right toolbar by clicking on the arrow at the right of the user mode combo box.
Menu bar (section 4-2.1)
User Mode
Toolbar (section 4-2.2)
Graphics area (section 4-7)
Quick Access Pad (section 4-5) Control area (section 4-6)
Wizard Mode Interface.
Together with the AutoGrid5 interface, a Open Turbo Project Wizard window is opened, which allows to open an existing project. See section 2-2.2 for description of this window.
4-2.1
Main Menu Bar
The menu bar contains a part of available options of AutoGrid5. Menu items can be activated using click and drag or click and release modes. More details on each menu is available in section 2-3.
File menu: Open/New/Save and Save Project As, Save and Save Template As View menu: Patch Viewer, Sweep surfaces, Coarse Grid, Repetition, Face Displacement, View
and Hide 3D Solid Mesh
4-2
AutoGrid5
Wizard Mode GUI
Wizard Mode
Grid menu: Boundary Conditions, Grid Quality, Grid Quality Report and Negative Cells Module menu: IGG, AutoGrid4 and AutoGrid5 switch menu items
4-2.2
Toolbar
The toolbar contains icons and buttons providing fast input/output options. These are divided into 6 sections:
the user mode combo box: Wizard Mode/Expert Mode the project management icons the mesh generation buttons the view and mesh quality icons the view management icons the copy/paste row topology icons
User Mode
View & Mesh Quality Icons
View Management Icons
Copy/Paste Row Topology Icons
FIGURE 4.2.2-1 Top
toolbar
4-2.2.1 User Mode

By clicking on the arrow at the right the user may select the user mode.
4-2.2.2 Project Management Icons

These icons are related to the most often used options of project management.
TABLE 13. Project
Management icons
Icon
Description
Opens an existing project previously created by AutoGrid5. See the File/Open Project menu item description on section 2-3.1.1.
AutoGrid5
4-3
Wizard Mode
TABLE 13. Project
Wizard Mode GUI

Management icons
Icon
Description
Closes the current project and opens a new empty one. See the File/New Project menu item description on section 2-3.1.2. Saves the current work in the files of the current project. See the File/Save Project menu item description on section 2-3.1.3.
4-2.2.3 Mesh Generation Buttons

These buttons are used to start the mesh wizard or the 3D mesh generation.
TABLE 14. Mesh
Generation buttons
Description
Start the row wizard process for the selected row. Generate the flow paths, the blade to blade mesh and the 3d mesh of the selected rows. See the Generate 3D button description on Chapter 8.
Buttons
4-2.2.4 View & Mesh Quality Management Icons

These icons are related to view management and the mesh quality analysis.
TABLE 15. View
Icon
Description
Open the Mesh Quality dialog box of AutoGrid5. See the Grid/Grid Quality menu item description on section 2-3.4.3. Open the Grid Quality Check dialog box of AutoGrid5. See the Grid/Grid Quality Report menu item description on section 2-3.4.4. Open the Negative Cells dialog box of AutoGrid5. See the Grid/Negative Cells menu item description on section 2-3.4.6. Open the Patch Selector dialog box of AutoGrid5 . See the Grid/Boundary Conditions menu item description on section 2-3.4.2. Select the grid level used by AutoGrid5 to visualize the mesh. See the View/Coarse Grid menu item description on section 2-3.3.3. Open the Sweep Surface dialog box of AutoGrid5. See the View/Sweep Surface menu item description on section 2-3.3.2. Act as a toggle and perform a repetition in the blade-to-blade or 3D views based on the settings imposed by the user in the View Repetition dialog box of AutoGrid5. See the View/Repetition menu item description on section 2-3.3.4.
4-4
AutoGrid5
Wizard Mode GUI

TABLE 15. View
Wizard Mode
Icon
Description
Visualize or hide the solid model of the machine in the 3D view. See the View/toggle 3D Solid View menu item description on section 2-3.3.7. Set the active view in full display mode.
Reset the display mode to multiview.
4-2.2.5 View Management Icons

These icons allow to set any view in full display mode or to reset the display mode to multiview.
TABLE 16. View
Management icons
Description
Set meridional view in full display mode. Set blade-to-blade view in full display mode. Set 3D view in full display mode. Reset the display mode to multiview.
Icon
4-2.2.6 Copy/Paste Row Topology Icons

The copy/paste topology icons allow the user to apply same wizard options from one row to others. It is especially dedicated for multistage machine with several rows of same type (i.e. axial compressor or axial turbine).
TABLE 17. Copy/Paste
Row Topology icons

Description
Copy the selected row wizard options into a buffer. Replace the selected row(s) wizard options by the wizard options stored into the current buffer.
Icon
4-2.3
Quick Access Pad
The Quick Access Pad is located in the left part of the GUI. It contains icons and more evolved options providing a fast access to the more used functions of AutoGrid5. Some of these functions are only accessible through the Quick Access Pad whereas others are also accessible through the menu bar, so that their description will be referenced to these menus. The pad is divided into four subpads, each of which can be toggled by a simple mouse left-click:
Rows Definition subpad
AutoGrid5
4-5
Wizard Mode
Wizard Mode GUI
Geometry Definition subpad Mesh Control subpad View subpad

All the commands and options accessible with these subpads are described in detail in this section. The four subpads are composed of pages containing buttons, icons, input areas. The icons perform specific function related to the subpad and the page. Each page can also be toggled by a simple mouse left-click.
Rows Definition subpad to control the machine configuration
Geometry Definition subpad to define the geometry of hub, shroud, nozzle and blades
Mesh Control subpad to update the mesh in blade-to-blade view
View subpad to control the mesh representation
Grid Parameters area
FIGURE 4.2.3-1
Quick Access Pad
4-6
AutoGrid5
Wizard Mode GUI
Wizard Mode
4-2.3.1 Rows Definition Subpad

The rows definition subpad is used to control the machine configuration through project management buttons and a tree. In the rows definition tree subpad, the user can access following options:
Select all the rows Define new rows Define or remove new blade(s) through the row contextual menu (right-click) Define and control the blade geometry through the blade contextual menu (right-click)
Row menu Blade menu

FIGURE 4.2.3-2 Contextual
popup menus
4-2.3.2 Geometry Definition Subpad

The geometry definition subpad gives access to:
The project initialization through the selection of a native AutoGrid5 geomTurbo file (section
3-3.1).
The geometry initialization through external CAD files (section 5-3). The import CAD window
has been simplified to give access only to blade and end wall geometry definition.
The units definition (section 2-5.2).
4-2.3.3 Mesh Control Subpad

The mesh control subpad displays the number of mesh points of the selected row(s) and allows to choose the layer (Active Layer (% span)) on which the user wants to display the blade-to-blade mesh by pressing the button Update B2B View.
AutoGrid5
4-7
Wizard Mode
Row Wizard
4-2.3.4 View Subpad

The view control subpad is used to control the display of mesh entities in the blade-to-blade view and in the 3D view. When clicking in the 3D view or pressing the viewing icon View 3D, the viewing buttons are associated to the mesh field of application buttons and the Geometry Definition and Mesh Control subpads are closed.
4-3
Row Wizard
After defining the geometry, a row wizard provides an easy way to set up the mesh properties through a wizard. The wizard is launched using the button Row Mesh Set Up in Wizard Mode or Start Row Wizard in Expert Mode: Expert Mode
Wizard Mode
The wizard is composed be a set of dialog boxes. Each dialog box is related to the set up of a set of mesh generation parameters. They contains buttons Cancel, OK, <<Back, Skip>>, Next>> or Finish to control the set up process.
The Cancel button suppresses all the parameters already set by the wizard. The OK button is used to quit the wizard and keep the parameters already set. The <<Back button is used to return to the previous dialog box. The Skip>> button is used to skip the settings of the dialog box. The Next>> button is used to go the next dialog box. The Finish button is used to quit the wizard and launch the 3D mesh generation.
The wizard is divided in 6 steps:
The geometry check (optional) The machine characteristics definition The gap and fillet definition The flow path definition The blade-to-blade mesh definition The end of the initialization
4-8
AutoGrid5
Row Wizard
Wizard Mode
4-3.1
Geometry Check
When launching the wizard, AutoGrid5 warns the user that mesh generation parameters will be modified by the wizard and prompts the user to continue. This reset will keep the modifications performed by the user in the Wizard Mode but will reset to the default value the parameters modified in Expert Mode. Then AutoGrid5 proposes to check the geometry.
If a geometry check is asked (Yes button), a dialog box displays the geometry status. If the geometry is OK, a button Next prompts the user to continue the wizard.
Geometry Check OK
Geometry Check not OK
Only one row must be selected before launching the wizard. If no row or multiple rows are selected, AutoGrid5 warns the user and quits the wizard.
4-3.2
Machine Characteristics Definition
After the geometry check, the Blade row type dialog box is opened.
AutoGrid5
4-9
Wizard Mode
Row Wizard
At this stage, the machine type is specified: Wind Turbine, Axial Turbine, Francis Turbine, Kaplan Turbine, Inducer, Axial Compressor, Centrifugal Impeller, Centrifugal Diffuser, Return Channel, Counter Rotative Fan, SHF pump and Axial Fan. By default no blade type is selected. The user must also define the row periodicity, the rotation status (rotor or stator) and the rotation speed. According to the machine type, AutoGrid5 will choose and adapt the most appropriated mesh generation parameters available in AutoGrid5 expert mode.
4-3.3
Gap/Fillet Definition
The next step of the wizard is used to define the gaps and the blade fillets if needed. Tip Gap
Hub Fillet In case of inducer, axial compressor, axial turbine or Kaplan turbine with rotor mode active, the first time the wizard is executed, AutoGrid5 automatically defines a tip gap into the mesh configuration. If hub and/or tip gap or hub and/or tip fillet already exists in the project configuration, the user can keep unmodified their definition by pressing the button Skip>>. At this stage, the meridional view display the gap or fillet definition. The user can control the gap or fillet width at leading and trailing edge. By default, the widths are set equal to the blade height divided by 20. When selecting the hub gap or tip gap option, the respective hub fillet or tip fillet option is automatically frozen and reversibly. When pressing the button Next>>, a message warns the user if the fillet does cut the limit of the domain.
4-3.4
Flow Path Definition
The fourth stage of the wizard controls the cell width at the wall and the number of flow paths. The spanwise expansion ratio is continuously updated after each user's change. The flow paths are automatically displayed and updated into the meridional view.
4-10
AutoGrid5
Row Wizard
Wizard Mode
By default, the number of flow paths is set to 57. If tip and/or hub gap/fillet are defined previously in the Gap and Blending Control dialog box, the number of flow paths is increased by 16 or 32 (73 or 89 flow paths). When increasing or decreasing the number of flow paths, the number of flow paths in the gaps and fillets is automatically updated as well as the percentage of constant cells:
the flow paths in the gap or fillet will be 25 for N>=129, 21 for N>=97, 17 for N>=65, 13 for
N>=33 and 9 for N<33 (N is the number of flow paths).
the percentage of constant cells will be 80 for N>=157, 70 for N>=129, 60 for N>=97, 50 for
N>=81, 40 for N>=65, 30 for N>=33, 0 for N<33 (N is the number of mid flow paths corresponding to N - gap/fillet flow paths).
4-3.5
Blade-to-Blade Mesh Definition
The last stage of the wizard is used to set up all the blade-to-blade parameters for the mesh generation. All the expert parameters are set automatically according to the type of machine and the bladeto-blade geometry configuration.
When selecting the button Preview B2B, the blade-to-blade mesh is displayed in the blade-to-blade view. The Minimum Skewness Angle and the Maximum Expansion Ratio are displayed in the dialog box. The option Full Visibility allows to see the mesh moving in the blade to blade view when applying the modified blade to blade mesh parameters.
AutoGrid5
4-11
Wizard Mode
Row Wizard
The Grid Level of the mesh can be increased or decreased with the buttons << and >>. AutoGrid5 automatically changes the number of grid points in all the area of the mesh. An estimation of the total number of grid points is continuously updated and displayed after each user changes.
In addition, the option Skewness and Expansion Ratio can be used to display the quality color contour.
If the machine type is not an inducer, a Kaplan turbine or a shf pump and the high staggered blade optimization is high at inlet, low at outlet or low at inlet and high at outlet, a full matching mesh can be imposed between the channel and the gap when a hub or tip gap is defined with the option Full Matching Mesh.
4-12
AutoGrid5
Row Wizard
Wizard Mode
A non-matching connection could be created in the gap if the throat control is activated automatically during the setup of the expert parameters. If Full Matching Mesh is active, the throat control will not be activated.
4-3.6
Initialization End
When previewing the mesh (Preview B2B button in B2B Control dialog box or Update B2B View in Mesh Control subpad) or finishing the initialization (Finish button in B2B Control dialog box), AutoGrid5 imposes automatically cell width around the inlet and outlet limit of the row to ensure streamwise continuity through the rotor stator line. The minimum value between two successive blades is chosen. When clicking on the button Finish, AutoGrid5 proposes to start the 3D mesh generation of the selected row by clicking on yes.
Selecting no stops the 3D mesh generation process and allows the user to view the blade-to-blade mesh on another active layer (Mesh Control subpad) or to switch in Expert Mode to verify and control the mesh parameters set by AutoGrid5 mesh wizard. When the parameters are well defined, clicking on Generate 3D button in the toolbar will start the 3D mesh generation process.
4-3.7
MultiStage Management
The row wizard is useful for a quick setup of the mesh for all the rotors and stators of a multistage turbomachine:
the row wizard is applied on the first rotor and on the first stator the first rotor is selected and the button Copy Row Topology pressed
AutoGrid5
4-13
Wizard Mode
Row Wizard
all the other rotors are selected and the button Paste Row Topology pressed to apply the same
wizard parameters to the other rotors.
the first stator is selected and the button Copy Row Topology pressed all the other stators are selected and the button Paste Row Topology pressed to apply the same
wizard parameters to the other stators.
2 1
4-3.8
Automatic Blade-to-Blade Settings
When clicking on the Preview B2B button in the dialog box B2B Control (section 4-3.5), AutoGrid5 modifies expert parameters according to the machine type and the geometry configuration. All the parameters of the Define B2B Topology for Active Blade and Optimization Properties dialog boxes (Chapter 7) available in Expert Mode are updated during this operation.
4-3.8.1 Global Settings a) Upstream & Downstream H blocks Definition

AutoGrid5 automatically is adding and unfixing upstream and downstream control lines following the blade leading and trailing meridional shapes. These lines are created for all the machine types and are useful to activate the high staggered blade topology optimization. The number of points in the streamwise direction before the upstream control line (N1) and after the downstream control line (N3) is computed automatically based on the length and the number of points (N2) in the streamwise direction between the control lines. N1 = 0.5*N2*L1/L2 N3 = 0.5*N2*L3/L2
4-14
AutoGrid5
Row Wizard
Wizard Mode
L1
L2
L3
b) Blade-to-Blade Topology
The default matching O4H topology is used by the wizard. When the row geometry contains splitter blades or if the machine type is a centrifugal impeller, the H&I topology is automatically activated. In case of a rotor, a tip gap is defined by default in the Gap and Blending Control dialog box.
c) High Staggered Topology

According to the blade solid angle (section 7-3.2) computed on the hub (hub) and shroud (shroud) layer, the high staggered topology optimization is automatically activated. The topology is highly staggered if:
hub>35 and shroud>35 hub>60 and shroud>-20 shroud>60 and hub>-20 shroud>50 and hub>-10 shroud>45 and hub>=-1 hub>45 and shroud>=-1
d) Blade-to-Blade Grid Points

For grid level 0, the default number of points on the blade is set to 81. When decreasing or increasing the grid level the number of points on the blade is set to ensure 3 multigrid levels. The number of points in the blade-to-blade mesh is controlled by the number of flow paths (N):
The number of points in the skin block: 9 if N<49, 17 if N<97, 25 if N<129 and 33 if N>=129. The number of points at leading edge and trailing edge: 9 if N<57, 17 if N<89, 25 if N<105 and
33 if N>=105.
The number of points in the gap boundary layer: 9 if N<49, 17 if N<97 and 25 if N>=97. The number of points in inlet and outlet blocks along streamwise direction: 9 if N<65, 17 if
N<105, 25 if N<129 and 33 if N>=129.
The number of points in up and down blocks along azimuthal direction:9 if N<49, 17 if N<97,
25 if N<129 and 33 if N>=129. In addition when high staggered mode is active, the number of points is computed in up
AutoGrid5
4-15
Wizard Mode
Row Wizard
& down blocks to obtain a high quality mesh. The method also ensures at least 3 multigrid levels.
The number of points along the blunt leading or trailing edge is automatically updated to reduce
the expansion ratio to 1.6 for grid level <=2, 1.4 for grid level <=4 and 1.2 for grid level >4. For H&I topology, the number of points is automatically computed according the grid level and AutoGrid5 imposes variation of the streamwise weight to recompute grid points distribution.
e) Throat Control
The throat control is automatically activated when:
the machine type is a Kaplan turbine, inducer, shf pump or Francis turbine, the high staggered mode is high and low or low and high and the throat angle is < 60 at hub,
shroud and midspan.
Throat Angle
f) Sharp & Rounded Treatment

The sharp treatment is automatically activated for blade edge angle higher than 25. The rounded treatment is automatically activated for blunt blade of Kaplan and Francis turbines.
g) B2B Mesh Parameters

The free outlet and inlet angle are activated. The minimum expansion ratio is computed automatically. The leading and trailing edge clustering is set to the cell width at wall for blunt blade. The interpolation level is set to 2%.
h) Optimization Parameters

The number of smoothing steps is set to 200. The number of smoothing steps in the gap is set to 100. The skewness control is set to off. The skewness control in the gap is set to off. The multigrid acceleration is set to on.
4-16
AutoGrid5
Row Wizard
Wizard Mode
The orthogonality level is set to 0.5. The orthogonality level in the gap is set to 0.5. The multisplitter control flag is set to off. The number of boundary smoothing steps is set to 0.
4-3.8.2
Machine Dedicated Settings
According to the type of machine, the defaults settings described above can be changed.
a) Wind Turbine Settings
The wizard of the wind turbine is composed by 6 steps controlling the main parameters of the mesh generation of the wind turbine:
Geometry check (optional) Dedicated pseudo shroud and upstream and downstream limit definition, Dedicated blade flow paths definition, Dedicated far field limit and far field flow path definition, Blade-to-blade mesh accuracy definition, 3D mesh generation.
Control Upstream and DownStream limits When the wizard is launched, the Shroud Control dialog box allows to control the pseudo shroud location and the upstream/downstream limits.
AutoGrid5 creates automatically a horizontal pseudo shroud located at a radius (R) defined by: R=(Rtip x Blade Tip R Value) - (1e-5 x BladeHeight) The normalized parameters Far Field Zmin Value and Far Field Zmax Value are used to located the inlet and outlet of the domain using the blade location (Zref) and the blade height (BladeHeight) as normalisation value:
AutoGrid5
4-17
Wizard Mode
Row Wizard
Lupstream = abs(BladeHeight x Far Field Zmin Value) Ldownstream = abs(BladeHeight x Far Field Zmax Value)
Zinlet = Zref-Lupstream Zoutlet = Zref+Ldownstream
Zref BladeHeight Rtip Lupstream

INLET
Ldownstream
OUTLET
Control Flow Paths Definition The Layers Control dialog box of the wizard is used to control the flow paths number and the flow paths distribution on the blade by defining the cell width at hub and shroud and the percentage of constant cells.
The Spanwise Expansion Ratio is displayed in the dialog box. If the blade height is respectively upper or lower than 1000, the cell width at wall is automatically set to 1e-2 or 1e-5. Control Far Field Domain The third dialog box is used to control the domain up to the blade (far field).
The far field limit is controlled by the parameters Far Field R Value normalized with the blade height:
4-18
AutoGrid5
Row Wizard
Wizard Mode
H = Far Field R Value x BladeHeight
In addition, the number and the distribution of the layers in the far field can be modified. Automatically, at the end of the wizard procedure, a ZR effect named <Row name> far field is created to control the grid generation process of the domain up to the blade.
The following dedicated settings are changed automatically:
The new topology (Wind Turbine (WT) High Staggered) is activated automatically if the blade
solid angle at mid span is upper than 45.
Wind Turbine (WT) High Staggered
A rounded treatment is applied at the blunt trailing edge (Wind Turbine and Wind Turbine (WT)
High Staggered topologies).
The optimization steps is set to 5000. The multigrid acceleration is set to off. The free inlet and outlet angle are set to off and mesh is frozen (if the blade solid angle < 45). The straight boundary initialization is set to on. The interpolation level is set to 10%. The butterfly bulb topology is applied when the configuration is presenting a bulb.
AutoGrid5
4-19
Wizard Mode
Row Wizard
b) Axial Turbine Settings
In case of a rotor, a tip gap is defined by default.
c) Francis Turbine Settings
A rounded treatment is applied at the blunt trailing edge.
The throat control is active. The H bulb topology is applied when the configuration is presenting a bulb.
4-20
AutoGrid5
Row Wizard
Wizard Mode
d) Kaplan Turbine Settings
A rounded treatment is applied at the blunt trailing edge. The throat control is active. The H bulb topology is applied when the configuration is presenting a bulb. In case of a rotor, a tip gap is defined by default.
e) Inducer Settings
A tip gap is defined by default. When defining the geometry using a geomTurbo native format, leading and trailing edge fitting
is active (section 5-5.1.3)
The throat control is active. The default number of points at grid level 0 is set to 129 on the blade. The free inlet and outlet angle are set to off and mesh is frozen. The mesh relaxation at inlet/outlet is active. The optimization steps is set to 1500. The butterfly bulb topology is applied when the configuration is presenting a bulb.
AutoGrid5
4-21
Wizard Mode
Row Wizard
f) Axial Compressor Settings
In case of a rotor, a tip gap is defined by default.
g) Centrifugal Impeller Settings
If the machine type is a centrifugal impeller, the H&I topology is automatically activated.
h) Radial Diffuser Settings
No dedicated settings applied.
4-22
AutoGrid5
Row Wizard
Wizard Mode
i) Return Channel Settings
No dedicated settings applied.
j) Counter Rotative Fan Settings
The number of points along azimuthal direction is multiply by 2. Dedicated far field limit and far field flow path definition control (more details in Wind Turbine
Settings).
k) SHF Pump Settings
The throat control is active.
AutoGrid5
4-23
Wizard Mode
Row Wizard
The default number of points at grid level 0 is set to 129 on the blade. The free inlet and outlet angle are set to off and mesh is frozen. The optimization steps is set to 500. The straight boundary initialization is set to on.
l) Axial Fan Settings
The new topology (Wind Turbine (WT) High Staggered) is used automatically if the blade solid
angle at mid span is upper than 45.
A rounded treatment is applied at the blunt trailing edge. The optimization steps is set to 500. The free inlet and outlet angle are set to off and mesh is frozen (if the blade solid angle < 45). The straight boundary initialization is set to on. The butterfly bulb topology is applied when the configuration is presenting a bulb.
4-24
AutoGrid5
CHAPTER 5:
Geometry Definition
5-1
Overview
In addition to define the geometry using a ".geomTurbo" file, the geometry definition can be performed interactively through the Import CAD window. Geometry data can be imported from several CAD file formats, interactively selected and linked to configuration entities in an AutoGrid5 project. The user can build a test case starting from scratch and using CAD data in an interactive way. The blade geometry is defined by selecting one or more surfaces while the definition of other configuration features such as the leading edge, the trailing edge, the hub, the shroud, is performed by selecting one or more curves and attaching that curve selection to the required feature.
5-2
Import ".geomTurbo" File
Within AutoGrid5, the ".geomTurbo" file format (more details in Chapter 3) can be imported in different ways:
when creating a new project (File/New Project (
)), a Create a new Project window appears that allows to initialize a new project from an existing ".geomTurbo" file. Then a File Chooser window is available for browsing through the file system and to select a file. When clicking on OK (Open) the geometry is loaded in AutoGrid5.
AutoGrid5
5-1
Geometry Definition
Import CAD
in the Quick Access Pad Geometry Definition subpad, the Import Geometry File menu
allows to select and load geometry file (IGES, IGG geometry, Parasolid coupled with ".dat", ".geomturbo, CATIAV5 files) to define or replace the geometry of the entities found in the file.
in the Quick Access Pad Rows Definition subpad, the popup menu on rows allows to load a
".geomTurbo" file to define or replace the geometry of the selected entities found in the file. After row(s) selection, right-click displays this menu. Define Geometry item replaces only the geometry of the row (blades, shroud/hub gap, cooling wall, ...) selected. To import a new hub or shroud, the Import CAD window must be used.
In AutoGrid5 when using an existing template for different geometry, it is not sufficient to rename the template as the ".geomTurbo" file (as in AutoGrid4). It is mandatory to use a ".geomTurbo" file presenting the same row and blade names as the ones used in the template (e.g. when using a new ".geomTurbo", only the geometrical entities with the same naming as the ones used in the template file will be replaced). AutoGrid4 ".geomTurbo" file can be loaded within AutoGrid5. When AutoGrid4 geometry file loaded, a warning will appear before loading.
5-3
Import CAD
The Import CAD window is started by clicking on Import and Link CAD in the Quick Access Pad Geometry Definition subpad.
5-2
AutoGrid5
Import CAD
Geometry Definition
Menu Bar Quick Access Pad
Viewing Buttons
FIGURE 5.3.0-1 Import
CAD window
5-3.1
Menu Bar
The menu bar gives access to several options which can be useful during the setup of a project.
The pull-down menu File used to import and/or export geometry data in several CAD formats. The pull-down menu Geometry used to perform some geometry editing operations such as creation of geometric entities
The pull-down menu Edit used to specify the rotation axis of the configuration being defined. The pull-down menu View used to perform interactive viewing operations. The pull-down menu Select used to perform interactive selection operations.
5-3.1.1 File Menu a) Open...

File/Open... is used to import geometry data from a file. A file chooser is opened to select a CAD file with one of the following extensions:
.igs, .IGS, .iges, .IGES : IGES files. .dat, .geom, .dst : IGG geometry files. .X_T, .xmt_txt : Parasolid files.
AutoGrid5
5-3
Geometry Definition
Import CAD
.geomturbo, .geomTurbo : AutoGrid geometry files. .CATpart : CATIAV5 files (license key required).
FIGURE 5.3.1-1 Data
Files selection window
When importing a CATIAV5 file, only the surfaces are imported. If a curve is not part of a surface, it is not imported.
b) Open IGES
File/Open IGES is used to import CAD data stored in the standard IGES format. When names are defined for entities in the IGES file, AutoGrid5 uses them for the new entities created in the repository.
FIGURE 4.3.1-1 IGES
file browser
5-4
AutoGrid5
Import CAD
Geometry Definition
This option provides a powerful browser to scan the content of an IGES file and selectively import IGES entities recognized by AutoGrid5. In the case of composite curves and surfaces, the browser allows to view each component defining the entity and to select them individually. Filters, reserved to expert users, allows to filter the data viewed by the browser. Each filter corresponds to a criterion defining if entities with the corresponding attribute set accordingly will be displayed in the browser/imported. It might be useful to uncheck the Blank Filter/Blanked item in order to import only the entities meant to be visible and get a clear view of the intended geometry. The same holds for the Entity Use Filter with only the geometry item checked. For the Subordinate Filter items, it might be useful to also have the both item checked if top-level entities cannot be translated, preventing the importation of their depending entities. The Filters default settings have the following items checked: all Blank Filter items, all Entity Use Filter items but the definition item, the Subordinate Filter independent and logical items, all Hierarchy Filter items. See the IGES reference manual for a complete understanding of all filter values. The list of available IGES entities that can be imported in AutoGrid5 are presented in the table below.
Entity Type Nr
100 102 104 106 110 112 114 116 120 122 126 128 130 140 142 144 158 196
Entity Type
Circular Arc Composite Curve Conic Arc Copious Data (only curves and not points in IGG ) Line Parametric Spline Curve Parametric Spline Surface Point Surface of Revolution Tabulated Cylinder Rational B-spline Curve
Rational B-Spline Surface Offset Curve (only uniform offset in IGG)

Offset Surface
Curve On Parametric Surface Trimmed Parametric Surface Sphere

Spherical surface
c) Export...
File/Export... is used to save all geometry curves and surfaces into an ASCII file with extension ".dat", using the IGG geometry file format, combined with a Parasolid ".xmt_txt" file.
AutoGrid5
5-5
Geometry Definition
Import CAD
d) Close
File/Close closes the current Import CAD session and opens a new one. All curves and surfaces are removed without been saved from the geometry repository.
e) Exit
File/Exit is used to close the Import CAD window. The geometry entities imported in the Import CAD window session are not deleted by this action. When reopening the Import CAD window, it shows still all entities.
5-3.1.2 Geometry Menu

The Geometry menu provides simple and efficient tools to create, edit and delete points, curves and surfaces. Without having the complexity of CAD systems, it allows to create wire or surface models from scratch or to complement imported geometries. The menu allows to:
create and edit basic and advanced curves and surfaces, visualize and probe the geometry entities, perform advanced geometry operations such as surface-surface intersection, offsetting...
including attraction features to points, curves and surfaces. The Geometry menu is inherited from the IGG technology. Please refer to the IGG User Manual.
5-3.1.3 Edit Menu a) Geometry Axis...

Edit/Geometry Axis... is used to specify the rotation axis of the rotating parts of the configuration under definition by the user. By default, the z-axis is assumed to be this rotation axis. The rotation axis is defined by the position of the origin of the axis (X,Y,Z coordinates) and a direction vector (dx,dy,dz components). The modification is validated when pressing Apply.
5-3.1.4 View Menu a) View Solid

View/View Solid is used to toggle the display of the solid triangulated representation for the selected surfaces. If a surface does not have any triangulated representation yet, one will be created with default settings.
5-6
AutoGrid5
Import CAD
Geometry Definition
A triangulated representation with custom settings can be generated using Geometry/ View/Prepare View.
5-3.1.5 Select Menu a) Surfaces

Select/Surfaces allows the user to select or unselect one or more visible surfaces with the mouse. When selected, the boundary curves of the selected surfaces appear highlighted in yellow (default) else they appear in blue. Surface selection is possible by simple positioning of the mouse over the surface. When several surfaces are stacked on top of each other, AutoGrid5 provides a way to sweep through the surfaces before selecting the desired one. The following prompt appears when selecting this option:
Subsequent operations are done with the mouse in the graphics area:
Move the mouse to a surface to select (unselect). The surface is ready for selection (unselection) when it becomes highlighted in blue.
Left-click to select (or unselect) the surface. The surface changes its highlight to reflect its
new selection status.
It is possible to select several surfaces at once by defining a selection rectangle. This rectangle can be specified by pressing the left mouse button without releasing it and dragging the mouse. Releasing the left button will select all the surfaces totally included in this rectangle.
When several surfaces are stacked on top of each other, in the direction of the users eyes,
AutoGrid5 takes by default the closest surface to the user. The user can sweep through the surfaces by middle-clicking the mouse, until the desired surface is highlighted. Leftclick then allows to select the highlighted surface.
Pressing the right button or <q> terminates the selection process.

It is possible to select or unselect all surfaces at once by pressing <a> in the graphics area. The first time <a> is pressed all the surfaces are unselected. The next time, <a> acts as a toggle.
b) Curves
Select/Curves allows the user to select or unselect one or more visible curves with the mouse. When selected, the curves appear highlighted in yellow (default) else they appear in blue. The following prompt appears when selecting this option:
Subsequent operations are done with the mouse in the graphics area:
Moving the mouse over a non-selected curve highlights it, Pressing the left mouse button selects it, Pressing one more time unselects it, Pressing the left mouse button without releasing it and dragging the mouse draw a rectangle. Releasing the left button selects all the curves having a part in this rectangle,
Pressing the right button or <q> terminates the selection process.

It is possible to select or unselect all curves at once by pressing <a> in the graphics area. The first time <a> is pressed all the curves are unselected. The next time, <a> acts as a
AutoGrid5
5-7
Geometry Definition
Import CAD
toggle.
c) Surface List ...

A surface chooser, showing all the surfaces in the geometry repository, is opened to select the surfaces. The selected surfaces are highlighted. To make one or more surfaces selected, choose them with the left mouse button in the chooser, then press Apply. The boundary curves of the surfaces are automatically highlighted in yellow in the graphics area.
The <Ctrl> key is used in combination with the left mouse button to select several surfaces in the chooser. The <Shift> key is used in combination with the left mouse button to select a range of surfaces in the chooser. A range of surfaces can also be selected by pressing the left button, dragging the mouse and releasing the left button. A filter, using regular expression search, is provided to select or unselect surfaces by their name.
d) Curve List ...

A curve chooser, showing all the curves in the geometry repository, is opened to select the curves. The selected curves are highlighted. To make one or more curves part of the selection, select them with the left mouse button in the chooser, then press Apply. The curves automatically appear highlighted in yellow in the graphics area.
5-8
AutoGrid5
Import CAD
Geometry Definition
The <Ctrl> key is used in combination with the left mouse button to select several curves in the chooser. The <Shift> key is used in combination with the left mouse button to select a range of curves in the chooser. A range of curves can also be selected by pressing the left button, dragging the mouse and releasing the left button. A filter, using regular expression search, is provided to select or unselect curves by their name.
e) Invert Selection
Select/Invert Selection toggles the selection status for each curve and surface in the geometry repository. The geometry selection representation, which is highlighted in yellow in the graphics area, is automatically updated
f) Hide Selection
Select/Hide Selection hides the selected curves and surfaces, i.e. the selected curves and surfaces are no longer visible in the graphics area. Curves and surfaces visibility can be controlled further by using Geometry/View/ Curves... and Geometry/View/Surfaces...
5-3.2
Viewing Buttons
The viewing buttons allow the user to perform viewing manipulations on the geometry data. They are all inherited from the IGG technology.
From left to right, the viewing buttons are the following:
X, Y, and X projection buttons. Coordinate axis Scrolling 3D viewing button Rotate around X, Y or Z axis Zoom in/out Region zoom Fit button Original button Cutting plane For further details, please refer to section 2-6.7.
5-3.3
Quick Access Pad
The Quick Access Pad is located on the left of the Import CAD window. It contains one subpad Geometry including the Geometry Groups page allowing the creation, the deletion and the visualization of geometry groups, which can contain curves and/or surfaces.
AutoGrid5
5-9
Geometry Definition
Import CAD
When importing CATIA V5 data, a geometry group is automatically created for each solid model contained within the file. The name of the group is the name of the corresponding solid model. For further details, please refer to the Chapter 7 in IGG User Manual.
5-3.4
Graphics Area Interaction
5-3.4.1 Overview
The Import CAD window allows the user to define the geometry for a configuration by importing external geometry files. The curves and surfaces in the geometry repository can be interactively selected by the user. Once selected, geometry entities can be linked to a configuration entity such as the hub, the shroud, the blade,... The Check Surfaces option allows to automatic check the geometry when linking the blade surfaces, blade leading/trailing edges. The status of the checks is displayed into a Blade Geometry Check dialog box.
When the blade is defined by multiple surfaces, a single body will be created using a tolerance to fill the potential holes between the surfaces defining the blade. When clicking on the Check button, AutoGrid5 checks if the body can be created within the specified tolerance. If not, the tolerance is automatically adapted and the user can manually increase the tolerance in case of failure.
5-3.4.2 "Link to..." Description

In the graphics area of the Import CAD window, the capabilities of linking geometry curves and surfaces to configuration entities, whether in meridional representation or in 3D-space, are accessed by pressing the right mouse button after selecting the curves and surfaces (highlighted in yellow) in the graphics area.
5-10
AutoGrid5
Import CAD
Geometry Definition
define non axisymmetric hub/shroud and shroud gap define nozzle in by-pass configuration define axisymmetric fin on fan in by-pass configuration
define both outlets in by-pass configuration
a) Link to Hub
Link to Hub is used to link a curve selection to the hub of the configuration The meridional representation of the hub is updated to display the new hub geometry.
b) Link to Shroud
Link to Shroud is used to link a curve selection to the shroud of the configuration. The meridional representation of the shroud is updated to display the new shroud geometry.
c) Link Non Axi to Hub

Link Non Axi to Hub is used to link a surface selection to the hub of the configuration in case of a non-axisymmetric hub.
d) Link Non Axi to Shroud

Link Non Axi to Shroud is used to link a surface selection to the shroud of the configuration in case of a non-axisymmetric shroud.
e) Link Non Axi to Shroud Gap

Link Non Axi to Shroud Gap is used to link a surface selection to the tip gap of the configuration in case of a non-axisymmetric shroud gap.
f) Link to Nozzle
Link to Nozzle is used to link a curve selection to the nozzle of the configuration. The meridional representation of the nozzle is updated to display the new nozzle geometry. This item only appears in case of bypass configuration
g) Link to Fin Up/Down

Link to Fin Up/Link to Fin Down is used to link a curve selection respectively to the upper/lower curve of the first row fin. This item only appears in case of bypass configuration and if the first row (fan) contains a fin.
AutoGrid5
5-11
Geometry Definition h) Import Meridional

Import Meridional is used to import the geometry selection in the meridional representation.
Import CAD
Geometry selection may contain surfaces but those will not be taken into account by the import process. Only the curves in the geometry selection will effectively be imported and displayed in the meridional representation.
i) Link to 3D Effect
Import 3D is used to import the geometry selection and link it to the selected 3D effects.
j) Link to Blade
Link to Blade is used to link a surface selection to the active blade. That surfaces set will thus compose the blade surface geometry. When needed, the user may be requested to specify the blade to which the geometry surfaces have to be linked. The meridional representation of the blade is updated in order to display the new blade representation.
k) Link to Pressure/Suction Side

Link to Pressure Side/Link to Suction Side is used to link a selection of surfaces respectively to the pressure/suction side of the active blade. The blade is assumed blunt at both edges and is not compatible with Link to Blade. In particular, this link overrides the link to the blade geometry.
l) Link to Leading Edge

Link to Leading Edge is used to link a curve selection to the leading edge of the active blade. When needed, the user may be requested to specify the blade to which the geometry curves have to be linked. The meridional representation is updated in order to display the new leading edge geometry. For a blunt leading edge, only one leading edge curve of the two blade sides should be selected.
m) Link to Trailing Edge

Link to Trailing Edge is used to link a curve selection to the trailing edge of the active blade. When needed, the user may be requested to specify the blade to which the geometry curves have to be linked. The meridional representation is updated in order to display the new trailing edge geometry. For a blunt trailing edge, only one trailing edge curve of the two blade sides should be selected.
n) Link to Hub Gap

Link to Hub Gap is used to link a curve selection to the hub gap geometry for the active blade. When needed, the user may be requested to specify the blade to which the geometry curves have to be linked to the hub gap definition. The meridional representation is updated in order to display the hub gap geometry.
o) Link to Shroud Gap

Link to Shroud Gap is used to link a curve selection to the shroud gap geometry for the active blade. When needed, the user may be requested to specify the blade to which the geometry curves have to be linked to the shroud gap definition. The meridional representation is updated in order to display the shroud gap geometry.
5-12
AutoGrid5
Hub/Shroud Edition
Geometry Definition
p) Link to Inlet
Link to Inlet is used to link a curve selection to the inlet geometry of the active row.
q) Link to Outlet
Link to Outlet is used to link a curve selection to the outlet geometry of the active row.
r) Link to Outlet Up
Link to Outlet Up is used to link a curve selection to the second outlet (upper outlet) geometry of the active row. Therefore the active row should be the row just before or on the nozzle. This item only appears in case of bypass configuration.
All link operations replace the previous link, if any. If the entity is composed of multiple curves or surfaces, a multiple selection is therefore required (using <Shift> - left-click) before the link operation is applied. For instance, the two sides surfaces of a blade must be selected before invoking the link command.
5-4
Hub/Shroud Edition
The hub & shroud are defined by their meridional trace (ZR coordinates). They define the spanwise boundaries of the domain. The geometry of the hub and the shroud are defined using curves in (x,y,z), (r,theta,z) or (r,z) coming from a ".geomTurbo" file (NUMECA turbomachinery geometry file format) or from external CAD files (Parasolid, CATIA v5, IGES format).
5-4.1
Edit Hub/Shroud
Furthermore, in the Quick Access Pad Geometry Definition subpad, the Edit Hub/Edit Shroud (Edit Nozzle in by-pass configuration) menus allow to edit and adapt the shape of the hub and shroud (nozzle) in the meridional view.
When selecting Edit Hub or Edit Shroud, the control of the hub or shroud is done through the editing of an edge and its vertices.
AutoGrid5
5-13
Geometry Definition
Hub/Shroud Edition
Vertices can be:
added. Use the <i> shortcut, deleted. Right-click on an intermediate vertex to popup the corresponding menu, moved. Left-click on a vertex to select it, move it and left-click again to fix it.
Right-click
FIGURE 5.4.1-1 Move/Add
vertex
Once the edge is correctly positioned, right-click to quit the editing tool. All the channel is recomputed according to the modification as shown in the following figure where the hub is represented by a green dashed line (representation mode when the hub is not completely mapping on basic curves).
Trailing Edge Leading Edge
FIGURE 5.4.1-2 New
hub definition
5-4.2
Non-Axisymmetric Hub/Shroud
The end walls of a usual turbomachinery configuration are defined by axisymmetric surfaces. The geometry of these end walls are defined by the hub and shroud curves in meridional coordinates. When the real end walls are non axisymmetric surfaces, the mesh is obtained in two steps:
generate an axisymmetric mesh, axisymmetric mesh adaptation to the specified non-axisymmetric end walls.
Please refer to dedicated tutorial for more details.
5-14
AutoGrid5
Hub/Shroud Edition
Geometry Definition
FIGURE 5.4.2-1 Non-axisymmetric
end walls
In addition to the axisymmetric hub and shroud curves defining the meridional domain, 3D surfaces defining the non-axisymmetric end walls must be defined. These can be directly specified in the ".geomTurbo" file or imported through the Import CAD window of AutoGrid5.
5-4.2.1 From ".geomTurbo" File

The non-axisymmetric surfaces are stored in external IGG data file and specified into the ".geomTurbo" file using the following format:
NI_BEGIN NINonAxiSurfaces hub NAME non axisymmetric hub REPETITION 3 EXTERNAL nonaxihub.dat NI_END NINonAxiSurfaces hub NI_BEGIN NINonAxiSurfaces shroud NAME non axisymmetric shroud REPETITION 0 EXTERNAL nonaxihub.dat NI_END NINonAxiSurfaces shroud
non axisymmetric hub definition
non axisymmetric shroud definition
AutoGrid5
5-15
Geometry Definition
Hub/Shroud Edition
Any type of surface created and stored by IGG can be used to defined the non-axisymmetric end walls.
5-4.2.2 From Import CAD

The non-axisymmetric surfaces can be imported from external CAD files. The contextual menu of the import window allows the user to link imported surfaces to the hub and/or shroud definition.
CAD contextual menu for non-axisymmetric end walls
5-4.2.3 Mesh Generation Control

The non-axisymmetric end walls generation is controlled into the Row Properties dialog box.
FIGURE 5.4.2-3 Row
properties dialog box
The options Non-Axisymmetric Hub & Shroud are used to enable or disabled the mesh adaptation on the specified non axisymmetric surfaces. If the non axisymmetric surfaces do not intersect the axisymmetric mesh, the 3D mesh needs to be projected on the end walls. This can be done in two ways:
Projection Along Grid Line. The mesh is projected on the end walls based on the spanwise
grid line direction. This method allows to avoid non matching connections that may appear when using the Projection Along the Face Normal.
5-16
AutoGrid5
Hub/Shroud Edition
Geometry Definition
Projection Along the Face Normal (active by default). The mesh is projected on the end walls,
based on the normal direction of the hub or shroud face. This method leads to a better mesh quality. The option Repair Non-projected Points allows to correct non-well projected points (i.e. when the mesh points on boundaries are close to hub or shroud surface limits). The options Display Non-Axisymmetric Hub & Shroud are used to display the surfaces in the 3D view. To obtain a correct behaviour, the surfaces must cover all the hub or shroud blade to blade domain of the axisymmetric mesh. If the specified surfaces do not cover the entire domain as shown in the next figure, the Geometry Repetition options allow the user to repeat the entered surfaces by rotation until the new surfaces cover the domain.
Hub blade to blade domain is not cover by the surface definition
Surface repetition ensure the blade to blade domain covering

FIGURE 5.4.2-4 Surfaces
repetition ensure full domain covering.
At the end of the 3D blade row generation, the mesh adaptation is performed automatically. The axisymmetric mesh is adapted by hub to shroud grid points redistribution along the curve obtain by intersecting the surfaces with the hub to shroud grid lines.
AutoGrid5
5-17
Geometry Definition
Blade Edition
5-5
5-5.1
Blade Edition
Blade Expansion
The Blade Expansion dialog box is accessed by right-clicking on the selected blade in the main graphics area and by selecting Expand Geometry from the list of commands. An alternate method consists in right-clicking over the Main Blade (splitter) in the Rows Definition subpad of the Quick Access Pad, then in selecting Expand Geometry from the list of commands.
Expansion dialog box
5-5.1.1 Force Blunt at Leading Edge

Force blunt at leading edge is used to specify whether or not the blade geometry has to be considered as blunt in the region of the leading edge.
5-5.1.2 Force Blunt at Trailing Edge

Force blunt at trailing edge is used to specify whether or not the blade geometry has to be considered as blunt in the region of the trailing edge.
5-5.1.3 Stick Leading/Trailing Edge

Stick leading & trailing edge is used to fit leading and trailing edge of pressure and suction sides along the spanwise direction when the leading and/or trailing edge are very curved (i.e. inducer, twisted blade,...) and the blade is defined by few sections in ".geomTurbo". In such cases, a discontinuous shape in the blade-to-blade view may result when reconstructing the section. This option is by default deactivated.
5-5.1.4 Apply a Rotation

Apply a rotation is used to rotate the blade around a user-defined axis, but is only available for native ".geomTurbo" blades. The axis and anchor point fields expect three floating point coordinates while the angle value is given in degrees.
5-18
AutoGrid5
Blade Edition
Geometry Definition
A xis (dx,dy,dz) A ngle ( in degree) Anchor Point (x,y,z)
This item is not available if the blade has been linked by mean of the CAD import tool.
5-5.1.5 Sewing Tolerance

Sewing tolerance is used to define a tolerance value during CAD import, in order to sew the surfaces that define the blade. The default tolerance value is set as 1e-006. Too small value may leave many unwanted holes/gaps, while too large value can end up making some faces disappear, and can also lead to unwanted gaps.
5-5.1.6 Expansion at Hub

An optional expansion can be applied when the blade geometry has to be extended towards the hub surface of revolution. Four options are available.
a) Unchanged
This choice is the default and leaves the original blade surfaces unchanged or restores the original surfaces when another option was previously activated.
b) Expand
An expansion can be specified by the user when the blade geometry has to be extended towards the hub surface of revolution in order to make it intersects the hub definition.
In case of native "geomTurbo" format, the input value is treated as an expansion factor. In case of geometry definition through CAD import, two input boxes appear: Cut offset and Extension
offset. These inputs allow respectively to define the absolute hub offset to cut the blade and the absolute blade extension over the hub.
SHROUD
BLADE
cut offset extension offset
HUB
FIGURE 5.5.1-2 Definition
of blade offset from hub with schematic sketch
AutoGrid5
5-19
Geometry Definition
Blade Edition
c) Treat blend
When the blade geometry and the hub surface of revolution connect tangentially by mean of a blend, a special treatment needs to be applied in order to ensure proper intersection computation between the blade and the hub. The method used to handle such cases can be summarized as follows:
Creation of a virtual hub created by an offset of the hub surface of revolution according to user
specified parameter(s).
Intersection of the blade and the virtual hub. Extension of the blade geometry towards the hub surface of revolution starting from these intersection curves. The extension is performed tangentially to the blade geometry and ensures that the new blade geometry and the hub do intersect.
The blade geometry is replaced by this new definition and any dependent configuration entity is
updated, e.g. the leading and trailing edges are modified to remain consistent with the new blade geometry definition. With this input method, the cutting offset is built from the curvature radius of the blend and the minimum angle at which the blade should intersect the hub.
d) Treat blend with offset

This treatment consists in the same steps as treat blend, but the cutting offset is input directly as a distance.
5-5.1.7 Expansion at Shroud

An optional expansion can be applied when the blade geometry has to be extended towards the shroud surface of revolution. Four options are available.
a) Unchanged
This choice is the default and leaves the original blade surfaces unchanged or restores the original surfaces when another option was previously activated.
b) Expand
An expansion can be specified by the user when the blade geometry has to be extended towards the shroud surface of revolution in order to make it intersects the shroud definition.
In case of native "geomTurbo" format, the input value is treated as an expansion factor. In case of geometry definition through CAD import, two input boxes appear: Cut offset and
Extension offset. These inputs allow respectively to define the absolute shroud offset to cut the blade and the absolute blade extension over the shroud.
c) Treat blend
When the blade geometry and the shroud surface of revolution connect tangentially by mean of a blend, a special treatment needs to be applied in order to ensure proper intersection computation between the blade and the shroud. The method used to handle such cases can be summarized as follows:
Creation of a virtual shroud created by an offset of the shroud surface of revolution according to
user specified parameter(s).
5-20
AutoGrid5
Blade Edition
Geometry Definition
Intersection of the blade and the virtual shroud. Extension of the blade geometry towards the shroud surface of revolution starting from these
intersection curves. The extension is performed tangentially to the blade geometry and ensures that the new blade geometry and the shroud do intersect.
The blade geometry is replaced by this new definition and any dependent configuration entity is
updated, e.g. the leading and trailing edges are modified to remain consistent with the new blade geometry definition. With this input method, the cutting offset is built from the curvature radius of the blend and the minimum angle at which the blade should intersect the shroud.
d) Treat blend with offset

This treatment consists in the same steps as treat blend, but the cutting offset is input directly as a distance.
5-5.2
Blade Fillet
The blade geometry can be connected to the hub or shroud surface of revolution by means of a fillet. The Fillet Properties dialog box is accessed by right-clicking on the selected blade or row in the main graphics area and by selecting Define Hub Fillet or Define Shroud Fillet from the list of commands. An alternate method consists in right-clicking over the row or the Main Blade (splitter) in the Rows Definition subpad of the Quick Access Pad, then in selecting Define Hub Fillet or Define Shroud Fillet from the list of commands.
FIGURE 5.5.2-1
Fillet Properties dialog box
The method used to add a fillet to the blade can be summarized as follows:
Creation of a virtual hub or shroud created by respectively an offset (radius at leading/trailing

edge) of the hub or shroud surface of revolution according to user specified parameter(s) or an external curve by activating the Defined Shape option and selecting a simple ".dat" file through the button Select Geometry File. The Show/Hide buttons allow to preview the user defined curve used for the fillet before generating the flow paths.
Intersection of the blade and the virtual hub or shroud.
AutoGrid5
5-21
Geometry Definition
Blade Edition
Extension of the blade geometry up to the hub or shroud surface of revolution starting from
these intersection curves and respecting the radius imposed at leading/trailing edge.
When the minimum angle is reached locally, the blade geometry is extended tangentially to the
blade geometry defined at this location and ensures that the new blade geometry and the hub or shroud do intersect.
Control of the fillet clustering by giving the cell width and the number of constant cells (Percentage of Mid-flow Cells). By default the fillet clustering is computed using a hyperbolic tangent spanwise distribution.
The blade geometry is replaced by this new definition and any dependent configuration entity
depending on it is updated, e.g. the leading and trailing edges are modified to remain consistent with the new blade geometry definition.
Minimum Angle
BLADE HUB
FIGURE 5.5.2-2 Fillet
parameters: radius & angle
When the fillet has been added, popup menu is available in the Rows Definition subpad of the Quick Access Pad when right-clicking on Hub Fillet or Shroud Fillet items allowing to modify the settings of the fillet or to delete the fillet.
FIGURE 5.5.2-3 Fillet
popup menu
5-22
AutoGrid5
Blade Edition
Geometry Definition
5-5.3
Leading/Trailing Edge Wizard
The leading and trailing edge curves can be defined by the user by adding a wizard to the blade through the blade menu Add Wizard LE TE. This menu will add an item Wizard LE TE in the blade configuration tree.
The wizard is started when selecting the menu Start after right-clicking on the new item.The wizard is composed be a set of dialog boxes. Each dialog box is related to the setup of a set of parameters and contain buttons Cancel, OK, <<Back, Next>> or Finish to control the set up process:
The Cancel button suppresses all the parameters already set by the wizard. The OK button is used to quit the wizard and keep the parameters already set. The <<Back button is used to return to the previous dialog box The Next>> button is used to go the next dialog box. The Finish button (only in last dialog box) is used to quit the wizard and launch the 3D generation.
5-5.3.1 Control Layers Definition

When starting the wizard, the dialog box controlling the layers is opened and the default layers are displayed in the meridional view.
AutoGrid5
5-23
Geometry Definition
Blade Edition
a) Control Layer Limits

The default layer limit can be controlled through the parameters Upstream control layer limit and Downstream control layer limit. Their values are given in relative arc length location on the hub.
A visual control should be performed in the meridional view to ensure that the layer cover the domain of the blade definition.
b) Control Layer Clustering

The clustering at hub and shroud (Hub clustering/Shroud clustering) is controlled by giving a ratio of the cell width corresponding to a uniform distribution of the layer.
Uniform Clustering
Hub/Shroud Clustering set to 0.5
AutoGrid5 uses a geometrical progression to define the layer from hub to shroud. In addition, the user can control the percentage of cell of constant width (% of Constant Cells), the number of layers and the number of control points used to defined each layer.
c) Global Layer Control

When the blade has a very high staggered angle close to 90, the technology that uses dm/r minimum and maximum value is no more suitable. The options Very low leading edge angle and Very high leading edge angle allow the user to switch to a more suitable technology (using theta minimum and maximum). When the blade does not cut the hub and/or the shroud, the user can specify that the first and the last control layer must not be taken into account to compute the leading and the trailing edge by deactivating respectively the options Use First Control Layer and Use Last Control Layer.
5-24
AutoGrid5
Blade Edition
Geometry Definition
d) Expert Layer Control
The tolerance used to create the chord at leading or/and trailing edge can be decreased especially in case of blade with a large width at leading and/or trailing edge. The number of iterations steps and the number of points used to create the chord can also be controlled. The Debug mode option allows the user to show the chord computed at each iteration and the intersection points used to compute the leading and the trailing edges. This can be useful to identify the area where the oscillations appear in the chord in case of circular leading or trailing edge.
5-5.3.2
Leading/Trailing Edge Location Definition
When the button Next>> is pressed in the Leading Edge & Trailing Edge: Control Layer dialog box, default leading edge and trailing edge locations are computed and displayed in the XYZ view and the dialog box Leading Edge & Trailing Edge: Edges Control is opened.
AutoGrid5
5-25
Geometry Definition
Blade Edition
a) Active Layer
By default, all the layers are activated (displayed in yellow). The Active layer (0:all) parameters can be used to select the layer on which the values of the following parameters will be applied. When the value is not equal to 0, the active layer is automatically displayed in yellow and the others ones in blue.
b) Edge Location Control.

By default, AutoGrid5 computes a location for the leading and trailing edge in 8 steps: 1. Generation of the control layer in the meridional plane, 2. Intersection between the control layer and the blade definition, 3. Projection of the intersection in the blade-to-blade plane (dm/r,theta), 4. Generation of the chord using as limit the dm/r minimum and maximum value by default, 5. Limit the chord using the blade width as reference cut distance, 6. Extend the chord to obtain a first location of the leading and trailing edge, 7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 to refine the location of the leading and trailing edge.
8. Finally, cspline curves (joining all the leading edge and trailing edge points defined from the projection in the XYZ space of the points defined in the B2B space) are created and expanded using first order prolongation. The parameters Leading Edge Location and Trailing Edge Location allow the user to modify the default location by giving a deviation of its parametrical position on the blade intersection. The parameters can vary from 0 to 1.
5-26
AutoGrid5
Blade Edition
Geometry Definition
c) Edge Expansion Control

The parameters Hub Expansion and Shroud Expansion control the expansion of the leading edge and trailing edge curves in percentage of the spanwise height.
d) View B2B & Solid Body

The option View B2B switch the visualization from the 3D view in a blade-to-blade view.
The option View Solid Body allows to visualize the solid body of the blade in the 3D view.
The button Finish is used to replace the current definition of the leading and trailing edge curves by the one created by the wizard. The options Update Leading Edge and Update Trailing Edge are used to choose if the leading, trailing or both edges must be replaced.
The wizard is not available for blunt leading and trailing edge.
AutoGrid5
5-27
Geometry Definition
Blade Edition
5-5.4
Sheet on Blade
A sheet can be added on the blade by right-clicking on the selected blade in the main graphics area and by selecting Define Sheet from the list of commands. An alternate method consists in right-clicking over the Main Blade (splitter) in the Rows Definition subpad of the Quick Access Pad, then in selecting Define Sheet from the list of commands.
The sheet on blade is not compatible with sharp treatment, control lines on blade, throat control and conjugate heat transfer/cooling options. In the meridional plane, AutoGrid5 imposes flow paths at the upper and lower sheet limit, while in the blade-to-blade view, AutoGrid5 imposes grid point clustering at the upstream and downstream limits. The blade sheet is defined by 5 geometry characteristics: i
the upper and lower limits, the upstream and downstream limits, the sheet width.
5-28
AutoGrid5
Blade Edition
Geometry Definition
In the Sheet Lower/Upper Zone dialog boxes available by right-clicking over the Lower/Upper Zone in the Rows Definition subpad and selecting Properties, the upper and lower limit control is performed using a way similar to the tip gap. For both, the user can control the width and clustering in the spanwise direction through a dialog box identical to the dialog box used to control the gap or the fillet.
Upper Zone
Lower Zone
The lower/upper zone are identical for all the blades of the same row. In the Blade Sheet Properties dialog box available by right-clicking over the Sheet in the Rows Definition subpad and selecting Properties, the upstream, downstream limits and the sheet width can be controlled.
Lower Side, Upper Side, Both Side. A sheet can be added on the lower, the upper or on both sides of the blade. Distance From Leading/Trailing Edge. The sheet upstream and downstream limits are defined by giving a distance from the leading and the trailing edge along the blade chord.
Streamwise Npts Near Leading/Trailing Edge. The streamwise number of points can be controlled before and after the sheet definition (N1,N2). The number of points on the sheet is equal to the number of points on the blade lower side and/or on the blade upper side - (N1+N2-2).
AutoGrid5
5-29
Geometry Definition
Blade Edition
Sheet
N1
Width. The sheet width can be controlled. The skin block width is equal to the sheet width (w) multiply by 2. Mid-clustering is imposed to capture the boundary layer of the sheet. The optimization of the skin block is switched off.
Sheet
2xw w Skin Block
5-5.5
Non-Axisymmetric Shroud Gap
In AutoGrid5, meshing a multisplitter configuration with different tip gap heights is possible at the condition that tip gap meridional profiles do not intersect and that there is enough space between each of them to be able to insert mesh layers (flow paths). In order to overcome this limitation, a technique similar to hub and shroud non-axisymmetric treatment (section 5-4.2) is available for non-axisymmetric tip gap. When the real tip gap is defined by non-axisymmetric surfaces, the mesh is obtained in two steps:
generate a mesh with an axisymmetric tip gap, axisymmetric mesh adaptation to the specified non-axisymmetric tip gap.
The axisymmetric gap curve should be lower than the non-axisymmetric surfaces in order that the gap mesh intersects these surfaces. Otherwise gap spanwise grid lines should be extended to intersect these surfaces and it will lead to a non matching connection with the channel mesh.
5-30
AutoGrid5
Blade Edition
Geometry Definition
FIGURE 5.5.5-1 Non-axisymmetric
shroud gap
In addition to the axisymmetric curve defining the shroud gap, 3D surfaces defining the non-axisymmetric shroud gap must be defined. These can be directly specified in the ".geomTurbo" file or imported through the Import CAD window of AutoGrid5. To obtain a correct behaviour, the non-axisymmetric surface(s) defining the shroud gap: + should cover all the domain (blades + channel parts), + should cross all the blades including the non-axisymmetric shroud gap,
5-5.5.1 From ".geomTurbo" File

The non-axisymmetric surfaces are stored in external IGG data file and specified into the ".geomTurbo" file using the following format:
NI_BEGIN NINonAxiSurfaces tip_gap NAME non axisymmetric tip gap REPETITION 3 EXTERNAL nonaxitipgap.dat NI_END NINonAxiSurfaces tip_gap
Any type of surface created and stored by IGG can be used to defined the non-axisymmetric shroud gap.
5-5.5.2 From Import CAD

The non-axisymmetric surfaces can be imported from external CAD files. The contextual menu of the import window allows the user to link imported surfaces to the shroud gap definition.
AutoGrid5
5-31
Geometry Definition
Blade Edition
CAD contextual menu for non-axisymmetric shroud gap

The non-axisymmetric shroud gap generation is controlled into the Row Properties dialog box.
FIGURE 5.5.5-3 Row
The option Non-Axisymmetric Shroud Gap is used to enable or disabled the mesh adaptation on the specified non axisymmetric surfaces. The option Repair Non-projected Points allows to correct non-well projected points (i.e. when the mesh points on boundaries are close to hub or shroud surface limits). The option Display Non-Axisymmetric Shroud Gap is used to display the surfaces in the 3D view. To obtain a correct behaviour, the surfaces must cover all the domain (blades + channel parts) of the axisymmetric mesh. If the specified surfaces do not cover the entire domain, the Geometry Repetition option allows the user to repeat the surfaces by rotation until the new surfaces cover the domain. At the end of the 3D blade row generation, the mesh adaptation is performed automatically. The axisymmetric mesh is adapted by hub to shroud grid points redistribution along the curve obtain by intersecting the surfaces with the hub to shroud grid lines.
5-32
AutoGrid5
Cascade Configuration
Geometry Definition
5-6
Cascade Configuration
By default, AutoGrid5 is generating a mesh in an axisymmetric configuration turbomachine. When creating a new project (File/New Project), a cascade configuration can be generated after activating the Cascade option.
This type of configuration is defined by a translation periodicity instead of a rotation periodicity. The geometry can be defined through Import CAD window in the same way as for an axisymmetric configuration after defining the geometry reference axis and origin (Edit/Geometry Axis...).
By default, the stream and span directions are respectively the Z- and X-directions. In addition, the cascade configuration geometry can be defined using a ".geomTurbo" file, where the channel and blades are defined similarly as for an axisymmetric configuration after setting the cascade parameter to yes on the top of the file. When the geometry is defined, in the Row/Properties contextual menu, a rational value for the pitch distance between two successive blades (Periodicity) can be defined instead of the number of blades imposed for an axisymmetric configuration.
d = 57
FIGURE 5.6.0-1
Cascade Configuration - Periodicity
AutoGrid5
5-33
Geometry Definition
Blade Geometry Check
The mesh controls and generation are similar to the method used for an axisymmetric configuration.
FIGURE 5.6.0-2 Cascade
Configuration - 3D Mesh
5-7
5-7.1

Check Geometry
Once the properties of the blade geometry are defined, the user can check the correctness of the definitions of the blade geometry using the Blade Geometry Check dialog box. This dialog box is available from the Check Geometry option in the contextual menu, and appears by right-clicking on the Main Blade or Splitter in the Rows Definition subpad of the Quick Access Pad. When the dialog box is opened, the blade sections and orientations are automatically displayed in the 3D view. The progress status displays a report about the blade definition status when the Check button is selected. During the geometry check of a blade, AutoGrid performs the following operations:
check blade definition. check orientation of the blade section curves. loop detection into the blade section curves. loop detection between the blade sections.
5-7.1.1 Blade Definition Check

Using this checking criterion, blade surface definition is checked. Check Geometry (Import CAD) In addition, when the blade is defined by multiple surfaces using Import CAD window, a single body will be created using a tolerance to fill the potential holes between the surfaces defining the blade. When clicking on the Check button, AutoGrid5 checks if the body can be created within the specified tolerance. If not, the tolerance is automatically adapted and the user can manually increase the tolerance in case of failure.
5-34
AutoGrid5
Geometry Definition
5-7.1.2 Streamwise Orientation Check

The blade sections must be streamwise oriented. If the hub and shroud are defined, AutoGrid warns the user if the blade section is not correctly oriented. This checking is available for ".geomTurbo" native format only.
5-7.1.3 Loop Detection - Distance Check

The distance check in loop detection process warns the user if the Control Points Distance Criteria is reached. The default value of the distance between 2 consecutive blade sections control points is 1e-006. This checking is available for ".geomTurbo" native format only.
5-7.1.4
Loop Detection - Angle Check
The angle check in loop detection process warns the user if the Control Points Angle Criteria is reached. The default value of the angle between 3 consecutive blade sections control points is 90.0. This checking is available for ".geomTurbo" native format only.
AutoGrid5
5-35
Geometry Definition
5-7.2
Adapt Geometry
Once the blade geometry is checked, the blade definition can be adapted by performing the following actions:
data reduction, so as to remove potential loops, blade rotation around the Z axis, re-orientation of the blade sections, data reduction using the distribution of control points.
5-7.2.1 Data Reduction

A data reduction of the blade sections curve is performed if the Data Reduction option is selected. The points detected in the loop search process are removed from the blade section definition. This process is available for ".geomTurbo" native format only.
5-7.2.2
Blade Sections Interpolation Loops
A second check is done on intermediate blade section curve to see if the interpolation of the sections does not contain loops. If the loops are detected in the intermediate curve section, then the loop locations are displayed in the 3D view. A warning indicates that interpolation is wrong and contains loops. Problem of interpolation often arises due to the way the sections are defined and in particular the control points distributions on the sections. It is strongly advised to define the control points as smooth as possible. If this process does not work, the Blade Geometry Check dialog box can be used to redistribute the control points on each section by activating the option Control Points Redistribution. When the option is checked, the blade sections are automatically recomputed based on a user-defined control point distribution. The parameters controlling the distribution are the following:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Control Points Number on the Leading Edge. Control Points Number on the Middle. Control Points Number on the Trailing Edge. Number Of Constant Cells on the Middle. Control Points Spacing at Leading Edge. Control Points Spacing at Trailing Edge.
FIGURE 5.7.2-1 Control
points redistribution settings
A geometric progression is used to assume minimum expansion ratio between the control points to minimize the risk of loops after sections interpolation. In 99% of the test cases, after selecting the Check button and discovering interpolation loop for one time, the default values provided by AutoGrid5 gives appropriated results.
5-36
AutoGrid5
Blade Geometry Export
Geometry Definition
This option can also be really useful in case of very accurate data entered for each section by the user. This can be a reason of the slowness of the intersection process. To improve, Control Points Redistribution option can be tried. This process is available for ".geomTurbo" native format only.
5-7.2.3 Blade Rotation

A blade section rotation is applied around the Z-axis using the angle specified in the Original Blade Data Rotation Angle input data field. This option is available for ".geomTurbo" native format only.
5-8
The Export Geometry is a very useful feature to export blade geometry definition in ".geomTurbo" format. The created file contains the blade defined by two surfaces (pressure and suction side). Each surface is defined by a set of cross sections (set of control points). This file can be also used as a pre-processor of the blade fitting process of AutoBlade in case of blades defined by external CAD data files. The user can access the Export Geometry option from the contextual menu, available by right clicking on Main Blade or Splitter in Rows Definition subpad of the Quick Access Pad. It opens the Export Blade Geometry dialog box.
FIGURE 5.8.0-1 Export
Blade Geometry dialog box
The dialog box consists of the following features,
Selection of Use Flow Path Definition check box allows to compute one blade section on each
flow path defined in the meridional view.
AutoGrid5
5-37
Geometry Definition
Selection of Export Original Data check box allows to export the original data available in the
".geomTurbo" file. This option is available only if the original blade geometry data exists in a "geomTurbo" format.
Set the Number Of Sections to define the number of blade sections to be computed in the
exported ".geomTurbo" file.
Set the Number Of Points Near Leading Edge to define the number of control points at the
leading edge. This option is not taken into account for blunt or sharp leading edge.
Set the Number Of Points On Blade Sides to define the number of control points on pressure
and suction sides of the blade.
Set the Number Of Points Near Trailing Edge to define the number of control points at the
trailing edge. This option is not taken into account for blunt or sharp trailing edge.
The clustering law between the leading edge area and the trailing edge area is defined by: The Number of Cst Cells. This number has to be less than the number of control points on
the blade sides defined in the Number Of Points On Blade Sides data input field.
The Clustering At Leading Edge, defined as the normalized length of the leading edge
area.
The Clustering At Trailing Edge, defined as the normalized length of the trailing edge
area.
Selection of Export End Wall Definition check box allows to save the end wall definitions,
such as, hub and shroud flow paths polyline definition. The Preview button is used to display in the 3D view the computed sections of the blade geometry to be exported. The Export button allows to export the computed sections in a ".geomTurbo" file. The file is saved in the parent directory where the project or template is saved. The name of the file is computed automatically using the name of the template, the name of the row, the name of the blade and the parameters use to define the sections. This assumes that a unique name is used for any kind of export process. If there is any blank space in the parent directory path, AutoGrid5 does not allow to export the ".geomTurbo" file and displays an error message.
5-38
AutoGrid5
CHAPTER 6:
Meridional Control
6-1

Overview
The meridional space allows first to control the geometry of a machine and the related parameters: Basic curves: these are general 2D meridional curves. Channel curves: hub, shroud, nozzle. They are based on basic curves, i.e. lying on them. Rotor/stator curves. They define the row domain in the streamwise direction. Meridional control lines. Optional control lines geometrically similar to rotor/stator. They can have a role in all meshes (meridional, blade to blade and 3D).
The meridional space allows also to control the flow paths used to create the 3D revolution surfaces for the final mesh.
6-2
6-2.1
Geometry Control
Basic Curves
Basic curves are 2D meridional curves which can be used to define channel curves (hub, shroud or nozzle) and meridional technological effects. They are defined as general NURBS curves and then discretized to be used as polylines.
a) Creation
Basic curves can be created through the ".geomTurbo" file (more details in Chapter 3) or through the import CAD facility (more details in Chapter 5).
AutoGrid5
6-1
Meridional Control
Geometry Control
b) Discretization
Basic curves can be discretized through the right-click popup menu. The following dialog box will appear:
Enter the number of discretization points desired between each basic curve control points. Several basic curves can be selected to change the discretization in one time. All channel curves using the modified basic curve will be updated and all rotor/stators and control lines recomputed if necessary.
c) Deletion
Basic curves can be deleted through the right-click popup menu when basic curve highlighted in meridional view.
d) Check Geometry
Basic curves can be checked through a Channel Geometry Check dialog box. This meridional geometry checking process helps to check the completeness of the geometry as well as the validity of the end walls, before starting the mesh generation. It is also useful as it could repair the curves wherever it is required.
6-2
AutoGrid5
Geometry Control
Meridional Control
6-2.2
Hub - Shroud - Nozzle
Once defined, all these channel curves can be controlled interactively to change their shape and/or orientation. The control is accessible from the Edit Hub - Edit Shroud - Edit Nozzle menus of the Quick Access Pad Geometry Definition subpad or directly by right-clicking on a basic curve.
The control is done through the editing of an edge and its vertices.
FIGURE 6.2.2-1 Shroud
editing
Vertices can be:
added. Use the <i> shortcut, deleted. Right-click on an intermediate vertex to popup the corresponding menu, moved. Left-click on a vertex to select it, move it and left-click again to fix it.
<i>
Left-click
Right-click
FIGURE 6.2.2-2
Vertices options
AutoGrid5
6-3
Meridional Control
Geometry Control
Once the edge is correctly positioned, right-click to quit the editing tool. All the channel is recomputed according to the modification as shown in the following figure:
FIGURE 6.2.2-3 Channel
regenerated
When hub/shroud/nozzle are not completely mapping the basic curves, there are represented by a green dashed line (see Figure 5.4.1-2).
6-2.3
Rotor/Stator
Rotor/stators define the limits of a row, either the interface between two rows or the inlet or outlet of a row. They are created automatically when initializing the configuration (defining the rows) and can be controlled once the geometry is defined. They are displayed in blue in the meridional view. A rotor/stator is defined by a set of control points which are allowed to move on a "support curve". There are two means to control a rotor/stator: directly through the control points or through the dedicated dialog box.
Left-click
Right-click
FIGURE 6.2.3-1 Rotor/stator
control points
6-4
AutoGrid5
Geometry Control
Meridional Control
To display the control points, simply left-click on a rotor/stator (Figure 6.2.3-1) and then left-click to move them. To open the dialog box (Figure 6.2.3-2), right-click on it and select Properties in the popup menu.
FIGURE 6.2.3-2 Rotor/stator
6-2.3.1 Properties
The dialog box is divided in two main parts, allowing to control the shape of the rotor/stator and other properties. The Reference frame allows to specify the frame on which the position of the rotor/stator depends. For consistency reasons, when switching to absolute frame, the rotor/stator shape is switched to curvilinear.
Absolute. The rotor/stator control points are relative to the channel (i.e. the hub and shroud). Relative. The rotor/stator control points are relative to the rotor/stator neighbouring rows (i.e.
the trailing edge of the previous row and the leading edge of the following row). The shape frame contains four buttons. Each modification in the shape frame updates automatically the rotor/stator and its control points in the graphical area.
Linear. Impose a linear shape. Additionally the rotor/stator can be located at a R or Z constant
position by activating the corresponding button and entering the desired value.
Curvilinear. Just for information, does not change the current shape, it indicates that a control
point was moved manually.
Defined Shape. This button is activated if the rotor/stator was defined by an external curve. An
external curve can be imposed by selecting a simple ".dat" file through the button Select Geometry File. When imposed by a file, the location of the rotor/stator will be defined in a totally absolute position. It also means that if the hub or shroud changes, it should still intersect the user defined rotor/stator.
Default. Optimized shape computed, i.e. a straight line between hub and shroud when the rotor/
stator is the machine inlet or outlet, otherwise a curve located at midway between two rows. The second part of the dialog box specifies several properties; only the first one Cell width is useful for a rotor/stator, it imposes the cell size in the blade to blade mesh at the rotor/stator location. A default optimized value is always computed, symbolised by "0.0" in the dialog box.
AutoGrid5
6-5
Meridional Control
Geometry Control
6-2.3.2 Control Points Editing

Each control point of a rotor/stator can be moved on a "support curve" automatically created, which shape is fixed and cannot be changed (this "support curve" is not displayed). The number of control points is fixed and cannot be changed neither. To move a control point:
1. 2.
Move the mouse to the desired control point. It will be highlighted when close enough. Then leftclick. Subsequent mouse movement will move the control point. The rotor/stator is automatically updated. The control point can be moved from the upstream row trailing edge to the downstream row leading edge. If there is no upstream or no downstream row, the limit is a straight line going from the hub extremity to the shroud extremity. Left-click again to fix the control point position.
3.
A specific (R,Z) position can also be imposed for a control point:

1. 2.
Move the mouse to the desired control point. It will be highlighted when close enough. Then rightclick. The following dialog box will be opened. Enter the desired (R,Z) values. The control point and the rotor/stator will be updated.
FIGURE 6.2.3-3 Control 3. 4.
point (R,Z) control
Once the dialog box is opened, another control point can be selected to change its (R,Z) coordinates. Simply left-click on it, its current coordinates will be updated in the dialog box. Close the dialog box.
6-2.4
Meridional Control Lines
Control lines can be added in meridional space to control the meridional mesh (spanwise flow paths distribution), to change the topology of the 3D mesh (additional H block created upstream or downstream the control line) or to impose a z constant line in the meridional space (i.e. to capture corner). They are displayed in blue in meridional view. Corner to capture
Right-click
control line example
6-6
AutoGrid5
Geometry Control
Meridional Control
Using this feature, the seal leakage defined at the trailing edge of a blunt centrifugal impeller can now be connected using matching connection (see Chapter 9).
6-2.4.1 Creation
A tool is dedicated to the creation of meridional control lines ( or ).
Once activated, move the mouse on a channel curve (hub, shroud or nozzle) in the meridional view. When close enough, a point is displayed on the channel curve. Left-click to create a meridional control line at this position. This operation can be repeated until the tool is quit by right-clicking.
6-2.4.2 Deletion
Right-click on a meridional control line to popup the Delete menu item.
6-2.4.3 Edition
Meridional control lines are very similar to rotor/stators. They are also defined by a set of control points which are allowed to move on a "support curve". Therefore they can be edited in the same manner as for rotor/stators: directly through the control points by left-clicking on it or through the dedicated dialog box (Figure 6.2.4-2) by right-clicking on it and select Properties in the popup menu.
6-2.4.4 Properties
The properties of a meridional control line can be controlled through the dedicated dialog box, the same as for rotor/stators:
lines properties dialog box
AutoGrid5
6-7
Meridional Control
Geometry Control
The dialog box is divided in two main parts. For Reference frame, when it is set to Relative, the
control points are relative to a row and their reference depends on the position of the control line. Either the control points are relative to the row inlet and its blade leading edge, either to the leading and trailing edge, or to the blade trailing edge and the row outlet. When it is set to Absolute, the control points are relative to the channel (i.e. the hub and shroud). The second part of the dialog box allows to control the properties of the meridional control line:
Cell width imposes the cell size in the blade to blade mesh at the control line location. A default
optimized value is always computed, symbolised by a zero in the dialog box.
Streamwise Index is used when the control line is located on a blade and specifies the index of
the mesh line corresponding to the control line location in the blade to blade view.
Streamwise Npts is used when the control line is not located on a blade and specifies the number
of streamwise points in the H block upstream or downstream the control line in the blade to blade view if, respectively, the control line is upstream or downstream from the blade.
B2B control specifies if the meridional control line should also be a blade to blade control line.
Cell width imposed around control line
H block downstream
Streamwise Npts H block upstream Control lines Streamwise Npts

lines upstream and downstream from the blade
Streamwise Index
Control line on blade, shape z constant
line located on blade
6-8
AutoGrid5
Geometry Control
Meridional Control
Fixed Geometry specifies if the blade to blade control line should be a z constant line or can be
relaxed and have the shape obtained by the optimizer (blade to blade control line is considered as a z cst line instead of a normal connection).
Geometry not fixed, shape optimized, not z constant
H block downstream
H block upstream
Fixed geometry, shape z constant
line blade to blade geometry
6-2.4.5 Specific Cases: Bypass, Fin & Bulb

Meridional control lines are created automatically in three specific cases to capture discontinuity generated by a bypass engine, a fin and/or bulbs. In these three cases, the specific meridional control lines cannot be deleted and some control points cannot be moved. A bulb is a specific region of a machine where the hub has a zero radius. A machine can have a bulb at its inlet and/or its outlet. Bulbs are automatically detected, the condition being that the hub has a zero radius at one point (not a line). The domain is automatically extended from this point at zero radius to the shroud axial position extremity. One or two meridional control lines are automatically created, the first one representing the machine inlet (outlet), the second one to capture either the zero radius point for sharp topology (H-topology) or the limit between the radial and the axial domain for radial topology. The hub extension allows to move the meridional control lines before the bulb. The rotor/stator (inlet) of the row following the bulb is positioned after the control line capturing the zero radius point or the limit between the radial and axial domain, and should not be moved before it (the opposite if the bulb is at the outlet of the machine). The zone between the entry control line and the rotor/stator is the bulb region and its meshing is controlled through a specific dialog box dedicated to the bulb.
Control lines automatically created. Cannot be deleted
Control points on nozzle cannot be moved
FIGURE 6.2.4-6 Bypass
case
AutoGrid5
6-9
Meridional Control
Geometry Control
Control line automatically created
Row rotor/stator (bulb outlet)
Rounded Topology
Machine inlet
Hub automatically extended Control lines automatically created Row rotor/stator (bulb outlet) Sharp Topology
Machine inlet This control line cannot be deleted The control point at zero radius cannot be moved. Hub automatically extended Radial Topology
Row rotor/stator (bulb outlet)
Control lines automatically created
Machine inlet Hub automatically extended

FIGURE 6.2.4-7 Bulb
case
If a control line is added between the fan and the nozzle, the user can unfix the geometry. Nevertheless undefined or non-matching instead of matching connections can be detected at the connection between the downstream blocks. In case of problems (non-matching or undefined patches) the additional control line must be fixed again. Furthermore, in case of a geometry defined in "millimeter", the tolerance used to define the connection in the Patch Selector dialog box (Grid/Boundary Conditions menu) can be increased to obtain matching connections. In bypass configuration, it is mandatory to have an inlet fan upstream of the nozzle.
6-10
AutoGrid5
Geometry Control
Meridional Control
Control points on fin cannot be moved
Control lines automatically created. Cannot be deleted

FIGURE 6.2.4-8 Fin
case
When a fin is defined, the two control lines defining the leading and the trailing edge of the fin, must be defined with a unique cell width.
6-2.5
Channel Control
AutoGrid5 automatically creates support channel curves to define the location of the control lines including inlet, outlet and rotor-stator. The number of points of the support curves is automatically computed by AutoGrid5. If necessary, when the default control lines are not well defined on hub and shroud, the number of points can be adapted by the user.
6-2.6
Meridional Curve Checks
During loading or importing of ".trb" or ".geomTurbo" files, AutoGrid5 automatically checks the hub, shroud or nozzle curves. It also checks the curves, which are imported from the Import CAD window. If it detects any discontinuity in the curve of more than 80, a warning message appears. A Channel Geometry Check dialog box is also accessible from the Check Meridional Curves button in the Geometry Definition subpad of the Quick Access Pad or directly by right-clicking on the curves and selecting the Check Geometry menu. This meridional geometry checking process helps to check the completeness of the geometry as well as the validity of the end walls, before starting the mesh generation. It is also useful as it could repair the curves wherever it is required.
AutoGrid5
6-11
Meridional Control
Mesh Control
FIGURE 6.2.6-1 Channel
geometry check
Selection of the Check All Meridional Curves check box allows to check all the meridional curves at once, otherwise the selected meridional curve can be checked one by one. The Check button application computes the Minimal Distance and the Maximum Angular Deviation between two curve control points either for all the curves or for the selected curve. While computing for all the meridional curves, the name of the curve also appears on which the minimum distance and maximum angular deviation exist as shown in Figure 6.2.6-1. Also the potential failures due to coincident points and/or discontinuity on channel curves using the Data Reduction option can be treated. This option removes the coincident points or discontinuity based on the Control Points Distance Criteria and Control Points Angle Criteria provided by the user. The data reduction process is reversible, as the original curve retrieves once the Data Reduction check box is deselected. Meridional curve checking process cannot detect the discontinuity between two curves defined in the meridional plane.
6-3
Mesh Control
After defining the setup of the project (section 3-4.2), AutoGrid5 will define for each selected row the number and the distribution of the flow paths automatically when using the button (Re)set Default Topology of the top menu bar. Afterwards, the flow paths are mainly controlled row by row and some interactions are available between rows.
6-12
AutoGrid5
Mesh Control
Meridional Control
The number of flow paths for a row is controlled separately through the Quick Access Pad in the Mesh Control subpad. Other row parameters for flow paths control are controlled through the dialog box by left-clicking on Flow Path Control in Mesh Control subpad.
6-3.1
Flow Paths Control
The dialog box is divided in two main parts, a first part controlling flow paths spanwise distribution and a second expert part allowing to tune some parameters, useful in some specific cases. All parameters are applied for the selected rows.
Cell width at Hub controls the cell size imposed at the hub. Cell width at Shroud controls the cell size imposed at the shroud. Percentage of Mid-flow Cells controls the number of cells of constant size in the main part of
the channel (excluding gaps).
View Flow Path allows to visualize the grid used to generate the flow paths. Deactivate the button to display the grid.
Flow Paths Control Points Number controls the streamwise number of points of the grid used
to generate the flow paths. Can be increased if the machine is very long. This number of points will also be the number of control points of the flow paths.
Number Of Intermediate Points controls the number of discretization points between each
control point of the flow paths.
Smoothing Steps controls the number of iterations for flow paths smoothing. Hub & Shroud Distribution Smoothing controls the number of iterations for points distribution smoothing.
Hub Control Points Distribution controls the distribution of flow path control points on the
hub. The distribution can be uniform or concentrated around curvature.
AutoGrid5
6-13
Meridional Control
Mesh Control
Shroud Control Points Distribution controls the distribution of flow path control points on the
shroud. It can be the same distribution as on the hub, a distribution obtained from an orthogonal projection of the hub points on the shroud, or a distribution obtained from the minimal distance with hub points (hub closest points on the shroud).
FIGURE 6.3.1-1 Flow
paths dialog box
The dialog box contains four buttons at the bottom:
Generate allows to generate the flow paths of the selected rows. Clear Manual Operations cleans all manual operations performed through the manual edit
mode for the selected rows (does not include copy/merge distributions).
Manual Edit starts the flow paths manual editing tool. It is activated for all the rows. Refer to
next section for more details.
Close closes the dialog box.
6-3.2
Flow Paths Manual Editing
Manual editing allows to control directly the block faces which are used to construct flow paths. Edges can be moved, segments can be created or modified and grid points distribution on segments can be controlled. As block faces need to be created for editing, flow paths of the row to be controlled should be generated before activating the tool. The manual editing tool is started by pressing the button Manual Edit of the Row:Flow Paths Control dialog box (Figure 6.3.1-1). It is stopped by right-clicking in the meridional view or by closing the dialog box. Once activated, all edges, vertices and fixed points of the rows for which flow paths are generated appear. Following operations are available:
face selection. Left-click on face edges to select the face, vertex displacement on rotor/stators and meridional control lines. Left-click on a vertex to select
it, move it, left-click again to fix its new position.
6-14
AutoGrid5
Mesh Control
Meridional Control
Vertex displacement
FIGURE 6.3.2-1 Vertex
displacement on vertical edge
fixed point insertion. Right-click on a vertical edge to popup the Divide edge menu item. It will launch the
fixed point insertion tool.
fixed point deletion. Right-click on a fixed point to popup the Delete menu item. fixed point displacement on vertical edges. Left-click on a fixed point to select it, move it, left-click again
to fix its new position.
Fixed point insertion
FIGURE 6.3.2-2 Fixed
point insertion on vertical edge
fixed point index change. Right-click on a fixed point to popup the Change index menu item. control of the segment distribution on vertical edges. Right-click on an vertical edge to popup the Distribution menu item. It will open the Clustering dialog box.
Right-click
Right-click
FIGURE 6.3.2-3 Manual
editing activated
AutoGrid5
6-15
Meridional Control
Mesh Control
After each operation, faces mesh are regenerated basically (i.e. without smoothing) to display directly the changes on flow paths shape. To regenerate completely the faces (including smoothing), regenerate the flow paths of the row. Some vertices and fixed points cannot be moved, they are displayed in blue to indicate it. All manual edit operations can be deleted for a row by pressing the button Clear Manual Operations in the Row:Flow Paths Control dialog box (Figure 6.3.1-1). Then flow paths generation becomes the default one again.
6-3.3
Hub/Shroud Gaps Control
Gaps are controlled through their dedicated dialog box. It allows to control the geometry and the meshing parameters of the gap.
FIGURE 6.3.3-1 Gap
dialog box
Topology. It allows to control the topology in the gap. By default HO topology is selected corresponding to a butterfly topology in the gap. When meshing an inducer presenting a sharp leading and trailing edge, the H (Sng. Line) will be selected.
Defined Shape. This button is activated if the gap curve was defined by an external curve. An external curve can be imposed by selecting a simple ".dat" file through the button Select Geometry File.
Width At Leading Edge - Width At Trailing Edge. It allows to specify the size of the gap at the
leading and trailing edge of the blade. The gap curve is then constructed as a linear offset of the hub (or the shroud) according to these values. If the gap curve is externally defined, these values are purely for information and cannot be changed.
Cell width controls the cell size imposed at the blade extremity (at the hub or shroud according to the
gap type).
Percentage of Mid-flow Cells controls the number of cells of constant size in the gap region of the
channel.
Number of Points controls the number of points in the gap in the spanwise direction.
The buttons Show/Hide allow to preview the user defined curve used for the gap before generating the flow paths. The button Generate Flow Paths is used to regenerate the flow paths in the gap row respecting the modifications done in the dialog box.
6-3.4
Blade Fillet
The blade geometry can be connected to the hub or shroud surface of revolution by means of a fillet. See section 5-5.2 for more details about the fillet construction and the flow paths control.
6-16
AutoGrid5
Mesh Control
Meridional Control
6-3.5
Bulb Control
For the mesh control of the bulb, more details are presented in section 6-2.4.5. Two specific dialog boxes are dedicated to bulbs, one for the inlet, the other one for the outlet, both dialog boxes being totally similar ( and ). Three topologies are available for bulbs: sharp, rounded or radial.
Sharp Topology
Rounded Topology
Radial Topology
With the sharp topology, the mesh in the bulb area is divided into two blocks limited by the inlet of the
row and the bulb domain limit and separated by the stagnation line. This topology leads to a mesh presenting a singular line in front of the stagnation point.
With the rounded topology, the bulb area can be meshed with a singular line (triangular cells) or a butterfly topology. The mesh is then divided into respectively 3 or 5 blocks limited by the inlet of the row and the bulb domain limit. The Butterfly Smoothing Steps controls the number of iterations to smooth the butterfly bulb area. The Smoothing Steps controls the number of iterations for flow paths smoothing in the bulb.
Butterfly Topology
Singular Line
AutoGrid5
6-17
Meridional Control
Mesh Control
With the radial topology, the mesh in the bulb area is divided into two butterfly topology (blocks
B1&B2 and B3&B4): a butterfly topology for the radial area of the bulb domain and one for the streamwise area of the domain. The Butterfly Smoothing Steps controls the number of iterations to smooth the butterfly bulb area.
The various number of points can be changed by left-clicking on their representation in the dialog box. An entry box like the following one will popup, press <Enter> to validate the new number of points or <Esc> to close the box and leave the number of points unchanged.
The button Preview Flow Paths is used to regenerate the flow paths in the bulb respecting the modifications done in the dialog box. If meridional control lines are added in the bulb, the number of points is controlled in addition through the dialog box Row Interface Properties (Figure 6.2.4-2). The Streamwise Npts is controlling, if the meridional control line is respectively at inlet or outlet, the streamwise number of points down or up to the meridional control line.
6-3.6
Bypass Control
For the geometry control of the by-pass, more details are presented in section 6-2.4.5. Two topologies are available for by-pass: H or C mesh around the nozzle. A specific dialog box is dedicated to by-pass ( ):
Topology Type allows to choose the H or C topology. Nozzle Cell Width controls the cell size imposed at the nozzle. Nozzle Index controls the index of the flow path corresponding to the stagnation point of the
nozzle, i.e. it controls the proportion of the flow paths below and above the nozzle.
6-18
AutoGrid5
Mesh Control
Meridional Control
Topology Type
Radial Nr of points in C Mesh
Meridional Control Lines Spacing Nozzle Index C Mesh Thickness
dialog box
For the C topology, a various number of points can be changed by left-clicking on their representation in the dialog box. An entry box like the following one will popup, press <Enter> to validate the new number of points or <Esc> to close the box and leave the number of points unchanged.
Besides the number of points, two additional controls are available: the C mesh thickness and the spacing between meridional control lines on the nozzle, both are expressed as a percentage. For the C mesh thickness, it is a percentage of the spanwise size below the nozzle, for the spacing between control lines, it is a percentage of the nozzle thickness (nozzle thickness is a dimension automatically computed according to the geometry). The dialog box also displays information about the total number of flow paths in the by-pass: number of flow paths before the nozzle, downstream and upstream from the nozzle. It allows an easier generation of a matching mesh (matching flow paths) with downstream rows. The button Preview Flow Paths is used to regenerate the flow paths around the nozzle to display the modifications done in the dialog box.
FIGURE 6.3.6-2 C-mesh
(left) & H-mesh (right) topology around nozzle
AutoGrid5
6-19
Meridional Control
Mesh Control
6-3.7
Fin Control
Only fin on fan in a by-pass configuration is allowed.
For the geometry control of the fin, more details are presented in section 6-2.4.5.
The dialog box dedicated to by-pass is used to control the fin (
):
Fin Index controls the index of the flow path corresponding to the stagnation point of the fin,
i.e. it controls the proportion of the flow paths below and above the fin.
Fin Cell Width controls the cell size imposed at the fin.
- Fin dialog box
6-3.8
Copy - Merge Distributions
Besides the flow paths generation row by row, the copy-merge options allow to obtain matching flow paths in the spanwise direction at row interfaces. Copy/Paste are used to copy a distribution from a rotor/stator to another one or to a meridional control line. Merge is used to compute a common distribution from the left and right distributions at a rotor/stator. This option is only available for a rotor/stator interface with both hub and shroud gap: e.g. where the left row has a hub gap and the right row a shroud gap (or the opposite). Clear is used to clean copy/merge operations on selected control line. Copy/Merge/Clear are accessible through the right-click popup menu on a rotor/stator or meridional control line:
6-20
AutoGrid5
Mesh Control
Meridional Control
To copy a distribution, move the cursor on the desired rotor/stator from which the user wants to
copy, right-click and press Copy Left Distribution or Copy Right Distribution according to the side the user wants to copy. Then move the cursor on the desired rotor/stator where the user wants to change the distribution, right-click and press Paste Left Distribution or Paste Right Distribution according to the side the user wants to modify. To modify the distribution on a meridional control line, just press Paste Distribution.
To merge a distribution, move the cursor on the desired rotor/stator the user wants to merge,
right-click and press Merge Distributions.
To delete all copy/merge operations done on a rotor/stator or meridional control line, right-click
and press Clear Distribution(s).
6-3.8.1 Conditions of Use

Flow paths need to be generated before copying or merging. The distributions to be copied or merged should have the same number of points. For the by-pass case with C-mesh topology for the nozzle, the distributions of the fan outlets
cannot be copied neither merged, as illustrated on the picture below.
Fan rotor/stator merge or copy on the left side forbidden if C mesh topology at nozzle
FAN
FIGURE 6.3.8-1 Forbidden
copy-merge operations
6-3.8.2 Representation
Copy-merge operations are symbolized in the meridional view by a text marker on the middle of the rotor/stators or meridional control lines:
C -> L means that the distribution on the left side of the rotor/stator was copied. C -> R means that the distribution on the right side of the rotor/stator was copied. <- C -> means that the distribution on both sides of the rotor/stator was copied. M means that distributions on the rotor/stator were merged. C means that the distribution on the meridional control line was copied.
AutoGrid5
6-21
Meridional Control
Mesh Control
Right distribution copied
Distributions merged
Left distribution copied
C->R
C->L
FIGURE 6.3.8-2 Copy-merge
meridional representations
6-3.9
Mesh Quality Checks
When the meridional view is active (red border), the menu Grid/Grid Quality allows to control the quality of the flow paths (more details in section 2-3.4.3).
6-22
AutoGrid5
CHAPTER 7:
7-1
Overview
The 3D mesh created by AutoGrid5 is obtained by stacking blade to blade meshes on the surfaces of revolution (layers) created by rotation of the flow paths defined in the meridional view of the turbomachinery. The blade to blade meshes are created in the (dm/r,theta) space: the cross-sections of the blades with the active layers are projected in the blade to blade space and the mesh is created around the blade sections according to the pitch angle and the inlet and outlet boundaries of the row (more details in Chapter 3).
to blade mesh
The blade to blade meshes are created using a two dimensional multiblock structured topology. Each block have four edges along which grid points are distributed. The grids inside the blocks are created by transfinite interpolation and finally optimized using an elliptic multiblock smoother.
AutoGrid5
7-1
Overview
FIGURE 7.1.0-2 five
blocks topology and grid point clustering
AutoGrid5 provides two different modes to create the topology of the blade to blade meshes:
to use predefined topologies for which grid points clustering is chosen automatically according
to some geometrical criteria and grid level. The predefined topologies have been developed to obtain high quality grid without any user interaction. They are divided in two main types: HHOHH (O4H), HOH and H&I. The O4H type ensures full automatic meshing for all kind of turbomachinery while the HOH and H&I types give very high quality grids but is not suitable for all the applications. Afterwards, the user can interact to change the resulting topology.
to create manually the topology as well as the grid points clustering (user defined topology).
In both modes, the template approach of AutoGrid5 ensures reusability of the automatic or manual settings on similar geometries. This chapter describes first how to set up a predefined topology and how the user can interact to change the optimized blade to blade topology defined by AutoGrid5 (from section 7-3 to 7-5). The user defined topology mode is presented in section 7-6. Finally, the optimization controls are described in section 7-7.
7-2
AutoGrid5
Blade to Blade Topology Management
7-2
7-2.1

Overview
The selection of the predefined blade to blade topology is controlled through the dialog box available through the menu Mesh Control/Row Mesh Control/B2B Mesh Topology Control in the Quick Access Pad.
Available topologies B2B topology library Library management Topology control Grid points control Boundary layer & Initial mesh control Intersection control
Rotor 37 Aachen Turbine LSCC Default Default Default
FIGURE 6.2.1-1
Define B2B Topology
All the changes performed in this dialog box apply to the active blade(s).
7-2.2
Topology Selection
On the top of the Define B2B Topology for Active Blade dialog box, the topology of the selected blade can be selected between the three predefined types available in AutoGrid5 (O4H, HOH and H&I) or in the blade to blade topology library. When defining the blade topology from scratch using a predefined topology (O4H, HOH and H&I), after imposing the setup of the project (section 3-4.2), AutoGrid5 will create an optimized topology according to some geometrical criterion and the grid level when using the button (Re)set Default Topology of the top menu bar.
AutoGrid5
7-3
Afterwards, the option Streamwise Weights in the menu Mesh Control/Grid Level allows to increase the number of grid points in the streamwise direction respectively at the inlet, on the blade and the outlet of the optimized topology. The feature consists in multiplying the number of grid points at inlet, on the blade and at outlet by the streamwise weights when using the button (Re)set Default Topology. This option is only available for O4H and H&I topology.
inlet
blade
outlet
Finally, the user can interact to adapt the optimized blade to blade topology defined by AutoGrid5 by changing the parameters in the Define B2B Topology for Active Blade dialog box (from section 7-3 to 7-5) and in the Optimization Properties dialog box (section 7-7).
In addition, the topology library on the top of the Define B2B Topology for Active Blade dialog box (Figure 6.2.1-1) can be used or an existing topology can be copied (section 7-2.3). This library contains all the previous saved topologies. The library is managed using the following features:
Select a topology: to load a predefined topology, select it in the list and press the button Load. A
warning prompts the user to regenerate and display the mesh in the blade to blade view.
Save a topology: To save the topology of the current active blade, press the button Save. The dialog box Save B2B Topology is opened.
7-4
AutoGrid5
In this dialog box, the user can overwrite a topology selected in the list or create a new item in the library by switching on the button New B2B topology name. In this case, a new topology name must be entered in the related area and the topology will appear in the topology library and will be saved in "~/.numeca/tmp/" (in the folder "/_NITurboB2BTopologyLibrary/" and in the file "NIbladeToBladeTemplateLibraryFiles").
Remove a topology from the list (Remove button) Preview the selected topology (Preview button): this feature opens a new window inside which
a picture of the selected topology is displayed. Furthermore, in the popup menu of the row, a row topology library is available through the Topology Library menu.
FIGURE 7.2.2-1 Save
a B2B topology
In this dialog box, the topology of the selected row can be selected from the blade to blade row topology library. This library contains all the previous saved row topologies. The library is managed using the following features:
Select a topology: to load a predefined topology, select it in the list and press the button Load. A
warning prompts the user to regenerate and display the mesh in the blade to blade view.
Save a topology: To save the topology of the current active row, press the button Save. The dialog box Save Row Topology is opened. In this dialog box, the user can overwrite a topology selected in the list or create a new item in the library by switching on the button New Row topology name. In this case, a new topology name must be entered in the related area and the topology will appear in the topology library and will be saved in "~/.numeca/tmp/" (in the folder "/ _NITurboRowLibrary/" and in the file "NRowTemplateLibraryFiles").
Remove a topology from the list (Remove button) Preview the selected topology (Preview button): this feature opens a new window inside which
a picture of the selected topology is displayed. The blade to blade library is used to apply the topology from one row to another. To copy the blade to blade topology from one blade to another, the Copy/Paste Topology option of the blade menu should be used (see section 7-2.3).
AutoGrid5
7-5
The predefined topology applied from scratch or selected in the library or copied on the blades of the active row(s) is (re)initialized using the button (Re)set Default Topology. An optimized blade to blade topology is chosen and the grid points distributions are (re)computed based on the setup of the project (section 3-4.2), the grid level and the geometrical criterion.
7-2.3
Copy/Paste Topology
The blade to blade topology applied around a blade row or a row can be copied into the active buffer and applied to other blade row or row using the copy/paste feature available through the contextual menu of the blade and the row.
row
blade
& row contextual menu
Using this feature, In multistage configuration, the blade to blade topology can be set up for one blade or row and applied to all the other similar blades or rows. To copy the blade to blade topology from one blade to another, use the Copy/Paste Topology option of the blade menu. The predefined topology applied from scratch or selected in the library or copied on the blades of the active row(s) is (re)initialized using the button (Re)set Default Topology. An optimized blade to blade topology is chosen and the grid points distributions are (re)computed based on the setup of the project (section 3-4.2), the grid level and the geometrical criterion.
7-6
AutoGrid5
Default Topology (O4H Topology)
7-3
The default topology is selected through the top left selection button of the dialog box Define B2B Topology For Active Blade.
Rotor 37 Aachen Turbine LSCC
Default Default Default
topology selection
7-3.1
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Default Topology Control
As mentioned previously in this chapter, the default topology is composed by 5 blocks: a O block around the blade named skin block a H block upstream the leading edge of the blade named inlet block a H block downstream the trailing edge named outlet block a H block up to the blade section named up block a H block down to the blade section name down block
(4)
(2)
(1)
(3)
(5)
FIGURE 7.3.1-1 Defaults
blocks & grid points
7-3.1.1 Control Number of Grid Points

The grid points number depends of the grid level and the streamwise weights chosen in the quick access pad page Mesh Control/Grid Level before performing the initialization ((Re)set Default Topology).
AutoGrid5
7-7
These optimized grid points numbers can be changed in the Grid Points page of the dialog box Define B2B Topology For Active Blade (Figure 7.3.1-1). To change a number, left-click on it, enter the new number of points in the locally displayed input area and <Enter> to confirm or <Esc> to cancel the action.
Up block
Outlet block
Skin block Inlet block
Down block
FIGURE 7.3.1-2 Grid
points distribution
To display the new blade to blade mesh, press the button of the top menu bar Generate B2B.
Non matching connection
mesh
7-8
AutoGrid5
7-3.1.2 Control Periodic Boundary Condition Type

As shown in Figure 7.3.1-3, the periodic boundary of the default mesh is non-matching. To obtain a matching periodic boundary condition, switch on the check button Matching Periodicity in the Topology page of the dialog box Define B2B Topology For Active Blade and press the button (Re)set Default Topology or Generate B2B.
Matching connection
the periodic connection
7-3.1.3 Control Skin Mesh Clustering around the Blade

The O-block around the blade is used to optimize the control of the boundary layer on the blade. It is created using an hyperbolic mesh.
Hyperbolic mesh
FIGURE 7.3.1-5 Hyperbolic
mesh around the blade
AutoGrid5
7-9
a) Grid Point Number Control

The number of grid points along the solid wall is controlled within the page Grid Points of the dialog box Define B2B Topology For Active Blade. The grid points clustering along the solid wall is split in four pieces controlling the leading edge, the trailing edge, the upper side and the lower side of the blade.
Upper Side Control Leading Edge Control Trailing Edge Control Lower Side Control
FIGURE 7.3.1-6 Grid
points number control
b) Leading Edge & Trailing Edge Clustering Control

The clustering near the leading edge and/or the trailing edge can be fully controlled through the dialog box Blade Clustering Control. When moving the mouse near the leading edge or the trailing edge, the piece of clustering controlled is automatically highlighted. The length of the piece is named "control distance". The inlet/outlet grid points are uniformly distributed along this distance.
Control distance
Right-click
FIGURE 7.3.1-7 Leading
edge control distance
7-10
AutoGrid5
Right-clicking when a control distance is highlighted opens a contextual menu. The menu Properties opens the dialog box Blade Clustering Control.
Control distance
Expansion ratio control
clustering control
The control distance along which the grid points are distributed can be modified by selecting the mode of specification and the distance value:
1. 2. 3.
Absolute Control Distance: the distance is given in absolute units and remain the same for each layer. Relative Control Distance: the distance is given in relative units (normalized with the blade width).
First Cell Length: the distance is equal to the product of the cell width given by the user and the number of nodes. The control distance is combined with a percentage of cells along the blade that will present a constant size (Percentage Cst Cells).
Another feature of this dialog box gives the control of the maximum expansion ratio of the cells in the streamwise direction along the wall. Switch on the button Desired Expansion Ratio implies that the number of grid points on the upper and lower side of the blade will be recomputed to ensure that the expansion ratio remain lower than the target value. The total number of points around the blade is then continuously updated.
c) Move Leading Edge & Trailing Edge Location

When moving the mouse near the leading or trailing edge, the control distance is highlighted indicating that it is ready for selection. Left-click (without release) and drag it on the desired location then release. The mesh of the skin block is continuously updated during the moving process.
FIGURE 7.3.1-9 Move
stagnation point location
AutoGrid5
7-11
d) Control Boundary Layer in the Skin Mesh.

The skin block is created using a hyperbolic mesh. The width of the boundary layer is controlled by the cell width at the wall, the expansion ratio and the number of points in it. These parameters can be modified in the page Mesh and Grid Points of the dialog box Define B2B Topology.
Boundary layer controls
Number of points in Boundary layer
FIGURE 7.3.1-10 Boundary
layer control
When AutoGrid5 detects that the boundary layer width is too big for the geometry configuration, it prompts the user to confirm the automatic reevaluation of the expansion ratio to a correct value. When the blade section has a curved shape, crossing grid lines in the hyperbolic mesh can be detected by AutoGrid5 and it automatically prompts the user to change the expansion ratio manually to avoid crossing section.
When activating the option Cell Width at Wall Interpolation, AutoGrid5 allows to impose a cell width different at the hub & shroud of the machine, especially when the speed of the flow becomes very different at the hub and at the shroud of the machine.
The user inputs the cell width at the hub and the shroud and the boundary layer width. For each layer, AutoGrid5 computes the local cell width (Celllocal) and the local expansion ratio (ER local) using a linear interpolation between the hub and the shroud. The variable used to compute the interpolation is the relative spanwise location (from 0 to 1) of the layer at the leading edge.
7-12
AutoGrid5
Celllocal = 10x(log10(cell hub)+(log10(cell shroud)-log10(cell hub))*spanwiseLocation) Bnd. Layer Width = (1+ERlocal+ERlocal2++ERlocaln-2 )xCelllocal with n equal to the number of cells in the boundary layer. When the option is active, the Expansion ratio and the Cell Width at Wall field are not available for modification. Each time the button Generated B2B is pressed, these fields show the local cell width and the local expansion ratio used to compute the blade-to-blade mesh on the active layer.
7-3.1.4 Control Hub/Shroud Gap Mesh

When gap(s) has been defined, AutoGrid5 adds automatically two new blocks to mesh the domain up or down to the blade(s). The mesh inside a gap has a butterfly topology: a H block surrounded by a O block are used to discretize this area. By default, the gap meshes matches the skin mesh around the blade. Therefore, the only control gives to the user is the number of points inside the O-block that can be modified in the page Grid Points of the dialog box Define B2B Topology for Active Blade. If the number of points on the upper side and on the lower side of the blade is changed and if a gap has to be defined, the change is cancelled automatically by AutoGrid5 when pressing the button Generate B2B to ensure a matching connection between the gap meshes and the skin mesh around the blade. When imposing sharp (section 7-3.1.5) at the blunt blade leading/trailing edge (i.e. inducer), a H topology will be automatically used. The H topology is not available if the number of points is not equal on the pressure and the suction side of the blade.
H block
O block
O Mesh Control
FIGURE 7.3.1-11 Butterfly
mesh in gap
AutoGrid5
7-13
7-3.1.5 Blend/Sharp/Rounded Treatment at Leading/Trailing Edge

In case of blunt blades, AutoGrid5 automatically detects the bluntness of the blade and the option to blend, sharp or rounded the blunt blade leading/trailing edge appear in the Topology page of the Define B2B Topology for Active Blade dialog box.
FIGURE 7.3.1-12 Blend/sharp/rounded
treatment option at leading/trailing edge
The selection of the options Sharp Treatment At Leading Edge and Sharp Treatment At Trailing Edge automatically closes the blunt edges by a linear edges as shown in Figure 6.3.2-14 This new topology replace the O block around the blade by two H blocks and is recommended for inducer configuration.
FIGURE 7.3.1-13 Effect
of sharp leading/trailing edge treatment
The selection of the options Blend the Blade At Leading Edge and Blend the Blade At Trailing Edge automatically closes the blunt edges by a circular shape edges as shown in Figure 7.3.1-14.
7-14
AutoGrid5
of blend treatment at leading/trailing edge
The selection of the options Rounded Treatment At Leading Edge and Rounded Treatment At Trailing Edge automatically closes the blunt edges by a straight line to obtain a O-mesh around the blade.
of rounded treatment at leading/trailing edge
7-3.1.6 Grid Points in Throat

When the blade is presenting a blunt at the leading and trailing edge, AutoGrid5 allows an automatic control of the number of grids points in the throat by setting the Number of Points In Throat to 1. This parameter can be modified in the page Grid Points of the dialog box Define B2B Topology for Active Blade and is controlling part of the number of points along the blade as presented on next figure.
AutoGrid5
7-15
ro Th at
FIGURE 7.3.1-16 Number
of points in throat
For example, when dealing with inducer configuration, in the Define B2B Topology for Active Blade dialog box:
The Matching Periodicity and the High Staggered modes with High-Low or Low-High Inlet/
Outlet Type are imposed in the Topology page,
The Number of Points in Throat is set to 1 to optimize the blade to blade mesh by an automatic
control of the blade points distribution in the throat. Throat control is not applicable for multi-splitter configuration. Backward is ensured with the previous releases in which the grid points were imposed manually in the throat. When Number of Points In Throat is set to 1, the leading and trailing edge clustering is projected on the opposite side of the blade using an algorithm using the blade staggered angle. When the staggered angle is significantly different at inlet and outlet, the option Accurate throat projection can be activated to improve the projection location. The parameters Inlet/Outlet Projection Relaxation can be used to relax the clustering at the projection location especially when the blade is blunt. It allows to control manually the projection points clustering of the blade by multiplying the default clustering with the value specified in the entry. Relaxation set to 1 Relaxation set to 13
7-16
AutoGrid5
7-3.1.7 Wake Control

The direction of the mesh downstream the trailing edge can be controlled to capture the wake. By default the wake control is switch off. When the Wake Control check box is selected, the Wake Relative Angle can be imposed in the page Mesh of the dialog box Define B2B Topology for Active Blade. The edges of the outlet block are created using straight lines. The angle between these straight lines and the dm/r axis is equal to the solid angle + the wake relative angle specified in the dialog box. Figure 7.3.1-17 describes the geometrical detail and the mesh control when modifying the wake relative angle feature.
Solid Angle
Wake Relative Angle Wake Relative Angle
Solid Angle
FIGURE 7.3.1-17 Wake
control - relative angle
Furthermore, the Wake Prolongation in Downstream Block check box allows to propagate the wake in the downstream H-block (created when a control line is added downstream the trailing edge of the blade). It improves the quality of the mesh downstream of the trailing edge.
Control Line Control Line Control Line
FIGURE 7.3.1-18 Wake
control - Prolongation
AutoGrid5
7-17
7-3.1.8 Inlet & Outlet Boundary Control

The inlet and outlet boundaries of the blade to blade mesh are located at theta positions computed automatically using a parabolic function. If the blade is twisted, the computed values are different for each layer. Therefore the inlet and the outlet surfaces of the 3D mesh can be also twisted.
FIGURE 7.3.1-19 Twist
of the inlet 3D boundary
The angle deviation at the inlet and/or the outlet is important and the mesh quality can be seriously affected along the spanwise direction. To avoid this phenomenon at the inlet/outlet boundary limit of the mesh, new controls have been added in the Mesh page of the dialog box Define B2B Topology for Active Blade. If the Free Inlet/Outlet Angle mode is switched off, the user can freeze the inlet/outlet angle and mesh using respectively the Frozen Inlet/Outlet Angle and the Frozen Inlet/Outlet Mesh options. These options constrain the inlet/outlet optimization and force the mesh at the boundary.
FIGURE 7.3.1-20 Inlet
and outlet boundary control
7-3.1.9 Relax Inlet & Outlet Clustering

When Z cst lines are defined upstream or downstream to the blade, upstream and downstream H-blocks are created. By default the azimuthal clustering at the control line is extended up to the inlet or the outlet in the blade-to-blade mesh. In case Z cst lines are defined upstream or downstream to the blade, AutoGrid5 automatically detects the control lines and new options are available in the Mesh page in the Define B2B Topology for Active Blade dialog box.
7-18
AutoGrid5
The Relax Inlet/Outlet Clustering options allow to relax the clustering in the azimuthal direction starting from the control line up to the inlet or the outlet.
AutoGrid5
7-19
7-3.1.10 Blunt at Leading/Trailing Edge

In case of blunt blades, AutoGrid5 automatically detects the bluntness of the blade and new options are available in the Mesh page in the Define B2B Topology for Active Blade dialog box. This option is not available for staggered topology.
ZCst line at Leading Edge: Selection of this option defines a Z constant line at the leading
edge.
ZCst line at Trailing Edge: Selection of this option defines a Z constant line at the trailing
edge. Zcst line at the leading edge or trailing edge cannot be combined with respectively high staggered topology at the leading or trailing edge. Zcst line should be added at the leading or trailing edge location in the meridional view to ensure that the flow paths are respecting the shape of the hub and shroud at the leading or trailing edge. The B2B control option of this control line should be deactivated.
of Z constant line in case of blunt leading and trailing edges
Cell Width At Leading Edge: This entry allows the user to specify the width of the cell at the
blunt leading edge. By default the value is set to -1.0 when no user control is applied.
Cell Width At Trailing Edge: This entry allows the user to specify the width of the cell at the
blunt trailing edge. By default the value is set to -1.0 when no user control is applied.
7-20
AutoGrid5
This option is not available for staggered topology.
FIGURE 7.3.1-22 Cell
width control at blunt edge
7-3.2
Topology for High Staggered Blades
7-3.2.1 Overview
In several turbomachinery types, the blades are highly staggered. If the solid angle at the inlet (outlet) of the machine becomes greater than 45 and if the location of the inlet (outlet) limits of the domain is close to the leading edge (trailing edge) of the blades, then the O4H topology is not suitable anymore: the cells located near the inlet (outlet) boundary becomes very skewed.
Inlet close to the leading edge
solid angle > 450 Skewed cells
FIGURE 7.3.2-1 High
staggered blade
To improve this unexpected behaviour, AutoGrid5 uses the High Staggered Blade Optimization in the Topology page of the dialog box Define B2B Topology for Active Blade (Figure 7.3.2-3).
AutoGrid5
7-21
7-3.2.2 High Staggered Blade Topology Optimization
C-block
FIGURE 7.3.2-2
C topology at inlet
When the topology is (re)initialized using the button (Re)set Default Topology, AutoGrid5 detects if the two conditions described in the Figure 7.3.2-1 are reached. In this case, AutoGrid5 automatically adapts the default topology to optimize the grid quality: if the solid angle at inlet is lower than 0, the H upper block becomes a C-block. The high staggered blade topology optimization is controlled in the page Topology of the dialog box Define B2B Topology for Active Blade. The optimization can be switch off through the option High Staggered Blade Optimization to retrieve the default topology (Figure 7.3.2-1). The automatic search of the two geometric conditions can be switch off through the button Automatic High Staggered Blade Detection. In this case, the user has to specify manually which are the inlet and/or outlet geometrical configuration: Normal, Low Angle or High Angle (Figure 7.3.2-1 is presenting a low inlet angle test case).
FIGURE 7.3.2-3 High
staggered optimization control
The following figure is presenting the description of the different types of geometrical configuration and their corresponding inlet and outlet types.
7-22
AutoGrid5
normal - normal
normal - low angle
normal - high angle
low angle - high angle
low angle - low angle
high angle - normal
high angle - low angle
high angle - high angle

low angle - normal
types
7-3.2.3 Grid Points - Periodic Boundary - Gap Control

When a C-mesh is defining the upper block at inlet, the grid point number on the upper side of the blade and the grid points number at the inlet of the upper side are linked. The number N1 cannot be greater than N2. When a periodic matching boundary is requested, the number of points N1 is always different of N3. Therefore, if a gap mesh is defined, a non-matching
AutoGrid5
7-23
connection will be automatically used to create the connection between the H-block and the O-block inside the butterfly mesh. N = N2+N4-N1 --> N1<N2 N1 N2 N4
N N2
N4
N1
N3
Non matching connection
FIGURE 7.3.2-5
High staggered topology & periodic boundary
7-3.3
Tandem Row
Within AutoGrid5, turbomachines presenting tandem row can be meshed by activating Tandem Row in the Row Properties dialog box of the concerned row(s). Row(s) are considered as tandem when it is presenting:
a main blade and a splitter without overlap in the streamwise direction (Tandem Row set to Yes),
Main blade
Splitter
two rows (main blade with or without splitter(s)) without overlap in the streamwise direction (Tandem Row set to With Next/With Previous).
7-24
AutoGrid5
row 2
row 1
row 2
row 1
7-3.3.1 Main Blade/Splitter Configuration

When Tandem Row is set to Yes, the blade to blade control will adapt the grid points distribution along the main blade and the splitter as presented on figure below.
Splitter N5 N4 Main Blade N2 N1 N3 N4 = N1 + N2 N3 = N5 + N6 N6
FIGURE 7.3.3-1 Tandem
row mesh definition for Main Blade/Splitter Configuration
AutoGrid5
7-25
7-3.3.2 Multi-Rows Configuration

When Tandem Row is set to With Previous/With Next, a tandem configuration will be considered between the two selected rows. The tandem configuration is applied on only two successive rows. In order to be able to obtain full matching mesh between both rows, the number of flow paths and the flow paths distribution at the rows interface must be equal. This will lead to continuous flow paths between row1 and row2. To obtain full matching mesh in the B2B plane, two unfixed control lines are required upstream and downstream the interface of the rows.
row 2
Control Lines
row 1
The B2B mesh topology used for each blade row must be the O4H or the H&I topology. O4H H&I
O4H
O4H
In addition, the number of point in the azimuthal direction at the interface between both rows must be the same. In the Grid Points section of the dialog box Define B2B Topology for Active Blade, a message indicates to the user the number of points at the connection in both rows. When left-clicking on the button (Re)set Default Topology of the top menu bar, the process does not perform checks and grid manipulation to assume correct linking of tandem rows. The user has to manually check and change the grid point distribution to assume same azimuthal grid point number at the interface between both rows otherwise a warning appears. To ensure a full matching mesh, the optimization parameters of both rows are strictly linked together.
7-26
AutoGrid5
7-3.4
Control Lines & Blade to Blade Mesh.
The control lines (details in section 6-2.4) are defined in the meridional view to capture discontinuities of the hub and/or of the shroud. These lines can be defined upstream, downstream or on the blade(s) definition.
Upstream
Blade
Downstream
lines
By default, the control lines are taken into account in the blade to blade meshing process. The intersection between the flow paths and the control line is performed to obtain m locations in the (dm/ r,space). The control line implies that vertical grid lines must be defined at the computed m locations.
to blade mesh with control lines
Right-click on a control line in the meridional view gives access to a contextual menu. The menu item Properties opens a dialog box used to control the parameters of the control line. The parame-
AutoGrid5
7-27
ters B2B Control in this dialog box are used to switch off the blade to blade control of the control lines.
line control
7-3.4.1 Upstream & Downstream Control Lines.

Upstream and downstream control line implies that new H blocks will be added before the inlet or after the outlet of the O4H topology. The number of points in the azimuthal direction is implicitly defined by the connection with the blocks of the O4H topology. The number of points in the streamwise direction n1 and n2 (Figure 7.3.4-4) are controlled by the parameter Streamwise Npts in the dialog box Row Interface Properties (Figure 7.3.4-3) or by right-clicking on the H block in the blade to blade view and selecting the Number of Pts Streamwise menu.
n2 Upstream block
Downstream block n1 Z constant line on blade
FIGURE 7.3.4-4
Upstream & Downstream H-blocks
7-28
AutoGrid5
Default Topology (O4H Topology) 7-3.4.2 Control Line on Blade
When a control line is defined on a blade, the parameters Streamwise Index of the dialog box Row Interface Properties (Figure 7.3.4-3) controls the index of the grid points along the blade distribution linked to the control line (Figure 7.3.4-5). By default, its value is equal to "0" and the new control line is not taken into account. When new control line has to be defined on the blade, it is advised to perform the (Re)set Default Topology process which computes default value for the streamwise index of the new control line.
Cell width control around control line
Streamwise index
line on blade
7-3.4.3 Cell Width around Control Line

The parameters Cell width of the dialog box Row Interface Properties (Figure 7.3.4-3) controls the cell width in the streamwise direction around the control line. By default the value is set to "0.0" and AutoGrid5 computes the most appropriated value automatically.
7-3.4.4 Mesh Quality Improvement with Control Line

For high staggered blades, new topology is automatically select by AutoGrid5 if two conditions are reached (Figure 7.3.2-1). When the upstream domain and/or the downstream domain are large, the second condition is not reached and the high staggered optimization not selected. A method to ensure the selection of the high staggered optimization consists of creating control lines upstream the blade near the leading edge and downstream the blade near the trailing edge. In this condition, AutoGrid5 will choose the high staggered optimization. By adding these new control lines, we add also constraints into the blade to blade mesh definition (vertical grid lines for each control line). These constraints can be suppressed by switching off the Fixed Geometry option in the dialog box Row Interface Properties (Figure 7.3.4-3)
MERIDIONAL
R Z
lines improve mesh quality
AutoGrid5
7-29
7-3.5
Intersection Control Options
In AutoGrid5, the dialog box Define B2B Topology For Active Blade contains a page Intersection Control.
FIGURE 7.3.5-1 Intersection
control parameters
These parameters allow in specific cases to control the intersection between the blade and the flow paths performed during the transformation made from 3D space to 2D blade-to-blade space and from 2D domain to 3D space. This intersection is defined by control points (with a certain distribution along the blade) and a number of points in between each control points. This curve describing the blade in 2D blade-to-blade space is then used to create the mesh and then transformation to 3D domain is made. After these two transformations using intersection curves, there may be some (very) small differences between the original 3D geometry and the geometry obtained. In AutoGrid5 the differences in geometry are so small that in general the impact on the solution is much smaller than the use of discretization in a mesh due to the size of cells and the location of the grid points. Nevertheless AutoGrid5 allows to use more points to compute the intersection and in that way to reduce these differences even more. This is at the cost of a much longer mesh generation process. In few words the Intersection Control parameters control the way the intersections are defined between the geometry of the blade and any axisymmetric surface defined by the flow path:
When defining the geometry using the Import CAD window, there is only one possibility to
define the intersection using Parasolid libraries (High mode) and in such way there are no control parameters.
When defining the geometry using a native ".geomTurbo" file, there is a default way proposed
to define the intersection using SISL libraries (Low mode) but there is still the possibility to use High mode as well if required (not required usually). When Low mode is selected, the intersection is defined using by default a Uniform distribution but the user can use the Curvature distribution when "kinks" do not appear along the spanwise direction on the blade patch. Furthermore, the number of discretization points (Intersection Number of Points) between control points defining the intersection curve can be controlled. By default around 300 control points are used: that means that 300x10 points are defining each intersection curve). This number has never been changed internally. If the geometry is not very well defined and contains some small discontinuities, then it is recommended NOT to use a curvature distribution. Because this type of distribution will result in a concentration of control points in the small area of the discontinuity, leading to not enough control points left for a good representation of the rest of the geometry. If after the mesh generation, the mesh is presenting high value of angular deviation, the Low mode used by default for native ".geomTurbo" file can be switch to High mode before regenerating the mesh.
7-30
AutoGrid5
Furthermore, the Blade Section Reference Angle allows for multisplitter configuration to project correctly into the M-theta plane the blade section by specifying an angle of reference (by default set to 0). It can happens that for some configuration this angle is no more suitable for all the blade and some splitter blade Mtheta projection becomes wrong (+2.PI). Changing the Blade Section Reference Angle of all the blades to a value up to 2PI or down to -2PI (according to the azimuthal distribution) solves this problem.
d = 6.39359005049
FIGURE 7.3.5-2 Modify
reference angle of all the blades to correct the projection
Finally, the Number of Points Used To Define the Chord allows to control the number of control points used to generate the chord in the blade to blade view (by default set to 33). Usually this number of points is unchanged but in specific cases (i.e. when the blade is deformed), it is required to increase this parameter.
AutoGrid5
7-31
HOH Topology
7-4
7-4.1
HOH Topology
Overview
The HOH topology is used to obtain very high grid quality. The topology is defined with three blocks named respectively the inlet, O and outlet blocks. The HOH topology is controlled through the dialog box Define B2B Topology for Active Blade.
Outlet block O-block
Inlet block
FIGURE 7.4.1-1 HOH
topology
This topology is not suitable for all the turbomachinery types. This feature is not applicable:
for blade with blunt leading edge and/or blunt trailing edge, for row with splitter blade(s), for blade to blade geometrical configuration with blade chord length lower than the pitch angle, for row with control line define on the blade.
7-4.2
HOH Blade to Blade Mesh Control
The HOH blade to blade mesh topology is controlled through the parameters available in the dialog box Define B2B Topology for Active Blade. The dialog box is divided into five areas.
7-32
AutoGrid5
HOH Topology
In the Topology page, the user control the mesh topology of the inlet and the outlet extension of the mesh. The Oblock is running around the blade and can be extended by upstream and downstream H or I blocks. In Mesh page, the user is allowed to change the orthogonality and the cell width at the wall through the parameters Boundary Layer Factor and Cell Width at Wall, respectively. The blade points clustering can also be controlled. In the Grid Points page, the interactive graphical area shows the mesh topology in terms of number of points. The user can customize the grid size by changing the number of points displayed in this area. Each label can be selected and modified using the mouse. When clicking on a number of points, a string input area appears prompting the user to change this number. When modification have been done inside the dialog box, the button Generate B2B can be used to compute and display the mesh according to the new settings.
7-4.2.1 Upstream & Downstream Extension Control

As described in the previous section, the Define B2B Topology for Active Blade dialog box gives access to the upstream and downstream control.
(1) (2)
FIGURE 7.4.2-1 Upstream
& downstream controls
By default, the upstream and downstream extension blocks are activated (1), the inlet and outlet block type is set to I (2). As shown in Figure 7.4.2-2, H inlet type allows the user to set up full matching meshes. If the I inlet type is chosen, the periodic boundaries at the inlet are non-matching.
AutoGrid5
7-33
HOH Topology
H mesh block at the inlet
I mesh block at the inlet
FIGURE 7.4.2-2 H&I
upstream topology
The Inlet Position and Outlet Position entered by the user is used to compute the distance between the leading edge and the connection boundary. The computed distance is a ratio between the pitch angle and the specified value.
FIGURE 7.4.2-3 Inlet
& outlet location
7-4.2.2 Number of Points Control

The grid points number depends of the grid level chosen in the quick access pad page Mesh Control/Grid Level before performing the initialization ((Re)set Default Topology).
7-34
AutoGrid5
HOH Topology
Afterwards, the interactive graphics area of the Define B2B Topology for Active Blade dialog box allows the user to change the number of points used to defined the blade to blade mesh. The mouse can be used to select a grid point number by left-clicking on it. A string input area is automatically displayed, prompting the user to specify a new grid point number.
FIGURE 7.4.2-4 HOH
number of points
7-4.2.3 Blade Clustering Control

The page Blade Points Distribution opens an area allowing the user to control the clustering near the leading edge and near the trailing edge of the blade
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(5) (6)
FIGURE 7.4.2-5 Blade Points
Distribution
Four blade points clustering types are available for the leading and/or the trailing edges:
(1) None: the grid points are clustered according to the projection of the clustering on the external boundaries of the block.
AutoGrid5
7-35
HOH Topology
(2) Absolute Control Distance: a uniform distribution is set along a distance given by the user. (3) Relative Control Distance (Default): a uniform distribution is set along a distance computed by multiplying the blade width near the leading edge and a factor given by the user.
(4) First Cell Length: first cell length is given by the user
In addition the obtained clustering can be smoothed (5) and the grid point clustering down to the blade in the azimuthal direction can be controlled by the Drag Clustering factor (6): the cell length near the trailing edge is propagated until the boundary between the O and the outlet H block.
7-4.3
Butterfly Mesh Topology for Hub/Shroud Gap
The mesh on the hub/shroud gap is created using a butterfly topology. Grid Points page provides new parameters to control the gap mesh.
Buttons to access the gap parameters Parameters to control the grid points in the gap
d1,d2 : leading edge control lengths d3,d4 : trailing edge control length d1+d2, d3+d4,d1/(d1+d2), d3/(d3+d4) : parameters ratio controlled by the users Parameters to control the connection with the main mesh
Details of the mesh near the leading edge
d1+d2 = 1
FIGURE 7.4.3-1 Gap
d1+d2 = 2
controls
7-36
AutoGrid5
HOH Topology
The parameters can be changed by selection in the graphics control area. By default the connection with the main mesh is matching and a non-matching connection is created between the H and O block inside the gap. In non-matching mode, the non-matching connection is located at the interface between the main mesh and the mesh of the gap. When using the matching mode (non-matching connection is created between the H and O block inside the gap) it is not recommended to use the optimization in the clearance. In some cases that may work but often it will not give a better result.
7-4.4
Hub to Shroud Mesh Control
The two Hub to Shroud Control parameters at Inlet and Outlet in the Mesh page of the Define B2B Topology for Active Blade dialog box act to reduce fluctuation of the solid angle computed to initialize the blade to blade mesh using HOH topology. In linear mode the angles are equal to the linear interpolation between the hub and the shroud angle values. To see a big difference, the blade should present the same solid angle on the hub and the shroud and different at mid span. It is used to avoid big fluctuation of the mesh in the spanwise direction due to big fluctuation of the solid angles. To avoid a kink, the parameter Hub to Shroud Control should be kept down or equal to 0.5 when the solid angles are changing of sign from hub to shroud.
6-4.5
The parameters in the Intersection Control page allow in specific cases to control the intersection between the blade and the flow paths performed during the transformation made from 3D space to 2D blade-to-blade space and from 2D domain to 3D space. More details about the parameters are provided in section 7-3.5.
AutoGrid5
7-37
H&I Topology
7-5
7-5.1
H&I Topology
Overview
The H&I topology is used to obtain better mesh quality with multisplitters configuration. The H&I topology is controlled through the dialog box Define B2B Topology for Active Blade.
Skin block H-block
Outlet block Inlet block
FIGURE 7.5.1-1 H&I
topology
The H&I topology will present leading and trailing edges clustering projected on neighbouring blades, meaning that a non matching connection or a non matching periodic connection will be present at inlet and outlet.
Periodic Non Matching
FIGURE 7.5.1-2
H&I topology - Projection points
7-38
AutoGrid5
H&I Topology
The H&I topology is composed by:
One block to mesh the blade passage, contrary to the default topology which creates a mesh
around the blade.
An optional skin block around the blade with two H blocks before and after the skin block.
The topology is not suitable for all turbomachinery types. This feature is not applicable:
for bypass configuration, for configuration presenting a Z constant line on blade, for configuration presenting cooling features (holes, basin, ribs,...), for full mesh generation with geometry periodicity different than 1, for configuration requiring a wake control, for multi-splitter configuration where leading or trailing edges are crossing each other.
Splitter 1 Leading Edge Main Blade Main Blade
Leading Edge Splitter 2 Leading Edge Splitter 1
7-5.2

H&I Topology Control
As mentioned previously in this chapter, the H&I topology is composed by maximum 4 blocks: a H block to mesh the blade passage an optional O block around the blade (skin block) an optional H block upstream the leading edge of the blade if a skin block around the blade an optional H block downstream the trailing edge of the blade if a skin block around the blade
By default, the H&I topology will present a full matching connection in the blade passage area and a non matching connection (Figure 7.5.2-1) or a non matching periodic connection (Figure 7.5.2-2) in the inlet and outlet region. However, a small part just before the leading edge and after the trailing edge will be matching to avoid a non matching connection in these critical regions (Figure 7.5.2-2).
AutoGrid5
7-39
H&I Topology
Non Matching
Non Matching
FIGURE 7.5.2-1 H&I
topology - non matching connection
Periodic Matching
Periodic Matching
Periodic Matching
FIGURE 7.5.2-2 H&I
topology connections
The number of points involved in the matching connection at the leading and trailing edges is automatically imposed by AutoGrid5 and cannot be adapted manually. These number of points are provided as info in the Grid Points page.
7-40
AutoGrid5
H&I Topology
The matching connection in these critical regions is ensured except if the grid points number modified by the user at inlet and/or outlet is lower than the number of points set automatically by AutoGrid5 in the matching connection. For example, in above figure if the inlet grid points number (set by default to 53) is set to a value down or equal to 29, the matching connection will not be ensured at the leading edge.
Matching Non Matching Non Matching In order to ensure a full matching connection, the options H Inlet/H Outlet have to be activated in the Topology page and the button (Re)set Default Topology should be pressed. When the blade is detected highly staggered at inlet and/or outlet, the full matching connection will be automatically ensured at respectively the inlet and/or outlet (section 75.3).
AutoGrid5
7-41
H&I Topology
FIGURE 7.5.2-3 H&I
topology - H Inlet/Outlet
To enhance the mesh quality for centrifugal and mulsplitter configurations, the H&I topology can be limited to H block to mesh the blade passage by deactivating the option Skin Block.
FIGURE 7.5.2-4 H&I
topology - without Skin Block
7-42
AutoGrid5
H&I Topology
7-5.2.1 Control Number of Grid Points

The grid points number depends of the grid level and the streamwise weights chosen in the quick access pad page Mesh Control/Grid Level before performing the initialization ((Re)set Default Topology).
These optimized grid points numbers can be changed in the Grid Points page of the dialog box Define B2B Topology For Active Blade. The number of grid points can be adapted as well as the grid points distribution (number on top of arrows) from the inlet to the outlet. In the figure below, when modifying the grid points distribution from 53 to 45 at the leading edge, the grid points number at inlet will be reduced to 45 and the number of points on the blade will be increased to (61 + (53-45-1)). To change a number, left-click on it, enter the new number of points in the locally displayed input area and <Enter> to confirm or <Esc> to cancel the action. To display the new blade to blade mesh, click-left on the button Generate B2B.
Grid Points Distribution Control
When modifying a number of grid points, in order to preserve the matching connections of the H&I topology, all the numbers of grid points will be automatically adapted. For a configuration presenting splitter(s), when modifying the grid points numbers on one blade (main blade or splitter) of the row, the changes will be automatically applied on all the blades composing the row.
7-5.2.2 Control Skin Mesh Clustering around the Blade

The O block around the blade is used to optimize the control of the boundary layer on the blade. It is created using an hyperbolic mesh and can be adapted using the options presented in section 73.1.3. When the option Skin Block is deactivated (no O block around the blade), a clustering at both ends will be applied in the H block in the channel.
AutoGrid5
7-43
H&I Topology
7-5.2.3 Control Hub/Shroud Gap Mesh

When gap(s) has been defined, AutoGrid5 adds automatically blocks to mesh the domain up or down to the blade(s). More details can be found in the section 7-3.1.4.
7-5.2.4 Blend/Sharp/Rounded Treatment at Leading/Trailing Edge

In case of blunt blades, AutoGrid5 automatically detects the bluntness of the blade and the option to blend, sharp or rounded the blunt blade leading/trailing edge appear in the Topology page of the Define B2B Topology for Active Blade dialog box. More details can be found in the section 7-3.1.5. However, when the blade is considered as blunt or sharp at both leading and trailing edges, the skin block (O block) will be removed.
7-5.2.5 Inlet & Outlet Boundary Control

The inlet and outlet boundaries of the blade to blade mesh are located at theta positions computed automatically using a parabolic function or defined manually. More details can be found in the section 7-3.1.8.
7-5.2.6 Control Clustering at Projection Points

The H&I topology will present leading and trailing edges clustering projected on neighbouring blades. It means that by default the clustering imposed at the leading and trailing edges will be applied on the corresponding projected point.
FIGURE 7.5.2-5 H&I
topology - Projection Point
AutoGrid5 allows to relax the clustering of the projected point manually or automatically using the parameters available in the Mesh page.
7-44
AutoGrid5
H&I Topology
Leading Edge
Trailing Edge
FIGURE 7.5.2-6 H&I
topology - Projection Point Clustering Automatic Relaxation
The Automatic Clustering Relaxation (projections) option allows to relax automatically the clustering on all projection points simultaneously.This method allows to impose automatically different clustering relaxation depending of the projection point. For example, if the blade is presenting a blunt at trailing edge, the corresponding projection point clustering will be more relaxed compared to the leading edge projection point clustering as presented in above figure. The Relaxation Clustering (projections) option allows to control manually the projection points clustering of the blade by multiplying the default clustering with the value specified in the entry. This method will impose the same relaxation factor to all the projection points. When combining the two relaxation methods, first the automatic relaxation will be applied and then the user defined relaxation clustering factor will be applied in addition.
7-5.3
Topology for High Staggered Blades
By default, AutoGrid5 will detect automatically if the blade is staggered. When detected at inlet and/or outlet, the main H block is deviated from streamwise direction to theta direction in order to create a kind of C topology at the inlet and/or outlet). More details can be found in the section 7-3.2.
AutoGrid5
7-45
H&I Topology
Inlet close to the leading edge
C topology
FIGURE 7.5.3-1 High
staggered topology at inlet
The topology for high staggered blades is presenting full matching connections in the high staggered area.
7-5.4
These parameters allow in specific cases to control the intersection between the blade and the flow paths performed during the transformation made from 3D space to 2D blade-to-blade space and from 2D domain to 3D space. These parameters are detailed in section 7-3.5.
7-46
AutoGrid5
User Defined Topology
7-6
To choose a user defined topology for the selected row, open the Define B2B Topology For Active Row dialog box and activate the option User Defined.
to blade topology user defined mode
When this user defined mode is activated, the only option remaining in the dialog box is the button Edit Topology. It allows to define and control the blade to blade mesh through a dedicated graphical user interface:
FIGURE 7.6.0-2 Edit
topology graphical user interface
The Quick Access Pad and the graphics area are updated to display the options of the edit topology mode. To quit this edit topology graphical user interface, press the button Close Edition Mode at the top right corner, it will reenter the classical multistage graphical user interface.
AutoGrid5
7-47
The basic principle in user defined topology is to create manually the blade to blade mesh on the hub, then controlling and modifying it on the shroud, and possibly on additional control layers. This mesh is created with the blocking and meshing facilities of IGG. As a support of this blocking, a geometry is automatically created when entering the edit mode and additional geometry can also be created. Once the mesh is created on the control layers, it is interpolated with transfinite interpolation to compute the mesh on all the layers. This gives a continuous initial mesh then all layers are identically smoothed to give the final 3D mesh.
Control layers
Mesh copied and modified on other layers
Mesh computed by interpolation on intermediate layers
Mesh created on hub
FIGURE 7.6.0-3 User
defined topology principle
7-6.1

Geometry Control
Once entering the edit mode, a geometry of the selected row is automatically created: the section of the blade(s) at the hub, an offset of this blade section, the row inlet curve (upstream row rotor/stator), the row outlet curve (downstream row rotor/stator), a curve going from the blade leading edge to the inlet, a curve going from the blade trailing edge to the outlet, two periodic curves on each side of the blade, a periodic copy of the preceding curves (except obviously the inlet and outlet), the control line curves located between the row inlet and outlet (meridional control lines).
It is possible to control the offset curve and to create additional polylines through the first subpad of the Quick Access Pad:
7-48
AutoGrid5
The Polyline button allows to create additional polylines on which the blocking can be placed. The polyline control points should be located on the existing geometry for the system to work correctly. This option launches a tool:
Move the mouse cursor to the desired position and left-click to add a control point to the curve. The creation of the curve is terminated by right-clicking. Notice that the last curve segment,
attached to the mouse movement, is not part of the curve.
During the specification of the control points, the cursor attraction to existing curves is activated. When it is attracted to a curve, a filled-in circle is displayed. The Geometry menu in the top menu bar cannot be used. The entry Blade Offset Width allows to control the size of the blade offset to define a support skin curve. It is a percentage of the blade thickness (blade thickness is a dimension automatically computed according to the geometry). The entry Blade Offset Width 2 allows to control the size of the blade offset to define a support curve in the gap. It is a percentage of the blade thickness (blade thickness is a dimension automatically computed according to the geometry).
7-6.2
Mesh Control
The blade to blade mesh should be defined on the hub layer, then it can be modified on other layers if desired. The objective is to fill completely a periodic blade domain, defined by its geometry, by block faces. All the domain should be meshed, except inside the blade if no blade gap is defined. The domain can be defined either by the two periodic curves and inlet and outlet curves, either by the inlet and outlet curves, the two blades (main blade + its repetition) and the curves linking the leading and trailing edge to inlet and outlet curves.
Periodic domain around the blade and between periodic curves
Periodic domain between blades and curves linking leading and trailing edge to inlet and outlet curves
FIGURE 7.6.2-1 Periodic
domain examples
AutoGrid5
7-49
Following operations are available on the hub:
faces creation, faces deletion, insert vertices and control them, insert fixed points and control them, set the clustering on segments, set the face type, control segment boundary conditions (smoother).
Once faces are created on the hub, these faces are automatically copied to other control layers. When going on another control layer, the geometry is replaced and the faces remapped on it. Then modifications can be achieved. Modifications available are:
vertices displacement (including periodic placement), segments clustering control.

Face vertices should absolutely be located on curves for the system to work correctly. It allows to place correctly vertices when going from one control layer to another. If a vertex is mapped on a curve on the hub, it should be mapped on the curve having the same name on other layers, even after modifications, otherwise an error will be raised.
First of all the number of control layers should be chosen, then the mesh created on the hub layer and modified on other layers. The blade to blade mesh is created and controlled through the Topology Control subpad of the Quick Access Pad, whereas the mesh visualization is controlled through the View subpad.
FIGURE 7.6.2-2 Topology
control subpad
The Topology Control subpad is composed of three pages, the first one controlling the layers, the last two ones being used to create the mesh.
7-50
AutoGrid5
7-6.2.1 Control Layer Page

This page is used to control the number of layers and their management. All control layers physically correspond to a flow path. This flow path specifies the surface of revolution and therefore the blade intersection and geometry which will be linked to the control layer.
Control Layer Spacing (%span) controls the desired number of layers. The percentage of the
spacing in the spanwise direction should be specified. The default value is 100, meaning that there are two control layers, one at the hub, one at the shroud. For example, specifying 25 would create five control layers, one at the hub, one at 25% span, 50% span, 75% span and one at the shroud. Changing the number of control layers implies that all previous mesh modifications done on control layers different than the hub will be erased.
Active Layer allows to select the layer to analyze, i.e. select the flow path at which the mesh
will be analyzed. If the layer is a control layer, it is possible to work on and modify the mesh, otherwise it is only possible to preview the final mesh after smoothing. The active layer is also expressed as a percentage of the spacing in the spanwise direction. When the active layer corresponds to a control layer, the geometry is recomputed at this level and face vertices are remapped on this updated geometry.
Active Layer Index gives the flow path index corresponding to the active control layer. The button Reset All Layers to Hub erases all the modifications done on all the layers different
than the hub. This allows on all the control layers to have an exact copy of the hub mesh.
The button Preview Initial Mesh allows to reinterpolate all the faces mesh on the active layer.
Indeed after smoothing face mesh is optimized and obviously different than its initial shape.
The button Preview Final Mesh allows to smooth the faces mesh on the active layer, allowing to
see what will be the final smoothed mesh at that level. The smoothing parameters are the classical ones of the Optimization Properties dialog box ( ).
The button Detect Unmapped Segments allows to visualize the segments unmapped on a existing blade to blade curves. Check the vertices linked to the segments.
7-6.2.2 Create - Connect Pages

These pages allows to create the mesh and control it.
The icon Insert New Block allows to create a new face by entering in the graphics area two of
its opposite vertices. Then the four face vertices can be moved freely.
The icon Delete Block allows to delete faces. The icon Define Block Type allows to define if the block should be considered as fluid or solid.
It opens the following dialog box:
In fact it allows to specify if a block is part of a gap or not. If it is included in the gap mesh, its type should be Solid.
The icon Define Block Bcs allows to visualize boundary conditions set on segments for the
smoother. It opens the following dialog box.
AutoGrid5
7-51
Filters, allowing selective visualization in the segment list
FIGURE 7.6.2-3 Segment
boundary conditions dialog box
The dialog box contains a list of all the face segments. The different filters at the top allow to display specific segments in the browser while hiding others. The Face, Edge and Seg filters are cumulative and allow to display segments by indices. For example: Face filter: * (* means all) - Edge filter: 1 2 - Seg filter:* shows in the browser all the segments of edges 1 and 2 of all the faces. The Type filter is very useful to list all the segments of a given type (according to the other filters). Allowed types are:
MOVING, meaning that the segment points can move on a curve. SOLID_WALL, meaning that the segment points are fixed and a cell size is imposed in the
mesh.
UNDEFINED, meaning that no special boundary conditions is set on the segment. Generally it
means that the segment is internal to the mesh and will be connected to another one. Otherwise it means that the segment is badly placed (edge not correctly mapped on a curve for example). The right part contains information on the selected segment:
its type, if its type is SOLID_WALL, the cell width that will be imposed on the segment, the number of
layers on which it will be imposed and the expansion ratio set between the layers. These values cannot be changed directly through the Segment boundary conditions dialog box. Cell width can be changed through the Quick Access Pad Mesh Control/Row Mesh Control/Cell Width or the Define B2B Topology dialog box in Mesh page (accessible when Default topology selected). The number of layers and expansion ratio are automatically set and cannot be changed. Segments can be selected in the dialog box by left-click and left-drag. When selected, they are highlighted in the graphics area and displayed with four arrows.
The icon Insert Vertex allows to insert a new vertex in an edge.

Use the short-cut <i> to activate this command in a faster way.
The icon Insert Fixed Point allows to insert a new fixed point in an edge.
7-52
AutoGrid5
The icon Periodic Vertex allows to start a tool to place vertices at a periodic position. Start the
tool, select the reference vertex (which one will not move), and select the vertex to be positioned at a periodic translation from the reference one. Then move the cursor either above or below the reference vertex, the second vertex will be automatically located at the periodic position. If this position is over a curve, the vertex will be automatically mapped on it. Left-click to fix the vertex position. Then it is possible to repeat the same operation with other vertices.
The icon Cluster Points allows to open the Clustering dialog box (more details in IGG User
Manual). It allows to apply grid points distribution on the segments. For initial spacing at start and at end, absolute values should be entered, they will be automatically divided by the local radius of the control layer. This means that if the same cell size is desired at the hub and at the shroud, the same value should be entered in the dialog box. The options Edge - Edge and Whole grid of the Connect page allow to connect either two edges, or all the edges of the blade to blade mesh. The connections allow to modify the mesh more easily as e.g. moving one vertex will move all connected vertices.
Edge - Edge
The connection of two edges requires the selection of a reference edge and a second edge (target). During the different connection operations, AutoGrid may need to remap edges affected by the operation. By convention AutoGrid keeps the reference edge unchanged and applies the modifications on the second edge only. This is important when an existing edge cannot be modified at all. Firstly select the two edges to connect together. The following prompt will appear: Select First Edge (reference) (<1> to select - <2> to acknowledge - <3> to quit) Left-click on the desired edge and middle-click to confirm the selection. Then, the second edge must be selected in the same way. After, the following dialog box will be opened to enable connections at different levels, each level being identified by a button in the dialog box. The All button performs all the connections of the previous buttons, if possible.
FIGURE 7.6.2-4 Edge-Edge
connection dialog box
For the first four "topological" levels, an order must be respected from the top to the bottom. For Vertices or Orphan Vertices connections, the topological edges using the replaced vertex are remapped on the geometry. For each level, the successfully connected entities are highlighted in green in the graphics area. Entities that were already connected in a previous operation are highlighted in red. Once a connection is performed, two other edges can be selected to make another connection without leaving the tool. To quit this tool, press <q> or the right mouse button.
AutoGrid5
7-53
Whole grid
This tool performs the connection for the whole grid at once.
FIGURE 7.6.2-5 Whole grid
connection dialog box
The All button performs all the connections of the previous buttons, if possible. For each connection level selected by a button, a search is made on the whole grid to find matching entities at the specified tolerance and the connection is performed. As the whole grid is examined, and that a connected entity can be modified, this tool should not be used if any of the block cannot be modified at all. For the first four "topological" levels, an order must be respected from the top to the bottom. For Vertices or Orphan Vertices connections, the topological edges using the replaced vertex are remapped on the geometry. For each level, the successfully connected entities are highlighted in green in the graphics area. Entities that were already connected in a previous operation are highlighted in red. To quit this tool, press <q> or the right mouse button.
7-6.3
View Control
This subpad contains several icons allowing to visualize the mesh at different levels: vertices, fixed points, segment grid points, edges and faces mesh. The following table summarizes these options:
Icon
Command
Toggles vertices.
Toggles fixed points.
Toggles segment grid points.
Toggles edges.
Toggles face grid.
7-54
AutoGrid5
Blade to Blade Optimization
7-7
7-7.1

Introduction
FIGURE 7.7.1-1 Blade to
blade mesh optimization control
The blade to blade mesh of each row are optimized using an elliptic multiblock smoother. The parameters controlling the optimization are available in the dialog box Optimization Properties. This dialog box is opened through the option Mesh Control/Row Mesh Control/Optimization Control of the Quick Access Pad.
7-7.2
Optimization Control
This section describes the optimization parameters available in the dialog box Optimization Properties.
AutoGrid5
7-55
7-7.2.1 Optimization Steps

The first fields Optimization Steps and Gaps and/or CHT Optimization represent the number of iteration the elliptic smoother will perform respectively in the channel mesh and in the gap. This number depends on the skewness level of the original mesh and can be highly reduced if the Multigrid Acceleration is activated. By default both optimization steps are set to 100.
7-7.2.2 Skewness Control

By default the Optimization Steps controls the orthogonality of the cells only near the solid wall. The parameters Skewness Control/Skewness Control In Gaps set to Full force the optimization to increase cells skewness everywhere respectively into the blade-to-blade channel mesh and into the blade-to-blade gap mesh.
No Skewness Control
Full Skewness Control
FIGURE 7.7.2-1 Optimization
with skewness control
When the parameters Skewness Control/Skewness Control In Gaps are set to Medium, the first half of iterations are done without skewness control and the remaining second half with skewness control. Theoretical Aspect Two source term computations have been implemented (details in section 7-7.10). The first one, with the Skewness Control set to No, computes source terms only in the neighbourhood of boundary layers, taking into account the expansion ratio provided by the user. The main drawback of this implementation is that it is easy for the user to enter conflicting inputs that will make the smoother diverge. For example, requiring a very small cell size on boundary with a small expansion ratio while the boundary spreads on a large distance with few cell points cannot be achieved and is a typical case of the smoother divergence. The second one, with the Skewness Control set to Full, computes source terms everywhere on the mesh and does not have expansion ratio as input. The boundary layers are not privileged which leads to better orthogonality in the central regions but increase skewness near the boundary layers. Moreover, mesh concentrations outgoing from boundary layers propagate all over the mesh.
7-56
AutoGrid5
The main difference between the two methods can be seen in Figure 7.7.2-2.
FIGURE 7.7.2-2 Smoothing
without (left) and with (right) skew flag
7-7.2.3 Orthogonality Control

The parameter Orthogonality controls the level of cells orthogonality near the wall or everywhere in the mesh depending of the Skewness Control parameter value. By default the orthogonality control parameter is set to 0.5.
FIGURE 7.7.2-3 Orthogonality
control
AutoGrid5
7-57
The parameter Gap Orthogonality is used when a large variation is observed in the first cell width in the gap compared to the blade width. In case of smaller wall cell width, increase the Gap Orthogonality to increase the skewness and for larger wall cell width, reduce the Gap Orthogonality to avoid overlapping cells in the gap. By default the gap orthogonality value is set to 0.5. Theoretical Aspect When the source terms become too high, typically when expansion ratio are too large (>> 2) or angles are too small, the numerical scheme that solves the elliptic equation becomes unstable and the smoother diverges. The source terms are therefore clipped in order to be kept below a certain value depending on the smoother type. When aspect ratio are large on the boundary layer while both orthogonality and expansion ratio almost fit CFD requirements, the source terms also become large and clipping them to ensure robustness of the smoother leads to high skewness in the boundary layers. Fortunately, experience has shown that clipping can be proportional to the square root of the aspect ratio. The Orthogonality slider controls the proportionality factor and allows to obtain good orthogonality and low expansion ratio in the boundary layers. When set to "0.000", there is no overclipping and robustness is ensured but there is a risk of increasing the skewness in the boundary layer. When set to "1.000", orthogonality constraint increases as well as the probability that the smoother diverges. The default "0.500", in most of the cases, provides a good boundary layer after a smooth convergence. Note that this overclipping method also allows the second type source term computations to privilege boundary layers (details in section 7-7.10).
7-7.3
Wake Control Level
This option is meaningful only if the Wake Control is activated (See section 7-3.1.7). In that case, the smoothing is performed in two stages. During the first one, the wake is fixed and released during the second stage. The Wake Control Level slider controls the proportion of iteration performed in the first and the second stage.
FIGURE 7.7.3-1 Wake
control level
7-58
AutoGrid5
7-7.4
Multigrid Acceleration
This functionality allows a faster convergence of the smoother but should nevertheless be carefully used. Indeed, in this case, the multigrid scheme presents an additional difficulty: the fields that are computed, restricted and prolonged are the mesh points themselves. The expansion ratio is thus highly increased on each grid coarsening as well as the resulting source terms. As discussed in section 7-7.2.3, the stability of the numerical scheme therefore decreases on each coarsening and few examples (i.e. when very small expansion ratio on the finest grid) have successfully converged using such multigrid approach. The compromise that has been found and implemented in the current version is to restrict source terms (just copy from the finest mesh) instead of computing them. In such a case, the smoother converges but the solution obtained with the multigrid acceleration can be somewhat different that the one obtained with a single grid computation.
7-7.5
Non-Matching Control
The Non-Matching Control slider controls the orthogonality at the non-matching periodic boundaries when Matching Periodicity is deactivated (See section 7-3.1.2). In that case, the smoothing is performed in two stages. During the first one, the orthogonality is fixed on the periodic boundaries and released during the second stage. The slider controls the proportion of iteration performed in the first and the second stage. This option can be unstable when it is used together with the multigrid acceleration. This option must be switched off when kink along spanwise grid lines are observed in the 3D mesh.
7-7.6
Periodic Boundary Optimization
The parameter Bnd Optimization Steps allows to optimize the shape of the periodic boundaries of the initial mesh before applying the Optimization Steps. In specific cases, the option avoids the periodic boundaries to cross the blade or cells overlaps in the blade-to-blade view resulting in mesh optimization divergence when Optimization Steps applied.
Overlapping Cells
boundaries optimization
The Bnd Straight Control selection box allows to impose a straight (linear) shape to the periodic boundaries of the initial mesh before applying the Optimization Steps.
AutoGrid5
7-59
7-7.7
Multisplitter Control
The Multisplitter Control selection box is used to control the mesh initialization (ordering) for multisplitter configuration. By default the parameter is not active and is active when a new multi-splitter template is initialized.
7-7.8
Skin Mesh Control
The Freeze Skin Mesh selection box is used to freeze the skin block (mesh and boundaries) during the optimization process. It is suggested to freeze the skin mesh with the introduction of cooling holes, in order to improve the quality of the full non matching (FNMB) connection between the skin block and the core flow. The option is not available for a blunt leading or trailing edge.
7-7.9
Advice to Users
Try to avoid large expansion ratio (>2) along the blade in the streamwise direction when setting up the number of points required along the blade. When using the smoother without skew flag activated, be careful that the expansion ratio in the azimuthal direction does not conflict with the number of points in the same direction. When the user needs a coarse mesh with large expansion ratios and hence, the two previous advices cannot be followed, do not select the Multigrid Acceleration option. Always check the mesh quality on both hub and shroud blade-to-blade views before starting a 3D mesh generation
7-7.10 Theoretical Aspect

The aim of this functionality is to optimize both orthogonality and expansion ratio all over the mesh. If we consider an initial mapping x ( , ) = ( x ( , ), y ( , ) ) from computational space [ 0, m ] [ 0, n ] to the mesh coordinate domain R 2 . The leading equation for the elliptic smoother is given by:
g 22 ( x + Px ) 2g 12 x + g 11 ( x + Qx ) = 0 g 11 = x x = x + y
2 2 2
g 12 = x x = x x + y y g 22 = x x = x + y
2
When the source terms, P = Q = 0, the mesh will converge to an uniform spacing grid without taking account of orthogonality or boundary conditions (clustering at wall for example). Therefore, the implementation consist in calculating these source terms in order to minimize skewness and expansion ratio while taking into account all boundary condition types available in AutoGrid5.
7-60
AutoGrid5
CHAPTER 8:
3D Generation
8-1
Overview
The 3D mesh of a turbomachinery configuration is easily started and automatically generated by AutoGrid5 using the Generation Control dialog box appearing after clicking on the top menu bar button Generate 3D in Expert Mode or directly the button Generate 3D in Wizard Mode. The 3D generation can be aborted using the button Abort displayed after the beginning of the 3D generation. At the end of the generation, the multiblock structured mesh can be displayed in the 3D view of the graphics area for quality analysis.
FIGURE 8.1.0-1 3D
generation
Before generating the 3D mesh, the blade-to-blade mesh should be generated on hub and shroud in order to apply an automatic reset of the expansion ratio when necessary.
AutoGrid5
8-1
3D Generation
Application Field
8-2
Application Field
The button Generate 3D of the top toolbar applies to all the selected entities of the tree. Three types of entity can be selected: the row, the meridional technological effect and the 3D technological effect. The button Select All is used to select all the entities of the tree. The button Select All Rows is used to select all the rows of the tree.
Full selection buttons Row selection
3D effect selection Meridional effect selection
FIGURE 8.2.0-1 Selection
of the application field of the button Generate 3D
The meridional effects are connected to several rows and must be generated together with these row(s) if these ones are not yet generated. If the 3D meshes of the connected row(s) are already generated, the effects can be generated alone excepted if the configuration of the row (generation parameters) has been changed after their generation. A 3D technological effect belongs to a row. If the selection does not include the row containing a selected 3D effect, AutoGrid5 prompts to confirm the 3D generation of the row.
8-3
3D Mesh - Interpolation
The 3D mesh of the rows of a turbomachinery configuration is generated using a stacking method. The flow paths are used to create the surfaces of revolution (layers) on which the blade to blade meshes are projected. The stacking method is divided into two phases: the computation of intersection between the blade(s) and the layers, and the generation and optimization of the blade to blade mesh. To reduce the generation time, it is possible to reduce the number of layers on which the mesh must be optimized. The parameter Layer Control (% span) in the Mesh Control/Row Mesh Control page in Expert Mode is used to specify the spanwise space between 2 consecutive layers on which the optimization must be done. By default the optimization is done on all the layers. A value of 25% implies that the mesh will be optimized on five layers (0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%) and interpolated between them to obtain the entire mesh.
8-2
AutoGrid5
3D Generation
FIGURE 8.3.0-1 Mesh
interpolation
The order of generation of the selected entities is:
3D mesh generation of the selected rows, 3D mesh generation of the selected meridional effects, 3D mesh generation of the selected 3D technological effects.
8-3.1
3D Blocks Naming
A limitation to the block name length to 32 characters due to the CGNS format used to perform the persistence implies that AutoGrid5 changes automatically the name of the block exceeding 32 characters, stored in the CGNS file into domain<block number>.
The name of each block is built using the name of the related configuration entities.
8-3.1.1 Row Mesh

The name of each block is built using the name of the row and the name of the related blade.
a) Default Topology - H&I Topology - HOH Topology

The block orientation I,J,K is related respectively to the azimuthal, spanwise and streamwise direction. The names of the blocks of a row named row 1 around the blade named Main Blade are:
row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_inlet (not in H&I topology when blade sharp at inlet) row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_outlet (not in H&I topology when blade sharp at outlet) row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_up (not in HOH and H&I topology) row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_down (not in HOH topology) row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_skin (not in H&I topology when blade double blunt and/or sharp) row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_skin_up (only for O4H topology when blade double blunt and/or sharp) row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_hubgap1 (if a hub gap is defined) row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_hubgap2 (if a hub gap is defined) row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_shroudgap1 (if a shroud gap is defined) row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_shroudgap2 (if a shroud gap is defined) row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_upStream (if a upstream control line is defined)
AutoGrid5
8-3
3D Generation
row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_downStream (if a downstream control line is defined)

In case of bypass configuration, the mesh of the fan is split in two fluxes and therefore the blocks are also duplicated and named using the suffixes "flux_1"and "flux_2".
b) User Defined Topology

The name of the block of a row named row 1 around the first blade named Main Blade meshed with user defined topology with 1 block for the main channel and 1 block for the gap are respectively: "row_1_userTopology_Block_1" and "row_1_userTopology_Block_2_blade_1_hubgap".
8-3.1.2 Mesh in Bulb

If an inlet bulb (hub->R=0) region is detected, the following blocks are added to the 3D mesh:
bulb_at_inlet_C (if rounded topology is chosen) bulb_at_inlet_H1 (if rounded or sharp topology is chosen) bulb_at_inlet_H2 (if rounded or sharp topology is chosen) bulb_at_inlet_butterfly_1 (if rounded topology without singular line or radial topology is chosen) bulb_at_inlet_butterfly_2 (if rounded topology without singular line or radial topology is chosen) bulb_at_inlet_butterfly_1_2 (if radial topology is chosen) bulb_at_inlet_butterfly_2_2 (if radial topology is chosen)
8-3.1.3 Mesh around Nozzle (Bypass)

If a C topology is chosen to mesh the region around the nozzle of a bypass configuration, a new block named "C_block_around_nozzle" is added.
8-3.1.4 Mesh in Meridional Technological Effect

When the mesh of a meridional effect named zr techno effect 1 is generated, following blocks are added into the 3D database:
zr_techno_effect_1_zr_effect__Block_1_3d zr_techno_effect_1_zr_effect__Block_2_3d
8-3.1.5 Mesh in 3D Technological Effect

When the mesh of a 3d effect named 3d techno effect 1 and belonging to the row named row 1 is generated, a prefix row_1_3d_techno_effect_1_ is added to each block name of the blocks generated in the 3d effect.
8-3.2
3D Boundary Condition Patches
8-3.2.1 Generation
At the end of the 3D generation, all the faces of the 3D blocks are automatically divided into patches. Each patch type is defined automatically (INL, OUT, SOL, PER, PERNM, CON, ROT, EXT,...) according to the turbomachine configuration. The boundary conditions are stored in the ".bcs" and in the ".cgns" files.
8-3.2.2 Patch Naming

Solid patches contain the name of their related entities and the location (hub,shroud,nozzle,skin_blade). Following is the list of the solid patches created for the row 1 around the Main blade with a default topology:
8-4
AutoGrid5

3D Generation
row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_inlet__hub_identifier_ row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_outlet__hub_identifier_ row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_up__hub_identifier_ row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_down__hub_identifier_ row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_skin__hub_identifier_ row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_inlet__shroud_identifier_ row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_outlet__shroud_identifier_ row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_up__shroud_identifier_ row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_down__shroud_identifier_ row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_skin__shroud_identifier_ row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_skin_blade_(aap-ps) row_1_flux_1_Main_Blade_skin_blade_(aap-ss)
8-3.3
Block Order
As the blocks are created after each call to the Generate 3D button relatively to the user selection, the block order in the final block list depends strongly on the sequence of the user interaction. To obtain similar order for similar configuration, the entire mesh must be generated using the same interactive sequence of calls to the Generate 3D button (not easy to manage). Another way to ensure a same block order is to set up the configuration and to start the full mesh generation (Select All+Generate 3D). The batch mode ensures also the same block order.
8-3.4
Generate Full Mesh
By default, the mesh is generated for 1 main blade passage. The parameter Generate Full Mesh in the dialog box Row Properties can be switched on to generate all the blade passages. The mesh is obtained by repetition of the first blade passage.
8-3.5
Number of Mesh Points.
The Mesh Control subpad displays and updates continuously an approximation of the total number of grid points of the selected entities in the Row Definition subpad. After the grid generation, the real grid points number is displayed in the information area (lower left corner of the interface).
Selection
Approximation of the total number of grid points in the selection
Total number of grid points in the current generated 3D mesh
AutoGrid5
8-5
3D Generation
Mesh Quality
8-4
Mesh Quality
After the grid generation, the menu item Grid/Grid Quality Report ( ) displays the characteristics of the mesh in terms of minimum and maximum of the expansion ratio, the aspect ratio and the cells skewness. These data are available for the entire mesh or by configurations entity (row, technological effect, bulb). Negative cells are detected and indicated on top of the histogram. The number of multigrid levels of each entity (row and technological effects) is listed in the Mg. Level column.
FIGURE 8.4.0-1
Grid quality report
After each 3D generation, all the data of the grid quality report are stored in a report file (".qualityReport"). This file is stored beside the template file (".trb"). If the project has not yet been saved, the report file creation is aborted. The quality of the 3D mesh can also be analysed block per block using the Grid/Grid Quality, Grid/Negative Cells ( ) and View/Sweep Surfaces ( ) tools (Chapter 2).
Finally, the Grid/Grid Quality Report (HTML) menu (not available on Windows) allows to automatically write a mesh quality report. When selecting the menu, a window enables to select the images that will be inserted into the report and provides disk usage necessary for the report and images (refer to section 2-3.4.5 for more details).
8-5
Template & Mesh Files
To manage complete mesh generation, AutoGrid5 integrates the concept of project. An AutoGrid5 project involves template files and mesh files:
8-6
AutoGrid5
B2B Cut
3D Generation
8-5.1
Mesh Files
The mesh files contains the multiblock mesh topology, geometry, grid points, patch grouping and the boundary condition types:
new_prefix.bcs: boundary conditions files, new_prefix.cgns: grid points files (CGNS format), new_prefix.geom and new_prefix.xmt_txt (.X_T): geometry files, new_prefix.igg: topology file, new_prefix.qualityReport: mesh quality report file, new_prefix.config: mesh configuration file used for the grouping in FINE GUI and for the SubProject (more details in FINE User Manual).
These files can be loaded into the structured multiblock grid generation system IGG and by the CFD integrated environment FINE/Turbo. The hub and shroud curves definition are saved in the .cgns file. These data are read within CFView and used to define both blade-to-blade and meridional views. The mesh quality file is saved at the end of the grid generation. If the new project has not yet been saved before launching the 3D generation, no grid quality report file will be saved because the system is not able to determine automatically the file location.
8-5.2
Template Files
The template files contain the parameters and the geometry needed to reproduce the mesh with AutoGrid5:

files (geomTurbo format),
new_prefix.trb: the template file containing the grid generation parameters, new_prefix.info: the information file, new_prefix_b2b.png: a picture of the blade to blade view, new_prefix_merid.png: a picture of the meridional view.
8-6
B2B Cut
AutoGrid5 allows to extract a blade to blade template and mesh (two layers in spanwise direction) from a 3D template (license key required). Click on the Quick Access Pad/Row Definition/ Add B2B Cut button to add a new folder B2B Cut containing an item B2B Cut 1 in the project tree. Right click on that item to open a contextual menu.
AutoGrid5
8-7
3D Generation
B2B Cut
8-6.1
Edit B2B Cut
Select Edit to open the B2B Cut Definition dialog box. This dialog box is used to define the cut geometry based on two parameters:
Spanwise Location. The user can set the spanwise location of the cut geometry based on the
percentage value. The total span is considered as 100.0. By default the Spanwise Location is set to 50.0, which is located at the mid span.
Spanwise Width. The width of the cut geometry is given as a percentage of the local spanwise
width. Therefore, the width of the mesh can change along the streamwise direction.
to blade cut at middle span
In case the flow path is already generated for all the rows, the cut definition is automatically displayed in the meridional view with yellow lines. Two yellow lines define the domain of the expected B2B mesh. These lines are derived from the flow paths definition of the 3D template and are controlled by the two parameters: spanwise location and width.
8-8
AutoGrid5
B2B Cut
3D Generation
to blade cut with 20% of span width
8-6.2
Delete B2B Cut

All the files related to the B2B cut are NOT removed from the disk.
The menu item Delete is used to remove the B2B cut definition from the template.
8-6.3
Create B2B Cut
The menu item Create is used to start the generation of the new template, which will be used to create the B2B mesh. An error message is displayed if the selected flow path is not generated for all the rows.
A new directory is created using the name of the main template as prefix. In this directory, AutoGrid5 saves the new template derived from the main geometry but with a new hub and shroud definition, based on the curves defined by the B2B Cut Definition dialog box. The new template is automatically loaded and can be used to create the B2B mesh. Before starting the blade to blade cut geometry creation, the current AutoGrid5 template must be saved. The hub and shroud patches of the mesh are defined as mirror boundary condition.
AutoGrid5
8-9
3D Generation
B2B Cut
8-10
AutoGrid5
CHAPTER 9:
Meridional Technological Effect
9-1
Overview
A turbomachinery configuration contains usually blade rows and also meridional effects like seal leakage, bleed or cavities. The solid body of the meridional effects is axisymmetric. Their geometry is defined by meridional curves (z,r coordinates). The domain of a meridional effect must always be connected to one or more blade row(s).
Meridional effect
row with meridional effect
The mesh of these configuration entities are generated in five steps:
definition of the meridional geometry defining the technological effect, definition of the new technological effect entities in the configuration database, choice of the connection type with the main blade channel, definition of the meridional mesh:
manual blocking in the meridional space, automatic settings of the mesh point clustering in the meridional space, 3D mesh generation obtained by the combination of the meridional blocking and the mesh at the
connection(s) with the blade row(s).
AutoGrid5
9-1
Configuration Management
This chapter describes the grid generation of the meridional effects. The number of meridional effects is unlimited.
9-2
Configuration Management
The Rows Definition subpad of the Quick Access Pad contains features used to control the meridional effects. New effects can be added into the configuration tree and managed through their contextual menus.
Add a new effect
Right-click
Edit selected effect Delete selected effect(s)
Effect list New effects
effect management
The option Add ZR Effect creates a new entity in the configuration database and displays it into the Meridional Techno Effects list of the tree. Right-click on this new items of the tree opens the contextual menu of the meridional effects. It gives access to the editing mode allowing the user to define the new effects or to delete the selected effects. The effects can be renamed by double-clicking on their name into the tree. An interaction area prompts to enter a new name for the selected effect.
9-3
Geometry Definition
The geometry of a meridional effects is defined by (z,r) curves displayed in the meridional view. Before starting the definition of a technological effect, the geometry must be imported in the meridional view. Notice that the Geometry menu available in the meridional effect edition mode can be used to define the geometry. Nevertheless, the name (Geometry/Modify Curve/Set Name...) of the created curve must contain the keyword "inlet", "outlet", "solid", "external" or "rotor_stator" to ensure the automatic definition of the boundary conditions.
9-2
AutoGrid5
Geometry Definition
9-3.1
The ".geomTurbo" File
The curves defining the meridional effects are specified in the ".geomTurbo" file using the basic curve format (Chapter 3).
9-3.2
CAD Import
The solid bodies of the meridional effects can be imported (Import Meridional) from external CAD files using Import CAD window. The curves defining these bodies are selected interactively and projected in the meridional view (Chapter 5).
CAD window - Import Meridional
9-3.3
User Defined
AutoGrid5 provides geometrical features used to create the solid body of meridional effects interactively. New polylines can be created using Geometry Control subpad in the meridional effect edition mode and the steps needed to create these polylines are stored in the template file.
FIGURE 9.3.3-1 Edition
mode - geometry control subpad
AutoGrid5
9-3
Definition of Meridional Mesh
9-4
9-4.1

Start Edition Mode
The meridional mesh of a technological effect is built into the edition mode available through the Edit menu item of the contextual menu open when right-click on a ZR technological effect of the tree. The Quick Access Pad is updated to access the features needed to create the meridional mesh. The graphical area displays the meridional view of all the curves defining the meridional solid body of the turbomachinery. The button Close Edition Mode of the top menu bar is used to quit the edition mode. All the actions performed during an editing session are stored in the template file (".trb") and can be replayed on similar geometries. The Quick Access Pad is divided into four main areas (subpad):
the Geometry Control provides options used to create polyline. the Topology Control is used to fill the domain of the effect with several structured 2D blocks. the Topology Default is used to set up automatically the grid points clustering into the defined blocks the View page is used to control the visualization inside the graphics area.
Quit Edition Mode
FIGURE 9.4.1-1 Edition
mode
9-4
AutoGrid5
9-4.2
Edition Mode
An editing session is divided into three main steps.
9-4.2.1 Geometry Control

The Geometry Control subpad of the Quick Access Pad provides five options to add polylines. These curves are eventually used to close the domain defined by the solid body or to create the separation line in case of multiple connections (see section 9-5.2). It is not required to add a curve at the connection between the blade channel (hub or shroud) and the meridional effect. Automatically the hub and shroud curves will be used as limit of the meridional effect. When a button is pressed, an interactive tool is started waiting for points input:
Left-click to confirm the creation of a new control point of the polyline. Right-click to finish the creation process and stop the tool.
During the creation process, automatic attraction is done on the curve display in the graphics area.
polyline generation tool
Open geometry must be closed using a polyline
Effect with multiple connections with the main blade channel must be divided by a rotor/stator polyline
FIGURE 9.4.2-1 Geometry
generation
AutoGrid5
9-5
The type of the polyline can be inlet, outlet, external, solid or rotor/stator. The type is chosen according to the CFD requirement. It is not recommended to have a meridional effect covering a rotor/stator control line in the blade channel.
Meridional Effect
BLADE 1
Rotor/Stator Interface
BLADE 2
effect vs. rotor/stator interface
When creating a separation line, a rotor/stator polyline must be used. In case of blunt edges, meridional control lines (Zcst line) can be added at the leading and/or the trailing edge(s) by activating the corresponding options in the Mesh page of the Define B2B Topology for Active Blade dialog box (section 6-2.4.1). At the end of the 3D generation, the hub and the shroud patches of the mesh are divided (black dots) at the Z cst lines located at the leading and/or trailing edge in order to allow a matching connection with a ZR effect. When editing the ZR effect, new points (black dots) are displayed to attract the block vertices at the exact point to assume a matching connection between the ZR effect and the core flow.
mapping SHROUD
BLADE
INLET LEADING EDGE TRAILING EDGE
OUTLET
HUB
management with the control points
9-4.2.2 Topology Control

The domain defining a technological effect must be filled by several structured 2D blocks. The block edges are mapped on the geometry. The Topology Control subpad provides the tools to creates and control the blocks.
9-6
AutoGrid5
Topology control tools
Four blocks topology
FIGURE 9.4.2-4 Topology
definition
The Topology Control subpad provides six tools used to create and control the blocks topology.
a) Create & Modify New Block

The icon starts the block creation tools. When moving the mouse into the graphics area a default block geometry appears. Left-click twice to select the location of two opposite corners of the block and left-click again to confirm the creation. The four vertices defining the corners of the block are displayed. These vertices can be selected interactively (left-click) and mapped (attracted) onto the geometry. The block edges are automatically mapped on the geometry curves if their vertices are mapped on an underlying curve. Block connection must be established on the separation lines (Figure 9.4.2-5) and the mapping of vertices respected (no orphan vertices). When a separation line is used, the block should be connected to the rotor/stator polyline with a complete face. For example, in Figure 9.4.2-6, in both cases, the block 2 is only presenting a vertex linked to the rotor/stator polyline and not a full face. In such cases, the meridional effect will not be meshed and lead to a warning. The solution is thus to move the separation line in a more appropriate area.
separation line
vertices mapping
AutoGrid5
9-7
Block 2 Block 2 Block 1 Block 1
Rotor/Stator Interface in ZR Effect Rotor/Stator Interface in ZR Effect
ZR Effect 1
ZR Effect 2
face not fully connected on separation line (rotor/stator polyline)
b) Delete Existing Blocks

The icon opens the dialog box used to delete several existing block.
Confirmation box
FIGURE 9.4.2-7 Delete
block(s)
Select the block interactively (left-click on an edge) and press the button Delete into the dialog box Delete blocks. Confirm the deletion into the confirmation box.
c) Insert New Control Vertices

The icon is used to insert a new control vertex on a edge. It is needed when the edge must be mapped on multiple curves: a vertex must be added at each boundary of the mapped curves. Use the short-cut <i> to activate this command in a faster way.
d) Grid Points Clustering

The icon opens a dialog box use to control manually the grid points clustering along each edge of the blocks when the automatic default topology is not used (Default Topology subpad).
e) Grid Point Number Control

The number of points on each edge can be controlled manually through the dialog box Set Number of Points when the automatic default topology is not used (Default Topology subpad). Right-click on the desired edge to access the contextual menu and select the item Set Number of Points.
9-8
AutoGrid5
the number of points
Enter the new number of points in the Set Number of Points area and press Apply.
9-4.2.3 Automatic Default Topology

The manual settings described in section 9-4.2.2.d and section 9-4.2.2.e are optional. AutoGrid5 provides a feature to set up automatically the number of points and the grid points clustering. Before starting if necessary the manual edition of the grid point number and the grid point clustering, described in section 9-4.2.2.d and section 9-4.2.2.e, an automatic setting must be performed. The defaults are computed according to four parameters:
the maximum expansion ratio of the cells along the solid body of the effect. the percentage of cells with equal width on the solid boundaries. the first cell width in the boundary layer. the coarsest grid level requested to impose the number of grid points that will respect the constraints related to the multigrid treatment within FINE GUI (default level is set to 3). expansion ratio = 1.4 % cst. cell = 33
expansion ratio = 1.8 % cst. cell = 0

FIGURE 9.4.2-9
Default grid points clustering
AutoGrid5
9-9
Each time the button Default Topology is pressed, all the manual settings are erased by the new default.
9-4.2.4 Optimization Steps

The Optimization Steps parameter in the Topology Default subpad allows the user to specify the number of iteration done by the optimization system.
9-4.2.5 Radial Expansion

When the effect simulate the expansion of the main blade channel mesh to the far field (wind turbine), the Radial Expansion option activates full optimization of the far field mesh to avoid high clustering of the mesh in this region of the domain. The Far Field Smoothing Steps parameter controls the number of optimization steps that will be applied.
9-4.2.6 Automatic Detection Tools

The button Detect Unmapped Edges is used to visualize the face edge unmapped on an existing meridional curves. Check the vertices linked to the edges. The unmapped edges are displayed in the view and the number of detected unmapped segments appears in the message area.
FIGURE 9.4.2-10 Visualize
unmapped edges
The buttons Detect Channel Matching/FNMB Connection are used to detect the type of connection between the meridional effect and the blade channel (more details in section 9-5.1) according to an absolute connectivity tolerance (Matching Tolerance) by default set to 1e-8.
FIGURE 9.4.2-11 Visualize
channel matching connection
9-10
AutoGrid5
When the Periodic Full Non Matching option is active, the full non matching connection of the meridional effect with the channel mesh will not follow the shape of the blade to blade mesh. That allows to reach a better mesh quality in the meridional effect. In Figure 9.4.2-12, the blocks of the meridional effect connected to the channel mesh are twisted when the option is not active and that may damage the grid quality.
Full Non Matching option
When the Propagate Theta Deviation option is active, when the number of blocks is above 2 in the ZR effect, the angle deviation of the connected mesh will be propagated and allow in specific cases to avoid mesh with bad orthogonality.
Two blocks in ZR effect
AutoGrid5
9-11
Connection with Main Blade Channel
9-5
9-5.1

Connection Types
The connections between the main blade channel row meshes and the mesh created into a ZR technological effect domain are full non-matching by default. To obtain a matching connection, control lines must be added (Chapter 6) at the connection points between the meridional effect and the main blade channel. Connections
Z constant lines
FIGURE 9.5.1-1 Connection
with main blade channel
When the option Periodic Full Non Matching is active (by default), a periodic full non matching connection with repetition (section 2-3.4.2) will be created between the ZR effect and the mesh channel to improve the mesh quality in the ZR effect. To improve non-matching connections, it is advised to add control lines at the connection points and to switch off their B2B Control (Figure 6.2.4-2). When the grid points distributions in the streamwise direction in the blade row mesh is too coarse at the connection level, mesh overlaps can appear in the mesh of the connected effect. Too avoid this, the number of points in the row can be increased or matching connection must be used.
Row Mesh
FIGURE 9.5.1-2
Mesh problem with non-matching connection
9-12
AutoGrid5
If the control lines are correctly set, the matching connection can be ensured for all the connection types:
upstream - blade - downstream connections
both on upstream & blade connection
both on downstream & blade connection
from inlet to outlet connection types
FIGURE 9.5.1-3 Connection
9-5.2
Multiple Connections
Some of the technological effects have several connections with the main blade channel, i.e. a seal leakage have a connection upstream the blade and a connection downstream the blade. In this case the mesh created inside the domain of the effect is divided into two parts: one starting from the inlet and one starting from the outlet. At the middle part of the seal leakage, a line must be defined indicating the location of the division. At this line (Rotor-Stator Polyline), defined in the edition mode (Figure 9.4.2-1), the two parts of the mesh will be connected by a non-matching periodic connection if the connections with the main blade channel are related to the same row (case 1) or a rotor/ stator interface if the connections with the main blade channel are related to different rows (case 2). Part 1 Part 2 Part 1 Part 2
Connection line
Connection line
Connection with main blade channel CASE 1: connection line becomes a non-matching connection between part 1 and part 2
FIGURE 9.5.2-1 Multiple
Connection with main blade channel CASE 2: connection line becomes a rotor/stator interface between part 1 and part2
connections with main blade channel
AutoGrid5
9-13
3D Generation
9-6
3D Generation
Selection of the technological effect and the connected row(s)
start 3D generation
Periodic connection Part 1 and Part2 of the effect
Row Mesh
FIGURE 9.6.0-1 3D
mesh of the technological effect
The 3D generation of the meridional effect must be performed together with the generation of the row(s) connected with them. Select the row(s) and their attached meridional effects and press the Generate 3D button of the top menu bar.
9-14
AutoGrid5
CHAPTER 10: 3D Technological Effect
10-1 Overview
A turbomachinery configuration contains usually blade rows and also 3D effects like cooling holes. The solid body of the 3D effects are non-axisymmetric. Their geometries are defined by 3D curves or surfaces (x,y,z coordinates). The 3D effects are always linked to one blade row(s). The mesh of these configuration entities are generated in 3 steps:
definition of the new technological effect entities in the configuration database geometry definition of the domain defining the technological effect definition of the 3D mesh: manual blocking in the 3D space load a existing template in the effect library
This chapter describes the grid generation of 3D effects. The number of 3D effects is unlimited.
10-2 Configuration Management

The Rows Definition subpad of the left Quick Access Pad contains features used to control the 3D effects. New effects can be added into the configuration tree and managed through their contextual menus. A 3D effect belongs to a row. The related row must be selected before creating a new effect. The option Add 3D Effect creates a new entity in the configuration database and display it into the row selected in the tree. Right-click on this new items of the tree opens the contextual menu of the 3D effects. It gives access to:
Edit : the editing mode allowing the user to define mesh of the new effects Load Geometry : the geometry definition. A file chooser is used to select the geometry data file
containing the curves and surfaces defining the effect body.
Delete Effect(s) : the effect deletion tools Library : the effect library
AutoGrid5
10-1
3D Technological Effect
Geometry Definition
Copy/Paste Topology : the copy/paste topology feature allowing the user to apply to an effect
the topology of another. The effects can be renamed by double clicking on their name into the tree. A interaction area prompts to enter a new name for the selected effect.
contextual 3d effect menu
New effects
Effect list
FIGURE 10.2.0-1
3D effect management
10-3 Geometry Definition

The geometry of a 3D effects is defined by (x,y,z) curves and/or surfaces displayed in the XYZ view when editing the effect. Before starting the definition of the mesh of a technological effect, the geometry can be defined through:
10-3.1 External Data File

The curves and surfaces defining the solid body of one effect are stored into one file. The contextual menu item Load Geometry opens a file chooser to select this file.
10-3.2 CAD Import

The solid bodies of the 3D effects are stored in multiple data files. The Geometry Definition/ Import and Link CAD menu opens the Import CAD window allowing the user to select and link data curves and surfaces defining the solid body of the selected effect in the tree. All the grid generation process of the 3D effect is stored into a python script. During the grid generation, the names of the geometry entities are used to identify the topology links. As the name of each geometry entity must be unique, it is impossible to reuse the grid generation method of one effect to another without respecting the following rule: the name of each entity must be composed with a prefix and a suffix separated by a # character. The prefix is used to identify the effect and the suffix is used to make the link with the topology (i.e.: effect1#curve1).
10-2
AutoGrid5
Edition Mode
10-4 Edition Mode

The meridional mesh of a technological effect is build into the edition mode available through the Edit menu item of the contextual menu open when right click on a 3D technological effect of the tree. The Quick Access Pad is updated to access the features needed to create the 3D mesh. The graphical area displays in the 3D view all the curves and surfaces linked to the effect and the row mesh related to the effect.
Right click on the desired effect opens a contextual menu. The menu item Edit start the edition mode
Quit Edition Mode
Row mesh
Hole geometry
FIGURE 10.4.0-1 Start
edition mode
All the operations performed during an editing session are stored into a script. The grid generation options available in the Quick Access Pad are fully described in the IGG User Manual. The mesh generation of a 3D technological effect is performed by creating structured blocks used to fill the domain covered by the effect.
AutoGrid5
10-3
Topology Management
domain and mesh
The edition mode is left by clicking on the Close Edition Mode button.
10-5 Topology Management

10-5.1 3D effect library
When an effect has been created, the mesh definition process can be stored in a dynamic library. Library access
Topology list
Overwrite or create a new library item
FIGURE 10.5.1-1 3D
effect library management
10-4
AutoGrid5
Topology Management
The contextual menu item Library opens the dialog box 3D Technological Effect Library. This dialog box contains the list of the available topology. The selected topology can be loaded and apply to the selected 3D effect using the button Load. The selected topology can be remove from the list using the button Remove. The topology of the active 3D effect can be stored in the library using the button Save: the dialog box Save 3D Topology is opened allowing the user to define a new 3D topology or to overwrite an existing one. The selected topology can be applied simultaneously to several similar 3D effect. If the geometry of the effect is already loaded, the mesh is automatically generated using the selected topology.
10-5.2 Copy/Paste Feature

The 3D mesh topology of the selected 3D effect can be copied into a buffer and apply to other effect using the contextual menus Copy Topology and Paste Topology. Several similar effects can be selected to apply simultaneously the topology stored in the buffer using the Paste Topology options.
Copy/Paste Topology access
FIGURE 10.5.2-1
Topology copy & paste on several effects
AutoGrid5
10-5
3D Generation & Persistency
10-6 3D Generation & Persistency

The mesh generation is performed by the Generate 3D button. All the selected 3D effects are generated after the selected rows and the selected meridional effects.
Selection of the technological effect and the connected row 3D Effects
start 3D generation
Row Mesh
FIGURE 10.6.0-1 3D
mesh of the technological effect
The 3D effect generation is stored into the template file (".trb") using python script format:
NI_BEGIN 3d effect NAME3d techno effect 1 NI_BEGIN ni3dlayer_recorder NI_BEGIN ni3dlayer_record effect_techno3d_Block_1=new_block(Point(0.0710714235901833,0.169539034366608,0.071651391685009),Point(0.0710714235862563,0.169539034370535,0.0786721184810469),Point(0.0710714235811796,0.175077691649889,0.071651391681911),Point(0.0710714235772526,0.175077691653816,0.0786721184779489),Point(0.0836308076926963,0.169539034346191,0.071651391692034),Point(0.0836308076887693,0.169539034350118,0.0786721184880719),Point(0.0836308077017,0.175077691670305,-0.071651391688936),Point(0.083630807697773,0.175077691674232,0.0786721184849739)) move_vertex(vertex("effect_techno3d_Block_1",2,1,2),CurvePointNorm("surface1_bnd_3",0.326043824876047)) move_vertex(vertex("effect_techno3d_Block_1",2,1,1),CurvePointNorm("surface1_bnd_3",0.710139595042077)) move_vertex(vertex("effect_techno3d_Block_1",2,2,1),CurvePointNorm("surface1_bnd_1",0)) move_vertex(vertex("effect_techno3d_Block_1",2,2,2),CurvePointNorm("surface1_bnd_3",0.157843756497119)) move_vertex(vertex("effect_techno3d_Block_1",1,2,1),CurvePointNorm("curve1",1)) move_vertex(vertex("effect_techno3d_Block_1",1,2,2),CurvePointNorm("curve1",0.162994599914628)) move_vertex(vertex("effect_techno3d_Block_1",1,1,1),CurvePointNorm("curve1",0.728237079858547)) move_vertex(vertex("effect_techno3d_Block_1",1,1,2),CurvePointNorm("curve1",0.431818181829508)) NI_END ni3dlayer_record NI_END ni3dlayer_recorder NI_END 3d effect
When making a 3D effect in AutoGrid5, it may be necessary to create some additional curves. The steps creating these curves are recorded in the template but the template cannot be replayed without manual modification as the curve names vary per IGG session. Therefore the user should either import an external CAD file with pre-defined names or the user should (re)name the curve immediately after creation in the interface, otherwise because of the curves and surfaces naming, the project may fail.
10-6
AutoGrid5
CHAPTER 11: Cooling & Conjugate
Heat Transfer Modules

11-1 Overview
This chapter describes the conjugate heat transfer and the cooling capabilities included in AutoGrid5:
The conjugate heat transfer (CHT) capability allows the mesh generation of the blade and the
end wall solid bodies.
The cooling capability allows the mesh generation of basin, basin holes, blade holes, end wall
holes and cooling channel with pins fins and ribs. The module is only compatible with the default O4H topology on single blade configuration and thus not for splitter(s) or tandem rows configuration
11-2 Conjugate Heat Transfer

By default AutoGrid5 generates the mesh of the core flow around the blades including the hub and shroud gap area. The conjugate heat transfer module allows the mesh generation of the solid body of the blade and the end walls.
11-2.1 Mesh of Blade Solid Body

The menu item Blade/Add Solid Body can be used to activate the generation of the solid body of the blades. A new item is automatically added into the configuration tree indicating that the solid body generation is activated.
Right-click
AutoGrid5
11-1
Cooling & Conjugate Heat Transfer Modules
Conjugate Heat Transfer
The mesh into the blade is created using a butterfly topology like in the shroud/hub gap. The connection between the solid body and the fluid area is matching.
FIGURE 11.2.1-1 Mesh
of the blade solid body
Once the solid body generation has been activated, right-clicking on the new item in the tree opens a contextual menu of the solid body.
This menu gives access to:
Delete: deletes the solid body entry from the configuration tree. Configuration: opens a dialog box to choose one of the twelve solid body configurations. Click
on the desired image to choose the solid body configuration.
solid body configuration
11-2
AutoGrid5
By default, the blade solid body configuration ( ) type is chosen. All the other choices imply the definition of an internal offset shape of the blade. This is used to define the basin, the squiller tip, the cooling channel area or the area inside which spanwise holes are defined. In such cases, the mesh topology covering the solid body area of the blade is divided into four blocks: two blocks for a butterfly topology covering the area inside the internal offset shape and two blocks defining another butterfly topology in the area between the offset and the blade definition. blade internal offset
The blade solid body is not applicable:
for multi-splitter configuration (except for the default blade solid body configuration) for blunt blades (except for the default blade solid body configuration)
11-2.1.1 Solid Body Configuration

Depending of the type of the solid body, the configuration tree will automatically updated. Indeed, the entries controlling the basin depth, the basin wall width, the cooling channel, the tip wall width will be automatically introduced into the Solid Body folder in the configuration tree. In addition, shroud gap and or hub gap entry can also be added or removed automatically when changing the type of solid body. Following sections describes the twelve available types of solid body and their corresponding configuration tree.
a) Solid Body Configuration (Default)

In this configuration, the blade solid body is meshed using a butterfly topology like in the shroud/ hub gap. The connection between the solid body and the fluid area is matching (Figure 11.2.1-1).
b) Solid Body + Spanwise Holes Configuration

In this configuration, the blade solid body is meshed and spanwise holes are allowed. A shroud gap or hub gap can be defined.
AutoGrid5
11-3
c) Solid Body + Cooling Channel Configuration

A shroud gap must be defined in this configuration. The blade solid body is meshed and a tip wall and a cooling channel are defined. Spanwise tip wall holes and blade holes are allowed.
Similar configuration with hub gap is not available
d) Solid Body + Basin Configuration

A shroud gap must be defined in this configuration. The blade solid body is meshed and a basin is defined. Spanwise holes are allowed.
e) Solid Body + Basin + Cooling Channel Configuration

A shroud gap must be defined in this configuration. The blade solid body is meshed and a cooling channel, a basin and a basin wall are defined. Spanwise basin wall holes and blade holes are allowed.
11-4
AutoGrid5
f) Solid Body + Cooling Channel Configuration

In this configuration, the blade solid body is meshed and a cooling channel is defined. Blade holes are allowed. A shroud gap or hub gap can be defined but the tip wall has no width.
g) Solid Body + Penny Configuration

A shroud and/or hub gap must be defined in this configuration. The blade solid body is meshed and a penny is defined at hub and/or shroud. Spanwise tip wall holes and blade holes are not allowed.
The location and the diameter of the penny can be controlled in a way similar to the basin hole.
h) Solid Body + Squiller Tip Configuration

A shroud gap must be defined in this configuration. The blade solid body is meshed and a squiller tip is defined. Spanwise tip wall holes and blade holes are not allowed. Three types of squiller tips are available.
AutoGrid5
11-5
11-2.1.2 Internal Offset Shape Control

In a cooled turbine blade, basin and internal cooling channel area are defined by a unique offset surface area of the blade. The squiller tips are defined in a similar way. The geometry definition of the offset surface is done using the Cooling Geometry Definition dialog box available when right-clicking on Solid Body in the configuration tree and selecting the Define Internal Geometry menu.
The surface(s) defining the internal lateral cooling area and the basin can be defined as a blade definition from:
a parametric definition using the blade definition as reference. an external ".geomTurbo" file. an external CAD data file.
a) Parametric Mode
By default when a cooling wall has been defined, AutoGrid5 is using a parametric definition for the cooling wall. The default parameters can be modified in the Cooling Geometry Definition dialog box.
blade
left-click
internal offset
11-6
AutoGrid5
The user can control the shape of the offset (by left-clicking on the entity when highlighted in red) and the type of offset at the trailing edge (Blunt Trailing Edge option). If the blade to blade generation has already been performed, the new curve defining the offset is automatically displayed in the blade to blade view. In addition, the Control Points Number along the chord used to defined the offset can be also modified. The shape of the offset area is defined according to starting and ending distance along the chord and the width is computed normally to the chord definition.
b) External ".geomTurbo" File

If the internal offset surface is defined using a ".geomTurbo" file, the option From External Data has to be activated.
When clicking on the Load a Geometry File button, a file chooser allows to select an external ".geomTurbo" file. If the offset definition is blunt, an automatic blending (using circular shape) can be performed to close the cooling wall surface (Blend at Leading/Trailing Edge options). A geometry check can be performed when clicking on the Check Geometry button to detect possible problems in the geometry definition (the dialog box is presented in section 5-7.1).
c) External CAD Data File

If the internal offset surface is defined using an external CAD file, the option From External Data has to be activated.
When clicking on the Load a Geometry File button, a file chooser allows to select an external CAD file. After the selection, the Import CAD window displays the data and the manual linking must be performed to define the blade surfaces, the leading edge and the trailing edge as for the blade definition (more details in section 5-3). If the offset definition is blunt, an automatic blending (using circular shape) can be performed to close the cooling wall surface (Blend at Leading/Trailing Edge options)
AutoGrid5
11-7
A geometry check can be performed when clicking on the Check Geometry button to detect possible problems in the geometry definition (the dialog box is presented in section 5-7.1).
11-2.1.3 Leading/Trailing Edge Wizard

The leading and trailing edge curves can be defined by the user by adding a wizard to the solid body through the menu Add Wizard LE TE. This menu will add an item Wizard LE TE in the solid body configuration tree. More details are available in section 5-5.3.
11-2.1.4 Basin / Tip Wall / Basin Bottom Wall Definition

The basin depth, the tip wall and the bottom basin wall width are defined as for shroud/hub gaps, by giving a width at the leading edge and at the trailing edge. In addition as for the gaps, the number of layer (Number of Points) and the layer clustering (Cell Width and Percentage of Mid-flow Cells) to define the basin, tip wall and basin wall in the meridional view can be controlled. The contextual menu Properties when right-clicking on the configuration tree on Basin, Tip Wall and Basin Wall opens the corresponding dialog box allowing to control these parameters.

The Mesh Properties dialog box gives access to the mesh generation control parameters, when right-clicking on Solid Body in the configuration tree and selecting the Mesh Properties menu;
11-8
AutoGrid5
a) Blade to Blade Control

a.1) Internal Cooling Wall Streamwise Distribution.
Near the trailing edge, by default (Optimized option) the grid points distribution along the solid wall of the blade is clustered around the location of the internal cooling wall definition.
Clustering
N2
If the option Same as blade Wall is selected, the grid points distribution along the internal solid wall will follow the clustering of the blade wall. The number of points (N) located between the end of the cooling wall and the trailing edge can be modified using the parameters Number of Points at Trailing Edge. When this number is increased, the number of points on both sides of the blade also is increasing.
AutoGrid5
11-9

a.2) Number of Points in O-Mesh (Solid Blade Area)
The number of points (N2 in above figure) in the azimuthal direction defining the width of the blade solid mesh can be modified with the parameters Number of points in O mesh (Solid Blade Area). The clustering in the azimuthal direction defining the width of the blade solid mesh can be switched off with the parameter Relax the B2B Mesh Clustering.
a.3) Special Configuration: Inserted Cooling Tube

When the configuration is presenting inserted cooling tubes, these entities can be meshed by defining a cooling channel (section 11-2.1.2) and a skin wall.
Inserted Cooling Tube
Blade Solid Body
Skin Wall
Cooling Channel
The inserted cooling tube will be considered as a blade including a cooling channel (fluid block) and the skin wall will be used to mesh the fluid area outside of the tube but inside of the real blade. Blade Inserted Cooling Tube
Blade Blade Skin Block
Cooling Channel
Skin Wall Cooling Channel
11-10
AutoGrid5
The clustering near the trailing edge of the cooling wall is no more suitable for inserted cooling tubes. Furthermore, the parameter Internal Cooling Wall Streamwise Distribution must be set to the value Same as blade Wall. The boundary shape of the skin mesh around the blade can also be imposed using the Add Skin Wall menu when right-clicking on the Main Blade in the configuration tree. A new entity named Skin Mesh Boundary is displayed in the configuration tree.
Right-click
Right-click
The contextual menu Define Geometry when right-clicking on the Skin Mesh Boundary in the configuration tree allows to select a ".geomTurbo" file defining the boundary of the skin mesh. After selecting Skin Mesh Boundary in the configuration tree, the skin wall can also be defined using the Import CAD window by linking the blade surfaces, the leading edge and the trailing edge as for the blade definition (more details in section 5-3). In addition, two control lines (defined in the spanwise direction) can be added into the ".geomTurbo" file to define two local points of the skin wall shape that needs to be captured by the mesh. These grid lines are useful in case of a skin wall that has to be connected (full non matching connection) afterwards with the solid mesh parts of the real blade. These lines are defined using the following format into the geomTurbo:
trailing_edge_ctrl_lineDown XYZ 17 20.8472883616038 260.874260274711 34.1192884895623 21.7475411710475 264.244225444529 33.8239451407291 trailing_edge_ctrl_lineUp XYZ 17 15.6694535592452 261.001553719178 29.429748564263 16.4764220438766 264.405454725162 29.0497779354983
AutoGrid5
11-11
Full Non Matching
Solid Block
Connections
Trailing Edge Curves
Solid Block
Finally, when the cooling channel and the skin wall are defined, the mesh of the inserted cooling tube area can be meshed after deactivating the option Around the Skin Mesh in the 3D Control as presented in section below.
b) 3D Control
The Activate Mesh Generation parameters control the areas that will be removed from the mesh after the grid generation of the blade holes (section 11-3). The Layer Control (%span) in the Mesh Control/Row Mesh Control area of the Quick Access Pad is not available when generating the mesh of the blade solid body.
11-2.2 Mesh of End Wall Solid Body

By default, AutoGrid5 creates the fluid core flow around the blade and the boundary condition with the solid body of the end walls is set to solid. The menu items Row/Add Hub Wall and Row/ Add Shroud Wall can be used to mesh a part of the end walls automatically within AutoGrid5. The items Hub Wall and Shroud Wall are automatically added into the configuration tree.
Right-click
11-12
AutoGrid5
11-2.2.1 Geometry Definition

The Properties menu available when right-clicking on the Hub Wall and/or Shroud Wall in the configuration tree opens a dialog box used to control the width of the selected end wall.
The end walls representation is automatically displayed in the meridional view.
11-2.2.2 Topology Definition

The Properties menu available when right-clicking on the Hub Wall and/or Shroud Wall in the configuration tree opens a dialog box used to control the number of points used to mesh the end wall in the spanwise direction and the width of the end wall.
The mesh is created using a matching connection between the core flow and the solid body of the end wall and therefore no more parameters are needed to control the mesh generation. The Generation Type allows to control the mesh generation in the end walls: normal to the wall or along Z-cst lines (Radial (Z cst)).
AutoGrid5
11-13
Cooling - Blade Holes
11-2.2.3 3D Mesh Generation

The Generate menu available when right-clicking on the Hub Wall and/or Shroud Wall in the configuration tree is used to start the 3D generation of the selected end wall. The 3D mesh of the selected end wall will only be generated if the 3D mesh of the core flow is already available.
The option Generate End Wall available when pressing the Generate 3D button of the top menu bar can also be activated to involve the grid generation of the end wall after the mesh generation of the selected row.
11-3 Cooling - Blade Holes

The meshes generated by AutoGrid5 using the default topology contain one block surrounding the blade, called the skin block. This block is used to generate high grid quality in the boundary layer. The solid body of the blade contains also a similar O-block connected to the skin block using a matching connection in configurations where a cooling wall has been defined, These blocks will take an important place in the methodology used to create the mesh in the blade holes and around the blade holes. They will be called matrix blocks in the following sections.
11-3.1 Blade Holes Methodology

When adding a cooling hole in the blade, the following steps will be performed to create the mesh in the blade hole and around the blade hole:
11-14
AutoGrid5
1.
The intersections between the hole (or hole line) and the matrix are computed by AutoGrid5.
2.
The intersection curves are projected in the parametric space of the matrix.
3.
A default mesh topology inside and around the hole definition is created.
The topology is composed by eight blocks surrounding the holes, a butterfly topology inside the holes and a O block defining the boundary layer around the hole.
4. 5.
A default mesh is created using the row mesh clustering based on the parameters selected in the Mesh Control/Row Mesh Control area of the Quick Access Pad. The mesh is optimized.
6. 7. 8.
The hole mesh is projected in the 3D space and the matrix block is divided. The hole meshes replace some of the divided matrix areas. The connection between the matrix area and the core flow becomes full non matching. The connection between the internal cooling area (cooling channel, basin, basin wall) and the solid body of the blade becomes full non matching.
AutoGrid5
11-15
9.
The matrix is divided in spanwise direction near the hub and the shroud to preserve the boundary layer of the main channel. The connection between the upper part of the matrix and the middle part becomes full non matching. The connection between the lower part of the matrix and the middle part becomes full non matching. The matrix is divided in meridional direction according to the hole line mesh location. The connection between the hole line mesh and the matrix becomes full non matching.
10.
11-3.2 Blade Holes Properties

The Add Hole Line menu available when right-clicking on Main Blade adds a new hole line entity in the configuration tree. By default a new hole line contains a single hole that is automatically displayed in the meridional view.
Right-click
11-16
AutoGrid5
The Properties menu available when right-clicking on the holes line 1 opens a dialog box to control the geometry and the mesh of the selected line of holes.
Right-click
The Preview 3D and Hide 3D buttons (as the Preview/Hide 3D Location menus) are used to perform a quick display of the 3D definition of the cylinder used to define the holes. The 3D display is only available if the matrix block is available when the 3D mesh generation of the row has already been completed. Each modification of any hole lines parameter implies an automatic refresh of the display.
11-3.2.1 Geometry Control

In the Blade Cooling Holes Line Definition, the Geometry thumbnail gives access to the parameters controlling the geometry of the line of holes.
a) Holes Number Control

The number of holes in a line can be modified through the parameter Number of Hole on the Line.
b) Holes Shape Control

Seven different types of holes can be defined: circular, rectangular, oval, circular at trailing edge (trailing edge holes), groove at trailing edge, 4 sided and oval at trailing edge.
AutoGrid5
11-17

For each type, the parameters controlling the geometry are different.
The trailing edge grooves are only available for mesh with blunt cooling wall.
c) Holes Location Control

The location of a hole is defined by the 3D anchor point of its axis. Three modes can be used to define this point.
c.1) Parametric Mode

Using the Parametric mode, the side (Upper Side/Lower Side) of the blade where the holes must be located is selected as well as the Spanwise Location and the Streamwise Location. The Spanwise Location is defined by the meridional starting (Start) and ending (End) point of the line. These locations are given in percentage of span. The holes are automatically redistributed using an equidistant distribution. The Streamwise Location can be entered using three modes:
% of meridional chord: the streamwise location is computed in the meridional plane by giving
a percentage of the distance between the leading edge and the trailing edge.
% of arc length from LE: the streamwise location is computed in the 3D space by giving a percentage of the arc length along the blade definition starting from the leading edge.
% of arc length from TE: the streamwise location is computed in the 3D space by giving a percentage of the arc length along the blade definition starting from the trailing edge. When using the % of meridional chord mode, the quick display will be an approximation of the hole location.
c.2) XYZ Mode (Px,Py,Pz)

Using the Px,Py,Pz mode, the axis anchor point location of each hole of the line is directly entered in absolute Cartesian coordinates.
c.3) RTHZ Mode (Pr,Pth,Pz)

Using the Pr,Pth,Pz mode, the axis anchor point location of each hole of the line is directly entered in absolute cylindrical coordinates.
The Parametric mode is applied to the entire holes line. Each modification of a parameter affects all the holes of the line. To modify a single hole location, first the parametric mode is used to define globally the hole line, than the mode can be switched to XYZ (Px,Py,Pz) or RTHZ (Pr,Pth,Pz) mode to relocate the selected hole.
11-18
AutoGrid5
Cooling - Blade Holes d) Holes Axis Control
The axis of each hole can be controlled separately and/or globally for all the holes belonging to a line using three different modes.
d.1) Parametric Mode

The axis is controlled by giving the spanwise (Alpha) and the streamwise (Beta) deviation from the blade surface normal.
d.2) XYZ Mode (Vx,Vy,Vz)

The axis is given by entering the three absolute Cartesian coordinates of the vector (Vx,Vy,Vz).
d.3) RTHZ Mode (Pr,Pth,Pz)

The axis is given by entering the three cylindrical coordinates of the vector (Vr,Vth,Vz). The Parametric mode is applied to the entire holes line. Each modification of a parameter affects all the holes of the line. To modify a single hole axis, first the parametric mode is used to define globally the hole line, than the mode can be switched to XYZ (Vx,Vy,Vz) or RTHZ (Vr,Vth,Vz) mode to change the axis of the selected hole.
e) Holes Dimension Control

The dimension of the holes depends of the shape chosen in section 11-3.2.1.b.
e.1) Circular Shape

When circular shape is selected, the diameter and the depth of the holes can be imposed (each hole can be controlled separately). When a cooling wall is defined, the depth is only used for quick visualization of the hole location.
e.2) Rectangular & Oval Shapes

When rectangular or oval shape is selected, the width, the height and the depth of the holes can be imposed (each hole can be controlled separately). When a cooling wall is defined, the depth is only used for quick visualization of the hole location.
AutoGrid5
11-19
e.3) Trailing Edge Groove Shape

When the location of the groove is defined using the Parametric mode, the height of the groove must be entered.
e.4) 4-Sided Shape

The four points coordinates defining the shape of the quadrilateron must be entered.
f) Holes Orientation Control

For rectangular, oval and 4-sided shapes, the holes height is aligned with the spanwise direction. The rotation angle around the normal to the blade surface can be specified (Angle).
g) External Holes Definition File

The hole geometry can be defined using an external data file through the Load Geometry File menu available when right-clicking on the holes line 1. A file chooser allows to select an external hole line file. The file formats used to define hole line are presented in sections below. The Export Holes Geometry menu available when right-clicking on the holes line 1 is used to export the hole line definition into an external file. The name of the file is automatically chosen according to the grid configuration and the project file name. Therefore, before exporting a hole line geometry, the project must be saved. For example, when exporting the "holes line 5" of a project named "moduleCHT-section_2", the name of the data file will be "moduleCHTsection_2_row_2_Main_Blade_holes_line_5.dat" and it will be located where the project was saved.
g.1) Data File for Circular Shape Holes Line

NAME SCALE_FACTOR SHAPE NI_BEGIN NIHole NAME hole 1 holes line 1 1 CIRCULAR
11-20
AutoGrid5
POINT AXIS DIAMETER NI_END NIHole ...
0.2721 0.014104 0.0718381 0.0563309 -0.996603 -0.0600856 0.0011
g.2) Data File for Rectangular Shape Holes Line

NAME SCALE_FACTOR SHAPE NI_BEGIN NIHole NAME POINT AXIS SIZE1 SIZE2 hole 1 0.272459 0.00174071 0.0691802 -0.00578617 0.90566 0.423965 0.0011 0.0011 0 holes line 2 1 SQUARE
ORIENTATION_ANGLE NI_END NIHole
g.3) Data File for Oval Shape Holes Line

NAME SCALE_FACTOR SHAPE NI_BEGIN NIHole NAME POINT AXIS SIZE1 SIZE2 hole 1 0.272459 0.00174071 0.0691802 -0.00578617 0.90566 0.423965 0.0011 0.0011 0 holes line 3 1 OVAL
ORIENTATION_ANGLE NI_END NIHole
g.4) Data File for Trailing Edge Groove Holes Line

NAME SCALE_FACTOR SHAPE SIDE NI_BEGIN NIHole NAME POINT hole 1 0.270542 0.0428518 0.112722 holes line 4 1 GROOVE_AT_TRAILING_EDGE LOWER_SIDE
AutoGrid5
11-21
AXIS POINT2 NI_END NIHole
000 0.271642 0.0428532 0.112722
g.5) Data File for Trailing Edge Circular Holes File

NAME SCALE_FACTOR SHAPE NI_BEGIN NIHole NAME POINT AXIS DIAMETER NI_END NIHole ... hole 1 0.2725 0 0.112722 000 0.0011 holes line 5 1 CIRCULAR_AT_TRAILING_EDGE
g.6) Data File for 4-Sided Shape Holes Line

NAME SCALE_FACTOR SHAPE NI_BEGIN NIHole NAME POINT AXIS POINTS hole 1 0.272459 0.00174071 0.0691802 -0.00578617 0.90566 0.423965 -0.0011 -0.0011 0.0011 -0.0011 -0.0011 0.0011 0.0011 0.0011 0 holes line 6 1 QUADRILATERAL
ORIENTATION_ANGLE NI_END ...
The SCALE_FACTOR is optional. It is used to convert the data if it is not specified in meter (i.e.: data in millimeter needs to set the SCALE_FACTOR to 0.001).
11-22
AutoGrid5

In the Blade Cooling Holes Line Definition, the Mesh Control thumbnail gives access to the parameters controlling the mesh topology around and inside the holes.
a) Grid Points Distribution

The grid point distribution panel allows the user to change the grid point number (by left-clicking on the it when highlighted in red) around the holes. According to the shape of the holes, the parameters to define can be different.
When defining a hole line in the end walls, additional parameters Upper/Lower clustering relaxation allow to relax the clustering on the top and bottom. When the value is set to 0 the clustering is fully relaxed otherwise the value entered by the user is used to set up a cluster at both ends distribution.
AutoGrid5
11-23
b) Optimization Control
The number of smoothing steps around (Optimization Steps Around Hole) and inside (Optimization Steps Inside Holes) the holes can be modified. The type of smoothing can also be chosen with or without skewness control (Skewness Control Around/Inside Holes option).
For the trailing edge grooves, only the smoothing steps inside the holes can be controlled.
11-24
AutoGrid5
c) Wake Control
The size of the mesh upstream and downstream the holes (Upstream/Downstream Normalized Distance) can be controlled by normalized parameters. These parameters allow the user to change the downstream length and the upstream length of the area where the mesh around the holes will be created.
d) Mesh Shape Control

When two lines of holes are close to each other and one of the holes line spanwise shape must drive the shape of the mesh of the second holes line, the option Holes Line Mesh Shape Control can be applied on the second holes according to the holes line spanwise shape configuration.
11-3.2.3 Global Control

By default, when lines of holes are defined, AutoGrid5 will first divide the matrix block in spanwise direction near the hub and near the shroud to keep as much as possible of the end wall boundary layer of the matrix mesh. The indices of division can be controlled by the user in the thumbnail Global Control. The tolerance used to compute the intersection of the holes with the matrix block can be modified by modifying the Holes Intersection Tolerance available in the Expert page. Because the preview using Preview 3D button can be slightly different from the final computed location, the Preview Tube Mesh button is used to display the real location of the holes.
AutoGrid5
11-25
11-3.3 Blade Holes Mesh Generation

Once the matrix and the holes definition are completed, the Generate Holes menu available when right-clicking on the Main Blade in the configuration tree allows to start the holes mesh generation without regenerating the row mesh.
Right-click
The option Generate Blades Cooling Holes available when pressing the Generate 3D button of the top menu bar can also be activated to mesh the holes after the selected row mesh generation.
11-26
AutoGrid5
Cooling - Basin Holes/Separator
11-3.4 Blade Holes Project Management

As explained at the beginning of the section 10-3, the blade hole(s) meshes are inserted into the matrix block of the default mesh computed by AutoGrid5 (skin block around the blade). Therefore, before starting the blade holes mesh generation, the default mesh inside the row must have been computed using Generate 3D button. This mesh is usually called the matrix mesh. It is strongly advised to save and store this mesh on disk (File/Save Project As) before starting the blade holes generation. Once the matrix mesh has been generated and saved into a matrix project, the blades holes definition can be modified and saved using the menu File/Save Template. Using this method, the template on disk contains the new holes definition and the matrix mesh. Each time the user wants to modify the holes definition and regenerate a new mesh, the matrix project can be reloaded, the holes definition changed and the holes mesh generation started without regenerating the default row mesh (matrix).
By default, the mesh (matrix) generated inside the solid body of the blade contains two blocks (butterfly topology at the trailing edge - section 11-2.1.5.a). Due to the mesh generation method, the matrix mesh is different if trailing edge holes or grooves must be generated. The butterfly topology is degenerated into a single O-block. Therefore, if a new line of holes of these types is added after having generated the matrix, the system will prompt the user to regenerate the matrix before starting the holes line. The same behaviour can be observed if the matrix has been generated with trailing edge holes or grooves defined that are removed afterwards.
11-4 Cooling - Basin Holes/Separator

When the blade configuration contains a cooling wall definition, a basin and a basin wall, holes into the basin wall and a solid separator into the basin can be defined within AutoGrid5.
AutoGrid5
11-27
separator basin holes
11-4.1 Basin Holes/Separator Methodology

The blade to blade mesh into the cooling wall area is composed by two blocks (butterfly topology section 10-2.1.4.a). After defining the basin holes and separator, AutoGrid5 will compute the location of the basin holes and the separator into this mesh and than replace the butterfly topology by a new complex topology capturing the defined holes and separator. The connection between the cooling wall area and the solid body of the blade becomes full non matching.
basin holes
separator
This process is repeated on each layer from the bottom to the top of the domain. It assumes the same block topology and matching connections between the cooling channel, the basin wall, the basin and the shroud gap area.
11-28
AutoGrid5
11-4.2 Basin Holes Properties

The Add Radial Holes menu available when right-clicking on Solid Body adds a new hole entity in the configuration tree.
Right-click
The Properties menu available when right-clicking on holes 1 opens a dialog box to control the geometry and the mesh of the selected hole.
Right-click
When selecting a solid body configuration with penny, the same dialog box is used to define the penny. However, a rotation around the penny can be specified.
AutoGrid5
11-29
11-4.2.1 Geometry Control a) Parametric Mode

When the option Use Parametric Definition is active, a parametric location is used to define the basin holes. Two parameters fully define the location of the holes:
Location (% of chord): this parameter defines the hole center on the chord by giving a percentage of the chord length of the cooling wall definition ("A" in figure below).
Location (% of width): once the hole center is located on the chord, a deviation normal to the
chord can be defined. The amplitude of the deviation is given in % of cooling wall width ("B" in figure below).
B A
The Diameter of the selected basin hole has to be specified.
b) XYZ Mode
When the option Use Parametric Definition is switch off, the holes geometry is defined in the Cartesian space by an anchor point (Anchor) and an axis vector (Axis).
Once a new hole is defined using non-parametric definition, when pressing Generate B2B, the system indicates to the user two layer indices on which Generate B2B must be applied before launching the 3D generation.
11-30
AutoGrid5
The parametrization of the holes is done during these phases and it assumes that the axis given by the user will be followed by the holes. Each time the user wants to modify the hole location (i.e changing the anchor and/or the axis), the same procedure must be performed. The Diameter of the selected basin hole has to be specified. The Preview and Hide buttons are used to perform a quick display of the 3D definition of the cylinder used to define the holes. The 3D display is only available if the matrix block is available when the 3D mesh generation of the row has already been completed. Each modification of any hole lines parameter implies an automatic refresh of the display. Due to the stacking technique used to define the basin holes, the holes are always normal to the surface of the basin and are following the spanwise direction (J-direction) of the blade.
c) External Holes Definition File

The basin holes geometry can be defined using an external data file through the Init Radial Holes From File menu available when right-clicking on the Solid Body. A file chooser allows to select an external hole file. The file format used to define a basin hole is presented below.
The Export Radial Holes Geometry menu available when right-clicking on the Solid Body is used to export the basin hole definition into an external file. The data file format is the following:
SCALE_FACTOR 1000 NI_BEGIN cylinder ORIGIN AXIS RADIUS -0.00767000036430546 0.314414877301847 0.0786000028177822 7.16351112721767e-14 -1 -2.54702617856629e-14 0.000250000011874398
NI_END cylinder NI_BEGIN cylinder
ORIGIN
-0.00781000037095512 0.314414877301847 0.0812700029446004
AutoGrid5
11-31
AXIS RADIUS
7.16351112721767e-14 -1 -5.09405235713257e-14 0.000250000011874376
NI_END cylinder
After the selection, the holes are automatically initialized in the configuration tree and the procedure described in the previous section must be followed to initialize the holes parametrization.

The mesh inside and around the holes can be controlled using the following parameters.
Number of Point Along Radius: this parameter is used to modify the number of points in the
boundary layer of the holes.
Number of Point Along Sides: this parameter is used to modify the number of points around
the holes.
11-32
AutoGrid5
Location Bnd Smoothing Steps: this parameter is used to smooth the limit of the blocks at the
boundary with the solid body of a hole located between others holes/separator.
Optimization Steps: this parameter is global for all the basin holes and controls the number of optimization steps used to optimise the mesh inside and around the holes.
Streamwise Mesh Resolution: this parameter allows the user to increase the default number of
points in the streamwise direction. When set to 1, AutoGrid5 computes automatically the number of points in the streamwise direction for the blocks inserted between holes according to the external grid point distribution. This is not always sufficient to assume a correct expansion ratio.
Streamwise Mesh Resolution set to 1
Streamwise Mesh Resolution set to 3
11-4.3 Basin Separator Properties

The Add Separator menu available when right-clicking on Solid Body adds a new separator entity in the configuration tree.
AutoGrid5
11-33
Cooling - End Wall Holes
The Properties menu available when right-clicking on the separator 1 opens a dialog box to control the geometry and the mesh of the selected separator.
Right-click
The separator location (Location (% chord)) is defined by giving a percentage of the cooling wall chord arc length (indicated as "A" in the figure of section 11-4.2.1.a). The width of the separator is given in absolute value (Width) and the number of points in the streamwise direction (Number of Point Along Stream) controls the mesh into the separator.
11-4.4 Basin Holes/Separator Mesh Generation

The mesh inside the cooling channel is automatically computed during the stacking process of the row. The full non matching connections are automatically created between the solid body and the basin, basin wall, cooling channel and the shroud gap area. No control is given on the streamwise number of points between the holes. AutoGrid5 tries to keep the same clustering as in the solid body to avoid too high difference of grid points along the full non matching connections.
11-5 Cooling - End Wall Holes

In the section 11-2.2, the grid generation of the end walls solid body is presented. In addition, lines of holes located on the end walls can be defined and meshed within AutoGrid5.
end walls holes
11-34
AutoGrid5
11-5.1 End Wall Holes Methodology

The method is similar to the grid generation of blade line holes describes in the section 11-3. As for the blades line holes, the grid generation of the line of holes on the end walls is based on the insertion of the mesh around the holes into a matrix mesh. This matrix mesh is created automatically by AutoGrid5. It consists in two H blocks used to mesh the solid body of the end wall and the connected fluid boundary layer.
The Properties menu available when right-clicking on Hub Wall or Shroud Wall opens a dialog box to control the mesh generation of the matrix. The blade to blade visualization of the H block can be controlled using the menu View B2B Mesh and Hide B2B Mesh. The user can control the smoothing steps (Hole Matrix Optimization Steps) and the multigrid acceleration (Hole Matrix Multigrid Optimization) to optimize the H block of the matrix. The number of layers on which the end walls holes block will be extended into the fluid boundary layer is controlled by the Connected Layers parameters.
11-5.2 End Wall Holes Properties

The Add Holes line menu available when right-clicking on Hub Wall or Shroud Wall adds a new holes line entity in the configuration tree.
AutoGrid5
11-35
Right-click
The holes geometry and mesh controls are similar to the ones presented for the blade holes in section 11-3.2. A quick display of the end walls holes is also available in the blade to blade view but it appears only if the active blade to blade layer corresponds to the hub or the shroud. Due to the matrix concept which is using a H block, the grid quality in the hub wall boundary layer can be downgraded compared to the default topology. Due to the location of the matrix, it is not obvious to define holes in front of the leading edge.
11-5.3 End Wall Holes Mesh Generation

Once the matrix, the end walls and the holes definition are completed, the Generate Holes menu, available when right-clicking on Hub Wall or Shroud Wall in the configuration tree, allows to start the holes mesh generation without regenerating the row mesh.
Right-click
11-36
AutoGrid5
Cooling - Pin Fins
The options Generate End Wall and Generate End Wall Cooling Holes available when pressing the Generate 3D button of the top menu bar can also be activated to mesh the holes after the selected row mesh generation.
11-6 Cooling - Pin Fins

The pin fins are usually located in the cooling channel of the blade and used to promote the turbulence and to exchange heat. These entities can be defined and meshed within AutoGrid5.
cooling channel
AutoGrid5
11-37
Cooling - Pin Fins
11-6.1 Pin Fins Properties

The Add Pin Fins Channel menu available when right-clicking on Cooling Channels adds a pin fins channel entity in the configuration tree.
Right-click
Right-click
11-6.1.1 Pin Fins Box Definition

A pin fins channel entity is used to mesh solid pin fins lines into a box (cooling channel) defined by the user. The box is a IGG block created manually or imported from an external block data file. The block orientation I and J must correspond respectively to the pin fins axis and the pin fine line direction. This block will be used in a similar way as the matrix mesh used for the blade and end walls holes.
a) From IGG Edit Mode

The Edit menu, available when right-clicking on pin fins channel 1 in the configuration tree, allows to start the edition mode. Under this mode, the box will be created using IGG functionalities. When closing this edition mode (Close Edition Mode button), the first block created will be considered as the new pin fins box.
b) From External Block File

The Define from Box File menu, available when right-clicking on pin fins channel 1 in the configuration tree, opens a file chooser used to select an external IGG block coordinate file. Once the file selected, a dialog box prompts the user to specify how much points must be used in the I, J and K directions to create the box using the geometry of the imported block file.
11-6.1.2 Pin Fins Lines Definition

The Add Pin Fins Line menu, available when right-clicking on pin fins channel 1 in the configuration tree, is used to add a new pin fins line into the configuration tree.
11-38
AutoGrid5
Cooling - Pin Fins
Right-click
The pin fins lines management is similar to the blade holes management presented in the previous sections. The Properties menu available when right-clicking on pin fins 1 opens a dialog box to control the geometry and the mesh of the selected hole.
Right-click
The holes geometry and mesh controls are similar to the ones presented for the blade holes in section 113.2. In addition to the holes control parameters, the pin fins can have a fillet defined in the Dimension panel. The Minimum Fillet Angle avoids a zero skewness angle of the cell connected with the boundary of the box. The grid points distribution can be imposed for the entire pin fins line but not for only one pin fin of the line in order to ensure matching connection.
AutoGrid5
11-39
Cooling - Pin Fins
11-6.2 Pin Fins Mesh Generation

The mesh inside the cooling channel including the pin fins is automatically computed when selecting the Generate Pin Fins menu when right-clicking on pin fins channel 1 in the configuration tree. When generating the pin fins, the cell width defined in the Mesh Control subpad of the quick access pad is taken into account. Using the default cell width of 1e-5 may lead to problems if the geometry is defined in mm.
The final mesh contains solid blocks defining the pins fins and fluid blocks around the pin fins defining the fluid area of the box (cooling channel). The mesh includes six full non matching connections with only left patches defined. These connections are useful to define the link between the pin fins boxes and the surrounding areas such as the blade solid body. In addition the Mesh properties menu when right-clicking on pin fins channel 1 in the configuration tree, opens a dialog box providing to the user easy ways to:
Revert the fluid and solid block. Define inlet boundaries at the left or right side of the pin fins. Preserved mesh boundary on the left and right side of the pin fins.
Right-click
11-40
AutoGrid5
Cooling - Ribs
11-7 Cooling - Ribs

The ribs are usually located in the cooling channel of the blade and used to promote the turbulence and to exchange heat. These entities can be defined and meshed within AutoGrid5.
cooling channel
11-7.1 Ribs Properties

The Add Ribs Channel menu available when right-clicking on Cooling Channels adds a ribs channel entity in the configuration tree.
Right-click
Right-click
11-7.1.1 Ribs Box Definition

A ribs channel entity is used to mesh solid ribs lines into a box (cooling channel) defined by the user. The box is a IGG block created manually. The block should have a special orientation:
the I direction from front to back (front side being the side where the rib is located), the J direction from hub to shroud, the K direction from left to right (left side being at the left when looking in the direction front>back). This block will be used in a similar way as the matrix mesh used for the blade and end walls holes.
AutoGrid5
11-41
Cooling - Ribs
a) From IGG Edit Mode

The Edit menu, available when right-clicking on ribs channel 1 in the configuration tree, allows to start the edition mode. Under this mode, the box can be created using IGG functionalities. When closing this edition mode (Close Edition Mode button), the first block created will be considered as the new ribs box.
b) From 3D View
After selecting the 3D view in AutoGrid5, a IGG mesh (".igg" file) can be imported in the 3D view (File/Import/IGG Project). The desired block representing the cooling channel needs to be activated by left-clicking on it in the 3D view. The Define Box from Active Block menu, available when right-clicking on ribs channel 1 in the configuration tree, allows to link the active block to the ribs channel. After defining the box, the template has to be saved (File/Save Template) and reopened (File/Open Project) otherwise the blocks of the imported IGG mesh will stay in the 3D view and conflict with new created blocks in AutoGrid5.
11-7.1.2 Ribs Geometry Control

The Define Geometry menu, available when right-clicking on ribs channel 1 in the configuration tree, is used to control the geometry and the mesh of the ribs.
A rib can be seen as a "bar" located in the cooling channel (box). The ribs can be located on only one side of the cooling channel box (called the "front" side, the opposite being the "back" side). The basic (mandatory) geometry is defined by:
a basic plane (plane origin and normal direction) representing the lower side (Define basic planes
button),
a height (Height) representing the upper side (basic plane shifted by height along its normal), a thickness (Thickness) representing the back side (front side offset of the thickness).
In addition, optional rib geometry extensions are possible:
a left extension (bar extension on the left side with the same height and thickness as the main bar)
defined by a plane (Define left extensions button).
11-42
AutoGrid5
Cooling - Ribs
a right extension (bar extension on the right side with the same height and thickness as the main
bar) defined by a plane (Define right extensions button).
separation(s) (an interruption in the main bar, through which the fluid will pass) defined by two
planes (defining the start and the end of the bar cut) (Add separations button).
a Full Channel option allowing to completely fill the channel with ribs, meaning that no fluid
can pass perpendicularly to the ribs. The figure below is illustrating the options in a section of a rib channel.
Right Extension Left Extension
Main Bar
Separation 1
Separation 2
As mentioned above, the ribs geometry is composed by basic planes defined by an external ".dat" file illustrated below:
SCALE_FACTOR 1000 REVERSE_NORMAL 1 PLANE -0.0001 0.2554 0.0992 -6.1422e-15 -0.866 0.5 PLANE -0.0007 0.2579 0.0984 -3.1258e-14 -0.866 0.4999 PLANE 0.0002 0.2611 0.0988 -7.8737e-15 -0.866 0.4999 ...
The first line (optional) allows to impose a scaling factor to the plane coordinates (useful when the planes are not defined in the scale of the cooling channel). The second line (optional) allows to inverse the plane normal orientation. The plane normal should be oriented from the lower to the upper ribs channel side. The following lines beginning by the keyword "PLANE" identify the ribs (the number of ribs will correspond to the number of "PLANE" lines). The keyword "PLANE" is followed by the plane origin and normal coordinates.
The file format for the left extension, right extension and separation planes is similar to the one presented above. For the separation definition, the number of planes should be twice the number of ribs as a rib separation is defined by a starting and ending plane. When separations are positioned in staggered rows of successive ribs, the Alternate separations button improves the mesh quality. This option will insert artificially in a rib the separation of the previous one and in the previous rib the separation of the current one. As these artificial separations are not real, they will be meshed with solid blocks.
AutoGrid5
11-43
Cooling - Ribs
11-7.1.3 Ribs Mesh Control

The Define Geometry menu, available when right-clicking on ribs channel 1 in the configuration tree, is used to control the geometry and the mesh of the ribs.
The mesh will be fully matching in the complete ribs channel. That means that increasing the number of points somewhere will be propagated all over the domain through matching block connections. The mesh parameters that can be controlled are:
the number of points in the I direction (from front to back) - Number of pts I, the number of points in the J direction for a rib itself (from bottom to top) - Number of pts J, the number of intermediate points in J direction between 2 ribs (from bottom to top) - Number
of Inter pts,
the number of points in the K direction (from left to right) - Number of pts K, the clustering by defining the Cell width and the number of constant cells (Number of cst
cells). These values are constant for all the ribs in the channel. The figure below is illustrating the above controls in a section of a rib channel.
11-44
AutoGrid5
Cooling - Ribs
11-7.2 Ribs Mesh Generation

The mesh inside the cooling channel including the ribs is automatically computed when selecting the Generate menu when right-clicking on ribs channel 1 in the configuration tree. When generating the ribs, the cell width defined in the Mesh Control subpad of the quick access pad is taken into account. Using the default cell width of 1e-5 may lead to problems if the geometry is defined in mm.
The final mesh contains solid blocks defining the ribs and fluid blocks around the ribs defining the fluid area of the box (cooling channel). The mesh includes six full non matching connections with only left patches defined. These connections are useful to define the link between the ribs boxes and the surrounding areas such as the blade solid body.
AutoGrid5
11-45
Cooling - Ribs
11-46
AutoGrid5
CHAPTER 12: Python Script
12-1 Overview
Scripts are available in AutoGrid5, like in IGG, through the object-oriented Python language. For a more complete description of python language and generic commands, see the IGG manual. Specific commands are dedicated to AutoGrid5 and are described here after. More details on the available python commands are available in the file "AUTOGRID.py" provided in the NUMECA distribution after installation (i.e. under Windows, the file is available in "~/_python/_autogrid/").
12-2 Running a Script File

Script files can be run from the command line or directly through a python interpreter.
From the command line, a script can be run by launching AutoGrid5 with the -script option.
For example: igg -autogrid5 -script my_script.py. AutoGrid5 will execute the script and then open the graphical user interface. When running a script from the command line, it is possible to execute a process in batch mode, avoiding to open the GUI. To do so, the -batch option should be used: igg -autogrid5 -batch script my_script.py.
IGG scripts and AutoGrid5 scripts are not interchangeable.
AutoGrid5
12-1
Python Script
Commands Description
12-3 Commands Description

Commands are classified by categories and by classes. Several classes are defined in AutoGrid5 to group functions related to generic entities: Row, Blade, Gap, RSInterface, StagnationPoint, TechnologicalEffect,... Note for Windows users: The specification of path names when using commands requiring file names as input must be performed using a UNIX style coding. This practically means that / should be used as separator between directories instead of \ and path names should be written between quotes: "/usr/people/test.trb".
12-3.1 Configuration Commands

a5_open_project (trb_file_name) a5_open_template(trb_file_name) a5_save_template(trb_file_name) a5_save_project(trb_file_name) a5_save_mesh(mesh_file_name) a5_save_mesh_V61(mesh_file_name) a5_save_mesh_V62(mesh_file_name) a5_save_mesh_V72(mesh_file_name) a5_save_mesh_V86(mesh_file_name) a5_save_and_merge_project_mesh() a5_init_html_report_file() a5_export_fluid_mesh() a5_new_project(bypass) Creates a new project from scratch. Bypass is a boolean value specifying if the project should contain a bypass. a5_set_cascade_project(cascade) a5_get_cascade_project() a5_init_new_project_from_a_geomTurbo_file(geomTurbo_file_name,cascademode=0) a5_start_3d_generation() Generates 3D mesh of all selected entities.
a5_control_and_start_3d_generation(holes,endwall,endwallholes) a5_generate_basin_mesh() a5_reset_default_topology()

Resets default topology of all selected rows.
a5_generate_b2b()
Generates B2B mesh of all selected rows at the active control layer.
a5_generate_flow_paths()
Generates flow paths of all selected rows.
set_active_control_layer_index(value)
Set the active layer of all rows. Value should be between 0 and 100.
12-2
AutoGrid5
Python Script
calc_row_2D_mesh_quality(type, row_list, range_start, range_end, range_number, show=0,

show_marker=0, show_cells=1) Computes the mesh quality in the blade to blade space. Returns a list giving a spread number of cells as in a bar chart.
calc_row_pointer_2D_mesh_quality(type,row_pointer_list,range_start,range_end,range_numbe
r,show=0,show_marker=0,show_cells=1)
calc_row_2D_mesh_quality_inter_block(type,
row_list, range_start, range_end, range_number, show=0, show_marker=0, show_cells=1) Computes the mesh quality at block boundaries in the blade to blade space. Returns a list giving a spread number of cells as in a bar chart. Deletes from the library the topology identified by its name.
delete_row_topology(topology_name) delete_b2b_topology(topology_name)
Deletes from the library the topology identified by its name.
a5_get_row_number()
Returns the number of rows of the machine.
a5_row_at_the_end_of_the_channel()
Adds a row at the end of the machine.
a5_set_support_curve_control_pts(value) a5_get_support_curve_control_pts() a5_row_on_the_nozzle_of_the_engine() a5_row_in_the_bypass() a5_row_at_the_outlet_of_the_compressor() row(B):# indices from 1 Returns an object of class Row. B can be either a row name or a row index. select_all_rows() unselect_all_rows() select_all() unselect_all() z_cst_line(name) Gives access to meridional control lines. Returns an object of class RSInterface.
delete_z_cst_line(RSInterface) compute_default_z_cst_line(point, channel_curve_type)

z_cst_line = compute_default_z_cst_line(Point(8.2,19,0), 0): this command is creating a new control line on the hub at a location close to the point (Z=8.2,R=19,theta=0).
compute_default_relative_z_cst_line(row_ref,row_location,relative_location)
Row_locaion should be "0" if control line between inlet and leading edge of the row (row_ref), "1" if between its leading edge and its trailing edge, and "2" if between its trailing edge and outlet or rotor/stator.
a5_add_B2B_cut() set_by_pass_configuration_topologyType(value)
Value should be "0" for H-Topology or "1" for C-topology.
get_by_pass_configuration_topologyType() set_by_pass_configuration_Bnd_layer_Width(value)
AutoGrid5
12-3
Python Script
get_by_pass_configuration_Bnd_layer_Width() set_by_pass_configuration_nozzle_index(value) get_by_pass_configuration_nozzle_index() set_by_pass_configuration_clustering(value) get_by_pass_configuration_clustering() set_by_pass_configuration_numberOfSpanwisePoints(value) get_by_pass_configuration_numberOfSpanwisePoints() set_by_pass_configuration_numberOfStreamwisePoints(value) get_by_pass_configuration_numberOfStreamwisePoints() set_by_pass_configuration_relativeControlDistance(value) get_by_pass_configuration_relativeControlDistance() set_by_pass_configuration_nup(value) get_by_pass_configuration_nup() set_by_pass_configuration_ndown(value) get_by_pass_configuration_ndown()
12-3.2 Geometry Import Commands

a5_set_import_geometry_rotation_axis(orig, stream_direction,span_direction)
Defines the rotation axis for CAD import.
a5_import_geometry_file(file_name)
Imports a geometry file, either CATIA, Parasolid, .dat, .geom, .geomTurbo 4 & 5 or IGES formats.
a5_import_and_replace_geometry_file(file_name) a5_get_import_geometry_repository() a5_clean_import_geometry()

Deletes all the geometry entities already loaded.
a5_link_to_hub(curve_names)
Curve_names should be a list, even if it is composed of only 1 element (use [ ]).
a5_link_to_hub_surface(row,surface_names)
Surface_names should be a list, even if it is composed of only 1 element (use [ ]).
a5_link_to_shroud(curve_names)
a5_link_to_shroud_surface(row,surface_names)
a5_link_to_tip_gap_surface(row,surface_names)
a5_link_to_nozzle(curve_names)
a5_link_to_basic_curve(curve_names)
Imports the curves specified by their names in the meridional space by creating basic curves. Curve_names should be a list, even if it is composed of only 1 element (use [ ]).
12-4
AutoGrid5
Python Script
a5_link_to_basic_curve a5_define_hub(point_list) a5_define_shroud(point_list) a5_define_nozzle(point_list) basic_curve(name)
12-3.3 Viewing Commands

a5_treetclUpdate() is used to update the AutoGrid5 tree on the top left of the screen. a5_tclUpdate() is used to update the remaining part of the AutoGrid5 GUI.
hoops_Update() is used to update all the views of the AutoGrid5 GUI. a5_update_dialog_box() is used to update the opened dialog boxes a5_waitLeftClick() is used to stop the execution of the script until user left click a5_switch_to_wizard_mode() a5_switch_to_expert_mode() a5_focus_ZR_view() a5_focus_B2B_view() a5_focus_3D_view() a5_full_view() Set in full view mode the focused view.
a5_multi_view() a5_focus_b2b_view_on_active_rows()
Set the focus on the B2B view and fit the view around the selected rows.
a5_view_b2b_repetition_number(number) a5_view_b2b_repetition() a5_hide_b2b_repetition() a5_print_b2b_png(file_name) a5_print_3D_png(file_name) a5_print_ZR_png(file_name) a5_enable_full_display_smoothing_mode() Updates the interface after each B2B smoothing step. Only working with default topology.
a5_disable_full_display_smoothing_mode() a5_enable_full_display_quality_mode(type)
Updates the interface after each B2B smoothing step and computes quality in B2B view according to type criterion.
a5_disable_full_display_quality_mode() a5_view_3d_mesh(coarseLevel,pointOfView,zoom,grid,row_list) a5_remove_Cooling_Wall_B2B_Rep(blade) zoomFromAt(centerx1,centery1,centerz1,centerx2,centery2,centerz2,zoom1,zoomstep,nstep) a5_view_3d_mesh_default() a5_view_3d_mesh_fixed()
AutoGrid5
12-5
Python Script
a5_view_3d_mesh_fixed_repet() a5_hide_3d_mesh() a5_toggle_b2b_mesh() a5_toggle_b2b_grid_point() a5_toggle_b2b_edges() a5_merge_fnmb(name1,name2,sens)
12-3.4 NIConfigurationEntities Class Commands

select() unselect() meshConfigurationDomain() select_configuration() unselect_configuration() parent()
12-3.5 RowWizard Class Commands

initialize(machine_type,row_type,rotationSpeed,periodicity)
Machine_type should be between 1 and 9: 1: wind turbine (more info in WindTurbine Class) 2: axial turbine 3: Francis turbine 4: Kaplan turbine 5: inducer 6: axial compressor 7: centrifugal impeller 8: centrifugal diffuser 9: return channel Row_type : 0 for stator and 1 for rotor
copy() paste() generate() set_grid_level(value) get_grid_level() set_flow_path_number(value) get_flow_path_number() set_full_matching_topology(value) get_full_matching_topology() set_row_cell_width_at_wall(value) get_row_cell_width_at_wall() hub_gap_is_asked(value) is_hub_gap_asked() tip_gap_is_asked(value)
12-6
AutoGrid5
Python Script
is_tip_gap_asked() hub_fillet_is_asked(value) is_hub_fillet_asked() tip_fillet_is_asked(value) is_tip_fillet_asked() set_hub_gap_width_at_leading_edge(value) get_hub_gap_width_at_leading_edge() set_hub_gap_width_at_trailing_edge(value) get_hub_gap_width_at_trailing_edge() set_tip_gap_width_at_leading_edge(value) get_tip_gap_width_at_leading_edge() set_tip_gap_width_at_trailing_edge(value) get_tip_gap_width_at_trailing_edge() increaseNpts() decreaseNpts()
12-3.6 WindTurbine Class Commands

select() delete() initialize(tipRmax,hubRmin,Zmin,Zmax,RFarField,radialPtsNr,cstCellsNr)
tipRmax : relative shroud distance to the real tip of the blade (default 1) hubRmin : relative hub distance to the real hub of the blade (default 0) Zmin : relative inlet length (in blade height unit) (default -4) Zmax : relative outlet length (in blade height unit) (default 10) RFarField : relative far field expansion height (in blade height unit) (default 5) radialPtsNr : number of points in far field expansion (default 33) cstCellsNr : % of constant cell number in far field expansion (default 33)
generate() set_tip_cut_relative_value(value) get_tip_cut_relative_value() set_hub_cut_relative_value(value) get_hub_cut_relative_value() set_expansion_cst_cell_percentage_number(value) get_expansion_cst_cell_percentage_number() set_expansion_number_of_layer(value) get_expansion_number_of_layer() set_expansion_height(value) get_expansion_height() set_inlet_width(value) get_inlet_width() set_outlet_width(value)
AutoGrid5
12-7
Python Script
get_outlet_width() set_number_of_layer(value) get_number_of_layer() set_cst_cell_percentage_number(value) get_cst_cell_percentage_number() increaseNpts() decreaseNpts()
12-3.7 B2B Cut Class Commands

delete() select() set_name(name) get_name() create() set_width(value) get_width() set_location(value) get_location() b2bCut(B):# indices from 1
12-3.8 Row Class Commands

delete() block_list() setGraphicsRepetition(value) setDefaultGraphicsRepetition() get_index() select() unselect() load_geometry(geomTurbo_file_name) The file specified should have the geomTurbo format 4 or 5. Only the row geometry is replaced and not the hub and/or shroud. Location should be between -1 and 1.
zoom_at_inlet(level,location) zoom_at_outlet(level,location)
Location should be between -1 and 1.
zoom_at_inlet_up(level) zoom_at_outlet_up(level) zoom_at_inlet_down(level) zoom_at_outlet_down(level)
12-8
AutoGrid5
Python Script
12-3.8.1 Topology Management

load_topology(file_name) save_topology(file_name) copy_topology() paste_topology() save_b2b_topology(file_name) load_b2b_topology(file_name) wind_turbine_wizard() row_wizard()
12-3.8.2 Row Boundaries Access

inlet()
Returns an object of class RSInterface.
outlet()
outlet2()
12-3.8.3 Row Technological Effects 3D Access

num_effect3D() effect3D(i) new_effect3D()
Returns an object of class TechnologicalEffect3D.
12-3.8.4 Row Blades Properties

num_blades() blade(i) add_blade() add_hub_gap() Add a gap at hub to all row blades. Add a gap at shroud to all row blades.
add_shroud_gap() add_hub_fillet() add_shroud_fillet()
12-3.8.5 Row Properties

set_name(name) get_name() set_clustering(value) get_clustering() set_upstream_block_relaxation(a) get_upstream_block_relaxation()
AutoGrid5
12-9
Python Script
set_downstream_block_relaxation(a) get_downstream_block_relaxation() set_row_interpolation_spacing(value)

Value should be between 0 and 100.
get_row_interpolation_spacing() set_coarse_grid_level(level, target=250000)

Level specifies the grid level desired; 1 for coarse, 2 for medium, 3 for fine and 4 for user defined. Target is an optional argument only useful when level==4 and represents the desired number of points.
get_coarse_grid_level() get_coarse_grid_level_target() set_streamwise_weight(inlet, outlet, blade) get_streamwise_weight_inlet() get_streamwise_weight_blade() get_streamwise_weight_outlet() set_periodicity(n) get_periodicity() set_number_of_periodicity_geometry(n) get_number_of_periodicity_geometry() set_rotation_speed(rotation_speed) get_rotation_speed() enable_low_memory_usage() disable_low_memory_usage() get_low_memory_usage() enable_full_mesh_generation() disable_full_mesh_generation() get_full_mesh_generation() is_a_tandem_row() is_a_tandem_row_with_next() is_a_tandem_row_with_previous() is_not_a_tandem_row() get_is_a_tandem_row() is_a_rotor() is_a_stator() is_a_inducer() is_a_pump() is_a_impeller() is_a_diffuser() is_a_return_channel() get_row_type()
12-10
AutoGrid5
Python Script
is_axial() is_centrifugal() get_row_orientation()
12-3.8.6 Row Hub/Shroud Non-Axisymmetric

set_non_axisymmetric_hub() get_non_axisymmetric_hub() unset_non_axisymmetric_hub() set_non_axisymmetric_hub_repair_damage() get_non_axisymmetric_hub_repair_damage() unset_non_axisymmetric_hub_repair_damage() set_non_axisymmetric_hub_projection_type_face_normal() get_non_axisymmetric_hub_projection_type_face_normal() set_non_axisymmetric_hub_projection_type_spanwise_grid_line() set_non_axisymmetric_hub_repetition(value) get_non_axisymmetric_hub_repetition() set_non_axisymmetric_shroud() get_non_axisymmetric_shroud() unset_non_axisymmetric_shroud() set_non_axisymmetric_shroud_repair_damage() get_non_axisymmetric_shroud_repair_damage() unset_non_axisymmetric_shroud_repair_damage() set_non_axisymmetric_shroud_projection_type_face_normal() get_non_axisymmetric_shroud_projection_type_face_normal() set_non_axisymmetric_shroud_projection_type_spanwise_grid_line() set_non_axisymmetric_shroud_repetition(value) get_non_axisymmetric_shroud_repetition()
12-3.8.7 Row Shroud Gap Non-Axisymmetric

set_non_axisymmetric_tip_gap() get_non_axisymmetric_tip_gap() unset_non_axisymmetric_tip_gap() set_non_axisymmetric_tip_gap_repair_damage() get_non_axisymmetric_tip_gap_repair_damage() unset_non_axisymmetric_tip_gap_repair_damage() set_non_axisymmetric_tip_gap_repetition(value) get_non_axisymmetric_tip_gap_repetition()
12-3.8.8 Row Hub/Shroud Solid Mesh

hub_end_wall() shroud_end_wall()
AutoGrid5
12-11
Python Script
add_hub_end_wall() add_shroud_end_wall()
12-3.8.9 Flow Paths Control

set_flow_path_control_hub_clustering(value) get_flow_path_control_hub_clustering() set_flow_path_control_shroud_clustering(value) get_flow_path_control_shroud_clustering() set_flow_path_control_cst_cells_number(value) get_flow_path_control_cst_cells_number() set_flow_path_control_control_point_number(value) get_flow_path_control_control_point_number() set_flow_path_control_intermediate_point_number(value) get_flow_path_control_intermediate_point_number() set_flow_path_control_smoothing_steps(value) get_flow_path_control_smoothing_steps() set_flow_path_control_hub_distribution_uniform() set_flow_path_control_hub_distribution_curvature() get_flow_path_control_hub_distribution() set_flow_path_control_shroud_distribution_same() set_flow_path_control_shroud_distribution_projection() set_flow_path_control_shroud_distribution_minimal_distance() get_flow_path_control_shroud_distribution() set_row_flow_path_number(n) n=1 for coarse, 2 for medium, 3 for fine and 4 for userdef. If n=4, target should be specified.
get_row_flow_path_number() generate_flow_paths() generate_flow_paths2(check_quality)
12-3.8.10Optimization

set_row_optimization_steps(number_of_steps) get_row_optimization_steps() set_row_optimization_steps_in_gap(number_of_steps) get_row_optimization_steps_in_gap() set_row_optimization_skewness_control(value) Value should be "yes", "no" or "medium".
get_row_optimization_type() set_row_optimization_skewness_control_in_gap(value)
Value should be "yes", "no" or "medium".
get_row_optimization_type_in_gap() set_row_optimization_orthogonality_control(value)
12-12
AutoGrid5
Python Script
get_row_optimization_orthogonality_control() set_row_optimization_orthogonality_control_in_gap(value)
get_row_optimization_orthogonality_control_in_gap() set_row_optimization_wake_control(value)
get_row_optimization_wake_control() set_row_bnd_optimization_steps(number_of_steps) get_row_bnd_optimization_steps() set_row_optimization_multigrid_control(value) Value should be "yes" or "no".
get_row_optimization_multigrid_control() set_row_optimization_nmb_control(value)
get_row_optimization_nmb_control() set_row_straight_bnd_control(value)
Value should be "0" or "1".
get_row_straight_bnd_control() set_row_multisplitter_bnd_control(value)
Value should be "0" or "1".
get_row_multisplitter_bnd_control()
12-3.9 Blade Class Commands

select() delete() set_name(name) get_name() basin() add_basin() sheet() hub_gap() Returns an object of class Gap. If gap does not exist, creates it. Returns an object of class Gap. If gap does not exist, creates it.
shroud_gap() add_hub_gap()
Returns an object of class Gap.
add_shroud_gap()
Returns an object of class Gap.
hub_fillet()
Returns an object of class Fillet. If fillet does not exist, creates it.
shroud_fillet()
AutoGrid5
12-13
Python Script
Returns an object of class Fillet. If fillet does not exist, creates it.
add_hub_fillet()
Returns an object of class Fillet.
add_shroud_fillet()
Returns an object of class Fillet.
wizard_le_te() zoom_at_leading_edge(level) zoom_at_trailing_edge(level) leadingEdgeControl() Returns an object of class StagnationPoint. Returns an object of class StagnationPoint.
trailingEdgeControl() load_geometry(name) export_geometry() export_geometry(flowpath,nsections,ninlet,nblade,noutlet,ncst,leadwidth,trailwidth,exportendwall)
link_geometry(surface_names)
Defines the geometry of the blade. Surface_names should be a list, even if it is composed of only 1 element (use [ ]).
link_pressure(surface_names) link_suction(surface_names) link_to_leading_edge(curve_names)

link_to_trailing_edge(curve_names)
link_to_hub_gap(curve_names)
Defines the geometry of the hub gap. The gap should already be created. Curve_names should be a list, even if it is composed of only 1 element (use [ ]).
link_to_shroud_gap(curve_names)
Defines the geometry of the shroud gap. The gap should already be created. Curve_names should be a list, even if it is composed of only 1 element (use [ ]).
set_b2b_topology_type(value)
Value should be either 0 for default topology, 1 for HOH or 2 for user defined topology.
get_b2b_topology_type() copy_topology() paste_topology()
12-3.9.1 Blade Expansion & Rotation Parameters

expand_at_hub(expansion_factor, extent_offset=0) expand_at_shroud(expansion_factor, extent_offset=0) apply_rotation(x,y,z,nx,ny,nz,angle)
12-3.9.2 Blunt & Sharp Blade Parameters

set_blunt_treatment_at_leading_edge()
12-14
AutoGrid5
Python Script
unset_blunt_treatment_at_leading_edge() set_blunt_treatment_at_trailing_edge() unset_blunt_treatment_at_trailing_edge() set_sharp_treatment_at_leading_edge() unset_sharp_treatment_at_leading_edge() set_sharp_treatment_at_trailing_edge() unset_sharp_treatment_at_trailing_edge()
12-3.9.3 Default Topology Parameters a) Topology Control

set_b2b_default_topology_periodicity_type(value)
Value should be either 0 for non matching periodicity or 1 for matching.
get_b2b_default_topology_periodicity_type() set_b2b_default_topology_enable_high_staggered_optimization() set_b2b_default_topology_disable_high_staggered_optimization() get_b2b_default_topology_disable_high_staggered_optimization() set_b2b_default_topology_disable_high_staggered_detection() set_b2b_default_topology_enable_high_staggered_detection() get_b2b_default_topology_enable_high_staggered_detection() set_b2b_default_topology_normal_inlet_angle() set_b2b_default_topology_low_staggered_inlet_angle() set_b2b_default_topology_high_staggered_inlet_angle() get_b2b_default_topology_inlet_angle() set_b2b_default_topology_normal_outlet_angle() set_b2b_default_topology_low_staggered_outlet_angle() set_b2b_default_topology_high_staggered_outlet_angle() get_b2b_default_topology_outlet_angle() set_b2b_default_topology_throat_control(value) get_b2b_default_topology_throat_control() set_b2b_default_topology_throat_projection_type(value) get_b2b_default_topology_throat_projection_type() set_b2b_default_topology_throat_projection_inlet_relaxation() get_b2b_default_topology_throat_projection_inlet_relaxation() set_b2b_default_topology_throat_projection_outlet_relaxation() get_b2b_default_topology_throat_projection_outlet_relaxation()
b)
Grid Points Control
set_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_azimutal_inlet(value) get_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_azimutal_inlet() set_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_azimutal_outlet(value)
AutoGrid5
12-15
Python Script
get_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_azimutal_outlet() set_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_azimutal_inlet_up(value) get_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_azimutal_inlet_up() set_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_azimutal_outlet_up(value) get_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_azimutal_outlet_up() set_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_azimutal_inlet_down(value) get_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_azimutal_inlet_down() set_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_azimutal_outlet_down(value) get_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_azimutal_outlet_down() set_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_inlet(value) get_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_inlet() set_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_outlet(value) get_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_outlet() set_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_blade_upper_side(value) get_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_blade_upper_side() set_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_blade_lower_side(value) get_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_blade_lower_side() set_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_in_boundary_layer(value) get_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_in_boundary_layer() set_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_in_boundary_layer_of_gaps(value) get_b2b_default_topology_grid_point_number_in_boundary_layer_of_gaps()
c) Mesh Control

set_b2b_default_topology_cell_width_at_wall(value) get_b2b_default_topology_cell_width_at_wall() set_b2b_default_topology_cell_width_at_wall_at_hub(value) get_b2b_default_topology_cell_width_at_wall_at_hub() set_b2b_default_topology_cell_width_at_wall_at_shroud(value) get_b2b_default_topology_cell_width_at_wall_at_shroud() set_b2b_default_topology_bnd_layer_width(value) get_b2b_default_topology_bnd_layer_width() get_b2b_default_topology_cell_width_at_wall_interpolation() set_b2b_default_topology_cell_width_at_trailing_edge(value) set_b2b_default_topology_cell_width_at_leading_edge(value) set_b2b_default_topology_expansion_ratio_in_bnd_layer(value) get_b2b_default_topology_expansion_ratio_in_bnd_layer() set_b2b_default_topology_free_outlet_angle(value) get_b2b_default_topology_free_outlet_angle() set_b2b_default_topology_free_inlet_angle(value) get_b2b_default_topology_free_inlet_angle()
12-16
AutoGrid5
Python Script
set_b2b_default_topology_fix_outlet_angle(value) get_b2b_default_topology_fix_outlet_angle() set_b2b_default_topology_fix_inlet_angle(value) get_b2b_default_topology_fix_inlet_angle() set_b2b_default_topology_outlet_angle(value) get_b2b_default_topology_outlet_angle() set_b2b_default_topology_inlet_angle(value) get_b2b_default_topology_inlet_angle() set_b2b_default_topology_enable_wake_control() set_b2b_default_topology_disable_wake_control() get_b2b_default_topology_wake_control() set_b2b_default_topology_enable_wake_prolongation() set_b2b_default_topology_wake_control_deviation_angle(value) get_b2b_default_topology_wake_control_deviation_angle() set_b2b_default_topology_enable_leading_edge_zcstline() set_b2b_default_topology_disable_trailing_edge_zcstline()
d) Intersection Control
set_b2b_default_topology_chord_control_points_number(value) get_b2b_default_topology_chord_control_points_number() set_b2b_default_topology_intersection_quality(value)
Value should be either 0 for low quality or 1 for high quality.
get_b2b_default_topology_intersection_quality() set_b2b_default_topology_intersection_law(value)
Value should be 0 for curvature or 1 for uniform.
get_b2b_default_topology_intersection_law() set_b2b_default_topology_intersection_control_point_number(value)
Useful only if low quality intersection and intersection law set to uniform.
get_b2b_default_topology_intersection_control_point_number() set_b2b_blade_reference_angle(value) get_b2b_blade_reference_angle()
12-3.9.4 HOH Topology Parameters a) Topology Control

set_b2b_hoh_topology_enable_inlet_extension() set_b2b_hoh_topology_disable_inlet_extension() get_b2b_hoh_topology_inlet_extension() set_b2b_hoh_topology_enable_outlet_extension() set_b2b_hoh_topology_disable_outlet_extension() get_b2b_hoh_topology_outlet_extension()
AutoGrid5
12-17
Python Script
set_b2b_hoh_topology_inlet_I_extension_type() set_b2b_hoh_topology_inlet_H_extension_type() get_b2b_hoh_topology_inlet_H_extension_type() set_b2b_hoh_topology_outlet_I_extension_type() set_b2b_hoh_topology_outlet_H_extension_type() get_b2b_hoh_topology_outlet_H_extension_type() set_b2b_hoh_topology_inlet_extension_location(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_inlet_extension_location() set_b2b_hoh_topology_outlet_extension_location(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_outlet_extension_location()
b) Grid Points Control

set_b2b_hoh_topology_inlet_extension_streamwise_npts(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_inlet_extension_streamwise_npts() set_b2b_hoh_topology_outlet_extension_streamwise_npts(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_outlet_extension_streamwise_npts() set_b2b_hoh_topology_npts_in_boundary_layer(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_npts_in_boundary_layer() set_b2b_hoh_topology_npts_around_boundary_layer(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_npts_around_boundary_layer() set_b2b_hoh_topology_suction_and_pressure_side_npts(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_suction_and_pressure_side_npts() set_b2b_hoh_topology_H_inlet_azimuthal_npts_1(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_H_inlet_azimuthal_npts_1() set_b2b_hoh_topology_H_inlet_azimuthal_npts_2(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_H_inlet_azimuthal_npts_2() set_b2b_hoh_topology_H_inlet_azimuthal_npts_3(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_H_inlet_azimuthal_npts_3() set_b2b_hoh_topology_I_inlet_azimuthal_npts(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_I_inlet_azimuthal_npts() set_b2b_hoh_topology_H_outlet_azimuthal_npts_1(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_H_outlet_azimuthal_npts_1() set_b2b_hoh_topology_H_outlet_azimuthal_npts_2(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_H_outlet_azimuthal_npts_2() set_b2b_hoh_topology_H_outlet_azimuthal_npts_3(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_H_outlet_azimuthal_npts_3() set_b2b_hoh_topology_I_outlet_azimuthal_npts(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_I_outlet_azimuthal_npts() set_b2b_hoh_topology_I_inlet_periodic_npts(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_I_inlet_periodic_npts()
12-18
AutoGrid5
Python Script
set_b2b_hoh_topology_I_outlet_periodic_npts(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_I_outlet_periodic_npts() set_b2b_hoh_topology_gap_matching_with_main_channel() get_b2b_hoh_topology_gap_matching_with_main_channel() set_b2b_hoh_topology_gap_non_matching_with_main_channel() set_b2b_hoh_topology_gap_azimuthal_O_number_of_points(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_gap_azimuthal_O_number_of_points() set_b2b_hoh_topology_gap_azimuthal_H_number_of_points(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_gap_azimuthal_H_number_of_points() set_b2b_hoh_topology_gap_streamwise_H_number_of_points(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_gap_streamwise_H_number_of_points() set_b2b_hoh_topology_gap_d1_d2_addition(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_gap_d1_d2_addition() set_b2b_hoh_topology_gap_d1_d2_ratio(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_gap_d1_d2_ratio() set_b2b_hoh_topology_gap_d3_d4_addition(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_gap_d3_d4_addition() set_b2b_hoh_topology_gap_d3_d4_ratio(value) get_b2b_hoh_topology_gap_d3_d4_ratio()
c) Leading Edge Grid Points Distribution Control

set_b2b_hoh_leading_edge_control_type_none() set_b2b_hoh_leading_edge_control_type_absolute_distance() set_b2b_hoh_leading_edge_control_type_relative_distance() set_b2b_hoh_leading_edge_control_type_cell_lenght() get_b2b_hoh_leading_edge_control_type() set_b2b_hoh_leading_edge_control_absolute_distance(value) get_b2b_hoh_leading_edge_control_absolute_distance() set_b2b_hoh_leading_edge_control_relative_distance(value) get_b2b_hoh_leading_edge_control_relative_distance() set_b2b_hoh_leading_edge_control_cell_lenght(value) get_b2b_hoh_leading_edge_control_cell_lenght()
d) Trailing Edge Grid Points Distribution Control

set_b2b_hoh_trailing_edge_control_type_none() set_b2b_hoh_trailing_edge_control_type_absolute_distance() set_b2b_hoh_trailing_edge_control_type_relative_distance() set_b2b_hoh_trailing_edge_control_type_cell_lenght() get_b2b_hoh_trailing_edge_control_type() set_b2b_hoh_trailing_edge_control_absolute_distance(value)
AutoGrid5
12-19
Python Script
get_b2b_hoh_trailing_edge_control_absolute_distance() set_b2b_hoh_trailing_edge_control_relative_distance(value) get_b2b_hoh_trailing_edge_control_relative_distance() set_b2b_hoh_trailing_edge_control_cell_lenght(value) get_b2b_hoh_trailing_edge_control_cell_lenght() set_b2b_hoh_blade_points_distribution_smoothing_steps(value) get_b2b_hoh_blade_points_distribution_smoothing_steps() set_b2b_hoh_wake_clustering(value) get_b2b_hoh_wake_clustering()
e) Mesh Control

set_b2b_mesh_control_bnd_layer_factor(value) get_b2b_mesh_control_bnd_layer_factor() set_b2b_mesh_control_bnd_layer_cell_width(value) get_b2b_mesh_control_bnd_layer_cell_width()
12-3.9.5 H&I Topology Parameters a) Topology Control

set_b2b_HI_topology_H_inlet(value) get_b2b_HI_topology_H_inlet() set_b2b_HI_topology_H_outlet(value) get_b2b_HI_topology_H_outlet() set_b2b_HI_topology_skin_block(value) get_b2b_HI_topology_skin_block()
b) Grid Points Control

set_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_blade_inlet_down(value) get_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_blade_inlet_down() set_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_blade_down(value) get_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_blade_down() set_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_blade_lower_side(value) get_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_blade_lower_side() set_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_blade_outlet_down(value) get_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_blade_outlet_down() set_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_blade_inlet_up(value) get_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_blade_inlet_up() set_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_blade_up(value) get_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_blade_up() set_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_blade_outlet_up(value) get_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_streamwise_blade_outlet_up()
12-20
AutoGrid5
Python Script
set_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_azimutal_inlet(value) get_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_azimutal_inlet() set_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_azimutal_outlet(value) get_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_azimutal_outlet() set_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_azimutal_inlet_up(value) get_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_azimutal_inlet_up() set_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_azimutal_outlet_up(value) get_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_azimutal_outlet_up() set_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_leading_edge_index(value) set_b2b_HI_topology_grid_point_number_trailing_edge_index(value)
c) Mesh Control

set_b2b_HI_topology_automatic_clustering_relaxation(value) get_b2b_HI_topology_automatic_clustering_relaxation() set_b2b_HI_topology_clustering_relaxation(value) get_b2b_HI_topology_clustering_relaxation()
12-3.9.6 Cooling - Conjugate Heat Transfer Parameters

set_solid_body_configuration(type)
Type should be between 0 and 12: 0: disable solid body mesh generation 1: basin+cooling channel 2: basin 3: cooling channel 4: radial holes without basin and without cooling channel 5: solid body alone 6: cooling channel without tip wall 7: pennies at hub 8: pennies at shroud 9: pennies at hub & shroud 10: squiller tip on lower side 11: squiller tip on upper side 12: squiller tip on camber line
get_solid_body_configuration()
a) Blade Cooling Holes Control

number_of_holes_lines() add_holes_line() holes_line(i) generate_holes()
b) Cooling Channel & Basin Control

solid_body() cooling_channel()
AutoGrid5
12-21
Python Script
is_solid_body_parametric() enable_solid_body_parametric_definition() disable_solid_body_parametric_definition() enable_solid_body_shape_blunt_trailing_edge() disable_solid_body_shape_blunt_trailing_edge() get_solid_body_shape_blunt_trailing_edge() set_solid_body_shape_number_of_control_points(value) get_solid_body_shape_number_of_control_points() set_solid_body_shape_start_location(value) get_solid_body_shape_start_location() set_solid_body_shape_end_location(value) get_solid_body_shape_end_location() set_solid_body_shape_start_width(value) get_solid_body_shape_start_width() set_solid_body_shape_middle_width(value) get_solid_body_shape_middle_width() set_solid_body_shape_end_width(value) get_solid_body_shape_end_width() set_solid_body_geometry_from_geomTurbo_file(geomTurbo_file) set_solid_body_streamwise_distribution_type_same_as_blade() set_solid_body_streamwise_distribution_type_adapted() get_solid_body_streamwise_distribution_type() set_solid_body_number_of_points_azimutal(value) get_solid_body_number_of_points_azimutal()
c) Basin Holes & Separator Control

number_of_basin_holes() add_basin_hole() basin_hole(i) init_basin_holes_from_external_file(filename) export_basin_holes_geometry() export_basin_holes_definition() number_of_basin_separators() add_basin_separator() basin_separator(i)
d) Pin Fins & Ribs Control

add_pin_fins_channel()
12-22
AutoGrid5
Python Script
12-3.10 Gap Class Commands

select() delete() link_non_axisymmetric_geometry(surface_names) set_non_axisymmetric_hub() unset_non_axisymmetric_hub() set_non_axisymmetric_hub_repair_damage() unset_non_axisymmetric_hub_repair_damage() create_chimera_block() skip_chimera_block() set_topology_HO() set_topology_O() get_topology_type() set_width_at_leading_edge(value) get_width_at_leading_edge() set_width_at_trailing_edge(value) get_width_at_trailing_edge() set_clustering(value) get_clustering() set_constant_cell_number(value) get_constant_cell_number() set_number_of_points_in_spanwise_direction(value) get_number_of_points_in_spanwise_direction() enable_defined_shape() disable_defined_shape() define_shape(curve_file_name) get_defined_shape()
12-3.11 Fillet Class Commands

select() set_radius_at_leading_edge(value) get_radius_at_leading_edge() set_radius_at_trailing_edge(value) get_radius_at_trailing_edge() set_minimum_angle(value) get_minimum_angle() set_clustering(value) get_clustering() set_constant_cell_number(value)
AutoGrid5
12-23
Python Script
get_constant_cell_number() set_number_of_points_in_spanwise_direction(value) get_number_of_points_in_spanwise_direction() enable_defined_shape() disable_defined_shape() define_shape(curve_file_name) get_defined_shape()
12-3.12 WizardLETE Class Commands

select() delete() generate(replace_le=1,replace_te=1) set_layer_upstream_hub_location(value,update=0) get_layer_upstream_hub_location() set_layer_downstream_hub_location(value,update=0) get_layer_downstream_hub_location() set_layer_upstream_shroud_location(value,update=0) get_layer_upstream_shroud_location() set_layer_downstream_shroud_location(value,update=0) get_layer_downstream_shroud_location() set_layer_hub_clustering(value,update=0) get_layer_hub_clustering() set_layer_shroud_clustering(value,update=0) get_layer_shroud_clustering() set_layer_number(value,update=0) get_layer_number() set_layer_number_of_control_points(value,update=0) get_layer_number_of_control_points() set_layer_number_of_constant_cells(value,update=0) get_layer_number_of_constant_cells() last_section_is_used() last_section_is_not_used() is_last_section_used() first_section_is_used() first_section_is_not_used() is_first_section_used() set_blade_normal_type() set_blade_very_low_angle_type() set_blade_very_high_angle_type()
12-24
AutoGrid5
Python Script
get_blade_type() set_hub_expansion(value,update=0) get_hub_expansion() set_shroud_expansion(value,update=0) get_shroud_expansion() set_leading_edge_location(layer,value,update=0) get_leading_edge_location(layer) set_trailing_edge_location(layer,value,update=0) get_trailing_edge_location(layer) set_chord_tolerance_at_le(value,update=0) get_chord_tolerance_at_le() set_chord_tolerance_at_te(value,update=0) get_chord_tolerance_at_te() set_iteration_steps(value,update=0) get_iteration_steps() set_active_layer(index) get_number_of_control_point() get_point_leading_edge_xyz (index) get_point_trailing_edge_xyz (index) get_point_leading_edge_mt (index) get_point_trailing_edge_mt (index)
12-3.13 Blade Sheet Class Commands

select() delete() lower_zone() upper_zone() set_type(value) Value should be either 0 for lower side, 1 for upper side or 2 for both sides. get_type() set_width(value) get_width() set_distance_from_leading_edge(value) get_distance_from_leading_edge() set_distance_from_trailing_edge(value) get_distance_from_trailing_edge() set_npts_near_leading_edge(value) get_npts_near_leading_edge() set_npts_near_trailing_edge(value)
AutoGrid5
12-25
Python Script
get_npts_near_trailing_edge()
12-3.14 RSInterface Class Commands

select() copy_left_meridional_distribution() copy_right_meridional_distribution() paste_left_meridional_distribution() paste_right_meridional_distribution() merge_meridional_distribution() set_name(value) get_name() streamwise_number_of_points(value) get_streamwise_number_of_points() streamwise_index(value) get_streamwise_index() enable_b2b_control() disable_b2b_control() get_b2b_control() geometry_is_fixed() geometry_is_not_fixed() get_geometry_is_fixed() cell_width_in_streamwise_direction(value) get_cell_width_in_streamwise_direction() set_linear_shape() set_default_shape() set_z_cst_shape(value) set_r_cst_shape(value) get_shape() get_r_cst_value() get_z_cst_value() set_relative_location(value) set_external_curve(file_name) link_geometry(curve_names) Curve_names should be a list, even if it is composed of only 1 element (use [ ]). set_reference_frame_relative() set_reference_frame_absolute() get_reference_frame() get_relative_location() get_reference_row()
12-26
AutoGrid5
Python Script
get_reference_row_location() move_control_point(i,point)
12-3.15 BasicCurve Class Commands

This class gives access to parameters of basic curves defining the channel, nozzle and ZR effects.
delete() set_discretisation(i) get_discretisation() check_geometry() set_data_reduction(reduction, min_dist=1e-6, max_angle=80) get_data_reduction() get_data_reduction_minimal_distance() get_data_reduction_maximum_angle()
12-3.16 StagnationPoint Class Commands

This class gives access to parameters of blade leading and trailing edge in blade to blade view (only accessible in default topology).
set_distribution_type_absolute_distance() set_distribution_type_relative_distance() set_distribution_type_cell_lenght() get_distribution_type() set_distribution_absolute_distance(value) get_distribution_absolute_distance() set_distribution_relative_distance(value) get_distribution_relative_distance() set_distribution_cell_lenght(value) get_distribution_cell_lenght() enable_distribution_from_expansion_ratio() disable_distribution_from_expansion_ratio() get_distribution_from_expansion_ratio() desired_expansion_ratio(value) get_desired_expansion_ratio() set_percentage_cst_cell(value) get_percentage_cst_cell()
12-3.17 TechnologicalEffectZR Class Commands

select()
AutoGrid5
12-27
Python Script
block_list() set_parameters(expMax,w,opt,cst,exp,opt2,per,coarse,tol,p)
expMax : maximum expansion ratio w : wall cell width opt : smoothing steps cst : percentage constant cell exp : radial expansion opt2 : far field smooth smoothing steps per : periodic fnmb coarse : coarse grid level tol : connection tolerance p : propagate theta deviation
technoEffectmeridional_toggle_grid_rep() technoEffectmeridional_computeDefaultMesh() technologicalEffectZR(B,row):# indices from 1

Returns an object of class ZR effect. B can be either a ZR effect name or a ZR effect index.
technoEffectmeridional_start_edit_mode() technoEffectmeridional_stop_edit_mode()
12-3.18 TechnologicalEffect3D Class Commands

select() delete() block_list() set_name(name) load_geometry(file_name) load_topology(name) save_topology(name) copy_topology() paste_topology() link_geometry(curve_names, surface_names) Curve_names and surface_names should be a list, even if it is composed of only 1 element (use [ ]).
12-3.19 Cooling Channel Class Commands

select() pinFinsChannel(i)
Returns an object of class PinFinsChannel.
12-3.20 Hole Class Commands

select() delete()
12-28
AutoGrid5
Python Script
setName(value) getName()
12-3.20.1Hole Location Control a) Parametric Mode (all hole type excepted grooves)

set_spanwise_location(value,highlight=1) get_spanwise_location() set_streamwise_location_from_leading_edge(value,highlight=1) get_streamwise_location_from_leading_edge() set_streamwise_location_from_trailing_edge(value,highlight=1) get_streamwise_location_from_trailing_edge() set_streamwise_location_on_chord_lenght(value,highlight=1) get_streamwise_location_on_chord_lenght()
b) XYZ Mode

set_x_location(value,highlight=1) get_x_location() set_y_location(value,highlight=1) get_y_location() set_z_location(value,highlight=1) get_z_location() set_x2_location(value,highlight=1) get_x2_location() set_y2_location(value,highlight=1) get_y2_location() set_z2_location(value,highlight=1) get_z2_location()
c) RTHZ Mode

set_r_location(value,highlight=1) get_r_location() set_theta_location(value,highlight=1) get_theta_location() set_z_location(value,highlight=1) get_z_location() set_r2_location(value,highlight=1) get_r2_location() set_theta2_location(value,highlight=1) get_theta2_location() set_z2_location(value,highlight=1)
AutoGrid5
12-29
Python Script
get_z2_location()
12-3.20.2Hole Axis Control a) Parametric Mode (all hole type excepted grooves)

set_streamwise_angle(value,highlight=1) get_streamwise_angle() set_spanwise_angle(value,highlight=1) get_spanwise_angle()
b) XYZ Mode (all hole type excepted grooves)

set_x_axis(value,highlight=1) get_x_axis() set_y_axis(value,highlight=1) get_y_axis() set_z_axis(value,highlight=1) get_z_axis()
c) RTHZ Mode (all hole type excepted grooves)

set_r_axis(value,highlight=1) get_r_axis() set_theta_axis(value,highlight=1) get_theta_axis() set_z_axis(value,highlight=1) get_z_axis()
12-3.20.3Hole Dimension Control

set_depth(value,highlight=1) get_depth()
a) Circular Shape
set_diameter(value,highlight=1) get_diameter()
b) Rectangular/Oval Shape
set_width(value,highlight=1) get_width()
c) Grooves (Parametric Mode)

set_heigth(value,highlight=1) get_heigth()
12-30
AutoGrid5
Python Script
d) Quadrilateral Shape (4-Sided)

set_holes_p1x(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p1x() set_holes_p2x(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p2x() set_holes_p3x(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p3x() set_holes_p4x(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p4x() set_holes_p1y(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p1y() set_holes_p2y(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p2y() set_holes_p3y(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p3y() set_holes_p4y(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p4y()
12-3.20.4Hole Orientation Control

set_orientation_angle(value,highlight=1) get_orientation_angle()
12-3.21 HolesLine Class Commands

select() delete() number_of_holes() hole(i) setName(value) getName() preview3D() hide2D()
12-3.21.1External File Control

exportGeometry() exportDefinition() defineGeometry(file_name)
AutoGrid5
12-31
Python Script
12-3.21.2Hole Line Geometry Control a) Holes Number

set_holes_number(value,highlight=1) get_holes_number()
b) Hole Shape

set_circular_shape(highlight=1) set_rectangular_shape(highlight=1) set_oval_shape(highlight=1) set_trailing_edge_groove_shape(highlight=1) set_trailing_edge_circular_hole_shape(highlight=1) set_quadrilateral_shape(highlight=1) get_shape(highlight=1)
c) Hole Location
set_location_to_blade_upper_side(highlight=1) set_location_to_blade_lower_side(highlight=1) c.1) Parametric Mode
enable_parametric_holes_location(highlight=1) set_first_spanwise_parametric_location(value,highlight=1) get_first_spanwise_parametric_location(highlight=1) set_last_spanwise_parametric_location(value,highlight=1) get_last_spanwise_parametric_location() set_streamwise_location_on_meridional_chord(value,highlight=1) set_streamwise_location_from_leading_edge(value,highlight=1) set_streamwise_location_from_trailing_edge(value,highlight=1) set_first_streamwise_location_on_meridional_chord(value,highlight=1) get_first_streamwise_location_on_meridional_chord() set_first_streamwise_location_from_leading_edge(value,highlight=1) get_first_streamwise_location_from_leading_edge() set_first_streamwise_location_from_trailing_edge(value,highlight=1) get_first_streamwise_location_from_trailing_edge() set_last_streamwise_location_on_meridional_chord(value,highlight=1) get_last_streamwise_location_on_meridional_chord() set_last_streamwise_location_from_leading_edge(value,highlight=1) get_last_streamwise_location_from_leading_edge() set_last_streamwise_location_from_trailing_edge(value,highlight=1) get_last_streamwise_location_from_trailing_edge()
12-32
AutoGrid5
Python Script
c.2) XYZ Mode

enable_xyz_holes_location(highlight=1) set_x_location(value,highlight=1) get_x_location() set_y_location(value,highlight=1) get_y_location() set_z_location(value,highlight=1) get_z_location() set_x2_location(value,highlight=1) get_x2_location() set_y2_location(value,highlight=1) get_y2_location() set_z2_location(value,highlight=1) get_z2_location()
c.3) RTHZ Mode

enable_mtheta_holes_location(highlight=1) set_r_location(value,highlight=1) get_r_location() set_theta_location(value,highlight=1) get_theta_location() set_z_location(value,highlight=1) get_z_location() set_r2_location(value,highlight=1) get_r2_location() set_theta2_location(value,highlight=1) get_theta2_location() set_z2_location(value,highlight=1) get_z2_location()
d) Hole Axis
enable_parametric_holes_axis(highlight=1) set_streamwise_angle(value,highlight=1) get_streamwise_angle() set_spanwise_angle(value,highlight=1) get_spanwise_angle()
d.2) XYZ Mode enable_xyz_holes_axis(highlight=1) set_x_axis(value,highlight=1)
AutoGrid5
12-33
Python Script
get_x_axis() set_y_axis(value,highlight=1) get_y_axis() set_z_axis(value,highlight=1) get_z_axis()
d.3) RTHZ Mode

enable_rthz_holes_axis(highlight=1) set_r_axis(value,highlight=1) get_r_axis() set_theta_axis(value,highlight=1) get_theta_axis() set_z_axis(value,highlight=1) get_z_axis()
e) Hole Dimension
set_depth(value,highlight=1) get_depth() e.1) Circular Shape set_diameter(value,highlight=1) get_diameter() e.2) Rectangular/Oval Shape set_width(value,highlight=1) get_width() e.3) Grooves (Parametric Mode) set_heigth(value,highlight=1) get_heigth() e.4) Quadrilateral Shape (4-Sided)
set_holes_p1x(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p1x() set_holes_p2x(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p2x() set_holes_p3x(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p3x() set_holes_p4x(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p4x() set_holes_p1y(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p1y()
12-34
AutoGrid5
Python Script
set_holes_p2y(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p2y() set_holes_p3y(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p3y() set_holes_p4y(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p4y()
f) Hole Orientation
12-3.21.3Hole Line Mesh Control a) Grid Points Number

set_number_of_points_in_boundary_layer(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_in_boundary_layer() set_number_of_points_streamwise(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_streamwise() set_number_of_points_spanwise(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_spanwise() set_number_of_points_streamwise_left(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_streamwise_left() set_number_of_points_streamwise_right(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_streamwise_right() set_number_of_points_spanwise_up(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_spanwise_up() set_number_of_points_spanwise_down(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_spanwise_down()
b) Optimization

set_number_of_optimization_steps_inside_holes(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_optimization_steps_inside_holes() enable_skewness_control_inside_holes() disable_skewness_control_inside_holes() get_skewness_control_inside_holes() set_number_of_optimization_steps_arround_holes(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_optimization_steps_arround_holes() enable_skewness_control_arround_holes() disable_skewness_control_arround_holes() get_skewness_control_arround_holes()
AutoGrid5
12-35
Python Script
c) Wake Control

set_upstream_wake_lenght(value,highlight=1) get_upstream_wake_lenght() set_downstream_wake_lenght(value,highlight=1) get_downstream_wake_lenght()
d) Holes Line Mesh Shape Control

set_hole_line_shape_link_to_next_hole_line_shape(value,highlight=1) get_hole_line_shape_link_to_next_hole_line_shape() set_hole_line_shape_link_to_previous_hole_line_shape(value,highlight=1) get_hole_line_shape_link_to_previous_hole_line_shape()
12-3.21.4Global Mesh Control

set_preserved_layers_on_lower_side(value,highlight=1) get_preserved_layers_on_lower_side() set_preserved_layers_on_upper_side(value,highlight=1) get_preserved_layers_on_upper_side() set_intersection_tolerance(value,highlight=1) get_intersection_tolerance()
12-3.22 Basin Class Commands

select() delete()
12-3.22.1Global Parameters

reset_parametrization_up() reset_parametrization_down() set_optimization_steps(value) get_optimization_steps()
12-3.22.2Hole Parameters

set_boundary_optimization_steps() get_boundary_optimization_steps() enable_parametric_location() enable_XYZ_location(value) set_parametric_streamwise_location(value) get_parametric_streamwise_location() set_anchor_points_x_coordinate(value) get_anchor_points_x_coordinate() set_anchor_points_y_coordinate(value)
12-36
AutoGrid5
Python Script
get_anchor_points_y_coordinate() set_anchor_points_z_coordinate(value) get_anchor_points_z_coordinate() set_axis_x_coordinate(value) get_axis_x_coordinate() set_axis_y_coordinate(value) get_axis_y_coordinate() set_axis_z_coordinate(value) get_axis_z_coordinate() set_number_of_points_on_hole_side(value) get_number_of_points_on_hole_side()
a) Basin Hole

set_diameter(value) get_diameter() set_number_of_points_in_bnd_layer(value) get_number_of_points_in_bnd_layer() set_parametric_azimutal_deviation(value) get_parametric_azimutal_deviation()
b) Separator
set_width(value) get_width()
c) Penny

set_diameter(value) get_diameter() set_number_of_points_in_bnd_layer(value) get_number_of_points_in_bnd_layer() set_parametric_azimutal_deviation(value) get_parametric_azimutal_deviation() set_rotation_angle(value) get_rotation_angle()
12-3.23 PinFinsChannel Class Commands

select() delete() box() view_mesh(pinfinstype,boxtype,boxside,clear=1)
AutoGrid5
12-37
Python Script
pinfinstype : 0, 1 for grid, 2 for solid and 3 for both box type : 0, 1, 2 or 3 box side : 0, 1 or 2.
viewbox(side,rep) hidebox() link_geometry(curve_names,surfaces_name) edit() stop_edit() generate() number_of_pinFins_line() add_pinFins_line() pinFins_line(i) Returns an object of class PinFinsLine.
12-3.24 PinFinsLine Class Commands

select() delete() getName() number_of_pinFins() pinFin(i) Returns an object of class PinFin.
preview3D() hide3D()

exportGeometry() exportDefinition() defineGeometry(file_name)
12-3.24.2Pin Fins Line Geometry Control a) Pin Fins Number

set_pinfins_number(value,highlight=1) get_pinfins_number()
b)

Pin Fin Shape

set_circular_shape(highlight=1) set_rectangular_shape(highlight=1) set_oval_shape(highlight=1) set_quadrilateral_shape(highlight=1) get_shape(highlight=1)
12-38
AutoGrid5
Python Script
c) Pin Fin Location

enable_parametric_pinfins_location(highlight=1) set_first_spanwise_parametric_location(value,highlight=1) get_first_spanwise_parametric_location() set_last_spanwise_parametric_location(value,highlight=1) get_last_spanwise_parametric_location() set_streamwise_location(value,highlight=1) get_streamwise_location()
c.2) XYZ Mode

enable_xyz_pinfins_location(highlight=1) set_x_location(value,highlight=1) get_x_location() set_y_location(value,highlight=1) get_y_location() set_z_location(value,highlight=1) get_z_location()
c.3) UV Mode
enable_UV_pinfins_location(highlight=1) set_U_location(value,highlight=1) get_U_location() set_V_location(value,highlight=1) get_V_location()
d) Pin Fin Axis Control

enable_parametric_pinfins_axis(highlight=1) set_streamwise_angle(value,highlight=1) get_streamwise_angle() set_spanwise_angle(value,highlight=1) get_spanwise_angle()
d.2) XYZ Mode

enable_xyz_pinfins_axis(highlight=1) set_x_axis(value,highlight=1) get_x_axis() set_y_axis(value,highlight=1) get_y_axis() set_z_axis(value,highlight=1)
AutoGrid5
12-39
Python Script
get_z_axis()
e) Pin Fin Dimension Control

set_depth(value,highlight=1) get_depth() e.1) Circular Shape
set_diameter(value,highlight=1) get_diameter() set_diameter2(value,highlight=1) get_diameter2()
e.2) Rectangular/Oval Shape

set_width(value,highlight=1) get_width() set_heigth(value,highlight=1) get_heigth()
e.3) Quadrilateral Shape (4-Sided)

f) Pin Fin Orientation Control

12-40
AutoGrid5
Python Script
12-3.24.3Pin Fin Mesh Control a) Grid Points Number

set_number_of_points_in_boundary_layer(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_in_boundary_layer() set_number_of_points_streamwise(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_streamwise() set_number_of_points_spanwise(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_spanwise() set_number_of_points_streamwise_left(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_streamwise_left() set_number_of_points_streamwise_right(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_streamwise_right() set_number_of_points_spanwise_up(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_spanwise_up() set_number_of_points_spanwise_down(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_spanwise_down()
b) Optimization

set_number_of_optimization_steps_inside_holes(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_optimization_steps_inside_holes() enable_skewness_control_inside_holes() disable_skewness_control_inside_holes() get_skewness_control_inside_holes() set_number_of_optimization_steps_arround_holes(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_optimization_steps_arround_holes() enable_skewness_control_arround_holes() disable_skewness_control_arround_holes() get_skewness_control_arround_holes()
c) Wake Control


AutoGrid5
12-41
Python Script

12-3.25 PinFin Class Commands

select() delete() getName()
12-3.25.1Pin Fin Location a) Parametric Mode

set_first_spanwise_parametric_location(value,highlight=1) get_first_spanwise_parametric_location() set_last_spanwise_parametric_location(value,highlight=1) get_last_spanwise_parametric_location() set_streamwise_location(value,highlight=1) get_streamwise_location()
b) XYZ Mode

set_x_location(value,highlight=1) get_x_location() set_y_location(value,highlight=1) get_y_location() set_z_location(value,highlight=1) get_z_location()
c) UV Mode

set_U_location(value,highlight=1) get_U_location() set_V_location(value,highlight=1) get_V_location()
12-42
AutoGrid5
Python Script
12-3.25.2Pin Fin Axis Control a) Parametric Mode

b) XYZ Mode

12-3.25.3Pin Fin Dimension Control

set_depth(value,highlight=1) get_depth()
a) Circular Shape

set_diameter(value,highlight=1) get_diameter() set_diameter2(value,highlight=1) get_diameter2()

set_width(value,highlight=1) get_width() set_heigth(value,highlight=1) get_heigth()
c) Quadrilateral Shape (4-Sided)

set_holes_p1x(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p1x() set_holes_p2x(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p2x() set_holes_p3x(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p3x() set_holes_p4x(value,highlight=1)
AutoGrid5
12-43
Python Script
get_holes_p4x() set_holes_p1y(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p1y() set_holes_p2y(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p2y() set_holes_p3y(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p3y() set_holes_p4y(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p4y()
12-3.25.4Pin Fin Orientation Control

12-3.26 EndWall Class Commands

select() delete()
12-3.26.1End Wall Generation Control

generate() generate_holes()
12-3.26.2End Wall Parameters Control

set_width(value) get_width() set_number_of_spanwise_points(value) get_number_of_spanwise_points() set_number_of_optimization_steps(value) get_number_of_optimization_steps() enable_multigrid_optimization(value) disable_multigrid_optimization(value) get_multigrid_optimization_status() number_of_holes_lines() add_holes_line() holes_line(i)
12-3.27 EndWallHole Class Commands

select() delete()
12-44
AutoGrid5
Python Script
setName(value) getName()
12-3.27.1Hole Location Control a) XYZ Mode

set_x_location(value,highlight=1) get_x_location() set_y_location(value,highlight=1) get_y_location() set_z_location(value,highlight=1) get_z_location()
b) MTheta Mode

set_m_location(value,highlight=1) get_m_location() set_theta_location(value,highlight=1) get_theta_location()
12-3.27.2Hole Axis Control a) Parametric Mode

b) XYZ Mode

12-3.27.3Hole Dimension Control a) Circular Shape

set_holes_diameter(value,highlight=1) get_holes_diameter()
AutoGrid5
12-45
Python Script

set_holes_width(value,highlight=1) get_holes_width() set_holes_heigth(value,highlight=1) get_holes_heigth()
c) Quadrilateral Shape (4-Sided)

12-3.27.4Hole Dimension Control

12-3.28 EndWallHolesLine Class Commands

select() delete() number_of_holes() hole(i) setName(value) getName()

exportGeometry() exportDefinition()
12-46
AutoGrid5
Python Script
defineGeometry(file_name)
12-3.28.2Hole Line Geometry Control a) Holes Number

set_holes_number(value,highlight=1) get_holes_number()
b) Hole Shape

set_circular_shape(highlight=1) set_rectangular_shape(highlight=1) set_oval_shape(highlight=1) set_quadrilateral_shape(highlight=1) get_shape(highlight=1)
c) Hole Location
enable_parametric_holes_location(highlight=1) set_first_theta_location(value,highlight=1) get_first_theta_location(highlight=1) set_last_theta_location(value,highlight=1) get_last_theta_location(highlight=1) set_streamwise_location(value,highlight=1) get_streamwise_location(highlight=1)
c.2) XYZ Mode

enable_xyz_holes_location(highlight=1) set_x_location(value,highlight=1) get_x_location() set_y_location(value,highlight=1) get_y_location() set_z_location(value,highlight=1) get_z_location()
c.3) MTheta Mode

enable_mtheta_holes_location(highlight=1) set_m_location(value,highlight=1) get_m_location() set_theta_location(value,highlight=1) get_theta_location()
AutoGrid5
12-47
Python Script
d) Hole Axis
enable_parametric_holes_axis(highlight=1) set_streamwise_angle(value,highlight=1) get_streamwise_angle() set_spanwise_angle(value,highlight=1) get_spanwise_angle()
d.2) XYZ Mode

enable_xyz_holes_axis(highlight=1) set_x_axis(value,highlight=1) get_x_axis() set_y_axis(value,highlight=1) get_y_axis() set_z_axis(value,highlight=1) get_z_axis()
e) Hole Dimension
e.1) Circular Shape set_holes_diameter(value,highlight=1) get_holes_diameter() e.2) Rectangular/Oval Shape
set_holes_width(value,highlight=1) get_holes_width() set_holes_heigth(value,highlight=1) get_holes_heigth()
e.4) Quadrilateral Shape (4-Sided)

set_holes_p1x(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p1x() set_holes_p2x(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p2x() set_holes_p3x(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p3x() set_holes_p4x(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p4x() set_holes_p1y(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p1y() set_holes_p2y(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p2y()
12-48
AutoGrid5
Python Script
set_holes_p3y(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p3y() set_holes_p4y(value,highlight=1) get_holes_p4y()
f) Hole Orientation
12-3.28.3Hole Line Mesh Control a) Grid Points Number

set_number_of_points_in_boundary_layer(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_in_boundary_layer() set_number_of_points_streamwise(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_streamwise() set_number_of_points_azimutal(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_azimutal() set_number_of_points_streamwise_left(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_streamwise_left() set_number_of_points_streamwise_right(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_streamwise_right() set_number_of_points_azimutal_up(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_azimutal_up() set_number_of_points_azimutal_down(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_points_azimutal_down() set_up_clustering_relaxation(value,highlight=1) get_up_clustering_relaxation() set_down_clustering_relaxation(value,highlight=1) get_down_clustering_relaxation()
b) Optimization

set_number_of_optimization_steps_inside_holes(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_optimization_steps_inside_holes() enable_skewness_control_inside_holes() disable_skewness_control_inside_holes() get_skewness_control_inside_holes() set_number_of_optimization_steps_arround_holes(value,highlight=1) get_number_of_optimization_steps_arround_holes() enable_skewness_control_arround_holes() disable_skewness_control_arround_holes()
AutoGrid5
12-49
Python Script
get_skewness_control_arround_holesc
c) Wake Control



12-50
AutoGrid5
Index
INDEX
Numerics 3D Block Naming 8-3 3D Effect 10-1 3D Generation 10-6 A Active B2B Layer 2-54 Active Layer 3-18 Add Wizard LE TE 5-23 ADT algorithm 2-33 Angular Deviation 2-36 Aspect Ratio 2-36 Axial Compressor 4-22 Axial Fan 4-24 Axial Turbine 4-20 B B2B Cut 8-7 Background Color 1-6 Balloon Help 2-18 Basic Curves 6-1 Basin 11-4, 11-8 Holes 11-27 Separator 11-27 Basin Bottom Wall 11-8 Batch 3-23 Blade Clustering 7-35 Configuration 11-2 Definition 3-3 Expansion 5-18 Management Icons 2-47 Offset 7-49 Rotation 5-37 Solid Mesh 11-1 Tip 4-17 Blade Holes 11-14 Geometry 11-17 Mesh 11-23 Blade to Blade Control 3-14, 4-11 Mesh Visibility 2-18 Optimization 7-55 Quality Visibility 2-18 Settings 4-14 Topology 7-3 Blend 5-20, 7-14, 7-44 Block Group 2-57 Sweep 2-20 Blunt 5-18, 5-12, 7-20 Throat 7-15 Bnd Straight Control 7-59 Boundaries Optimization 7-59 Boundary Conditions 2-26, 8-4 Filters 2-27 Inlet 7-18 Outlet 7-18 Periodic 7-9 Types 2-27 Boundary Layer Factor 7-33 Bulb Control 6-17 Control Lines 6-9 Bypass Control 6-18 Control Lines 6-9 Geometry 5-11, 5-13 C CAD Format 3-9 CAD Import Interface 5-3 Cascade 5-33 CATIA V5 2-12 Cell Width 2-36, 3-13, 7-29 Cell Width Ratio 2-39 CGNS 2-15 Channel Connection 9-10 Control 6-11 Shading 2-18 Check Meridional Curves 6-11 Clustering 3-17 Clustering around Blade 7-9 Coarse Grid 2-21 Command 12-2 Configuration 11-2 Configuration Tree 2-50 Conformal Mapping 3-15 Conjugate Heat Transfer 3-3, 11-1 Connection 2-28 Edge-Edge 7-53 Whole Grid 7-54 Control Area 2-69 Control Line 7-27 Cell Width 7-29 Downstream 7-28
AutoGrid5
Index
INDEX
On Blade 7-29 Upstream 7-28 Control Lines 6-6 Control Points 2-8, 6-6 Convention 1-4 Convergence History 2-18 Cooling 3-3, 11-1 Blades Holes 11-14 Cooling Channel 11-4 Mesh Control 11-8 Offset Shape 11-6 Coordinate Axis 2-72 Copy 4-13 Copy Distribution 6-20 Copy Topology 7-6, 10-2, 10-5 Counter Rotative Fan 4-23 Create Project 2-2 Template 2-2 Create Project 3-10 Criterion Quality 2-36 Curves 6-1 Cut 8-7 Cut Offset 5-19 D Data Reduction 5-36 Default Topology 3-15, 7-7 ZR Effect 9-9 Define Geometry 5-2 Delete Basic Curve 6-2 Detect Channel Connection 9-10 Unmapped Edges 9-10 Diffuser 4-22 Discretization Basic Curve 6-2 Domain 2-62, 3-2 Boundaries 2-65 Delete 2-64 Group 2-63 Properties 2-63 Rename 2-63 Driver 1-5, 2-17 Duplicate 2-59, 2-61 E Edge-Edge 7-53 Edit Hub 5-13 Edit Shroud 5-13 Edition Mode 10-3 End Wall Holes 11-34 End Wall Solid Body 11-12 Exit AutoGrid5 2-18 Expansion 5-18 Factor 5-19 Ratio 2-36 Export 5-37 Block Coordinates 2-8 Control Points 2-8 Face Coordinates 2-8 Geometry 2-8 IGES 2-8 Patch Coordinates 2-9 Plot3D 2-9 Extension Control 7-33 Extension Offset 5-19 External Grid 2-11 F Face Displacement 2-22 Fan 4-23, 4-24 Far Field 4-17, 9-10 Features 1-1 File Chooser 2-77 File Management 1-3, 8-6 Files 3-21 Mesh 1-3, 8-7 Template 1-3, 8-7 Fillet 4-10, 5-21 Filters 2-27 Fin 5-11 Control 6-20 Control Line 6-9 Fitting 5-18 Flow Path 3-14, 4-10 Control 6-14 Manual Editing 6-14 Fluid Domain 2-6 Fomat Channel 3-4 Foreground Color 1-6 Format ".geomTurbo" 3-4 Blade 3-6 CAD 3-9
ii
AutoGrid5
Index
INDEX
Francis Turbine 4-20 Freeze Skin Mesh 7-60 Full Matching Mesh 4-12 Full Mesh Generation 3-13 Full Non Matching 2-31, 9-10 G Gap Definition 4-10 Management Icons 2-48 Topology 6-16 Generation 3D Mesh 3-20 Status 2-71 Geometry 2-8, 2-18 Check 4-9, 5-34 Definition 2-52, 4-7 Export 5-37 Group 2-55, 5-9 Geometry Axis 5-6 Geometry Definition 5-2 ".geomTurbo" Format 3-4 Getting Start 1-1 Global Control 11-25 Graphics 1-5 Area 2-74 Window 2-74 Grid Configuration 2-58 Level 2-53, 4-12 Parameters Area 2-70 Points Control 7-7 Save 2-6 Grid Quality 2-34 Report 2-41 GridPro 2-16 H H&I Topology 7-38 Gap Control 7-44 Grid Clustering 7-43 Grid Points 7-40 High Staggered Blade 7-21, 7-45 HOH Topology 7-32 Clustering 7-35 Grid Points 7-34 Hub 3-2 Edition 6-3 Non-Axisymmetric 5-14 Hub Gap Control 6-16, 7-13, 7-36 I IGES 2-8, 2-13 IGG Data 2-10 Impeller 4-22 Import Block File 2-11 CATIA V5 2-12 CGNS 2-15 External Grid 2-11 GridPro 2-16 IGES 2-13 IGG Data 2-10 Mesh 2-9 Parasolid 2-12 Plot3D 2-14 Topology 2-12 Import CAD Edit 5-6 File 5-3 Geometry 5-6 Geometry File 5-2 Link to... 5-10 Menu 5-3 Quick Access Pad 5-9 View 5-6 Viewing Buttons 5-9 Inducer 4-21 Info 3-21 Information Area 2-70 Inlet Control 7-18 Inner Gap 2-39 Inserted Cooling Tube 11-10 Installation 1-5 Interface 1-6, 2-1 K Kaplan Turbine 4-21 Keyboard Input Area 2-70 L Layer Control 8-2 Leading Control 7-10 Leading Edge Wizard 5-23 Library 10-1, 10-4 Library Project 3-20 License 1-7 Lights 2-17
AutoGrid5
iii
Index
INDEX
Loop Detection 5-35 Low Memory 3-13 M Machine Type 4-9 Main Project 2-59 Duplicate 2-59 Merge 2-60 Manual Editing 6-14 Matching 9-10 Menu Bar 4-2 Merge Distribution 6-20 Project 2-6 Meridional Check 6-11 Meridional Effect 3D Generation 9-14 Edition Mode 9-2 Geometry Definition 9-2 Matching Connections 9-12 Polylines 9-5 Topology Definition 9-6 Mesh Control 2-53, 4-7, 6-12 Domain 3-2 Files 1-3, 8-7 Generation 2-45 , 3-10, 3-13, 4-4 Icons 2-46 Quality 6-22 , 8-6 Visibility 2-18 Mesh Quality Report 8-6 Message Area 2-70 Mouse Coordinates Area 2-70 MSW 1-5 Multigrid Acceleration 7-59 MultiSplitter Control 7-60 Multistage 4-13 N Negative Cells 2-43 Non-Axi Tip Gap 5-11 Non-Axisymmetric 5-14 Non-Matching Control 7-59 Nozzle 5-11 Edition 6-3 Number of Blades 3-12 Number of Mesh Points 8-5 O Open Project 2-3 OPENGL 1-5 Optimization 3-18 , 7-55, 9-10 High Staggered Blade 7-22 Steps 7-56 Orthogonality 2-36, 7-57 Outlet Control 7-18 Overlap 2-36 P Parasolid 2-12 Paste 4-13 Paste Distribution 6-20 Paste Topology 7-6, 10-2, 10-5 Patch 2-26 Divide 2-28 Visualization 2-19 Penny 11-5 Periodic Boundary Conditions 7-9 Periodic Full Non Matching 9-11 Periodicity 2-25, 3-12 Persistency 10-6 Pin Fins 11-37 Plot3D 2-14 Polyline 9-5 Preferences 2-16 Saving 2-18 Pressure Side 5-12 Print PNG file 2-7 PostScript file 2-7 Progess Status 2-18 Project Batch 3-23 Create 2-2, 3-10 Files 3-21 Icons 4-3 Import 2-9 Info 3-21 Library 3-20, 3-21 List 2-6 Management 1-3, 2-45, 2-50, 11-27 Merge 2-6 Open 2-3 Persistency 3-20 Save 2-5 Setup 3-11
iv
AutoGrid5
Index
INDEX
Projection 5-16 Projection Clustering 7-45 Propagate Theta Deviation 9-11 Pump 4-23 Q Quality Criterion 2-36 Icons 2-46, 4-4 Visibility 2-18 Quick Access Pad 2-48 Quit AutoGrid5 2-18 R Radial Diffuser 4-22 Radial Expansion 9-10 Relative Inner Gap 2-39 Relax Clustering 7-18 , 7-45 Relaxation 7-45 Repetition 2-22, 2-32, 3-13 Report 2-41, 8-6 Return Channel 4-23 Ribs 11-41 Rotation 5-18 Rotor/Stator Edition 6-4 Properties 6-5 ZR Effect 9-7 Rotor-Stator 2-33 Rounded 7-14, 7-44 Row Definition 2-50, 4-7 Management Icons 2-47 Mesh Control 2-54 Periodicity 3-7 Type 3-7, 4-9 Row Wizard 4-8 Ruled Surface 3-9 S Save Fluid Domain 2-6 Grid 2-6 PNG file 2-7 PostScript file 2-7 Project 2-5 Template 2-5 Script 10-6, 12-1 Select Geometry 5-6 Sewing 5-19 Sharp 7-14, 7-44 Sheet 5-28 SHF Pump 4-23 Shroud Definition 3-2 Definition 3-2 Edition 6-3 Non-Axisymmetric 5-14 Shroud Gap Control 6-16, 7-13, 7-36 Skewness Control 7-56 Skin Block 7-42 Skin Mesh 7-9, 7-12 Skin Wall 11-11 Solid Body End Wall 11-12 Solid Mesh Blade 11-1 Squiller Tip 11-5 Staggered 3-16 Start 1-1 Stick 5-18 Straight 7-59 Streamwise Weights 7-4 Structured 1-2 SubProject 2-60 Delete 2-62 Duplicate 2-61 Load 2-61 Merge 2-62 Rename 2-60 Save 2-61 Suction Side 5-12 Surface Ruled 3-9 Sweep 2-20 T Tandem Row 3-13, 7-24 Technological Effect 3-3, 10-1 Template Create 2-2 Files 1-3, 8-7 Save 2-5 Throat 7-15 Tip Gap Control 6-16, 7-13, 7-36 Non-Axisymmetric 5-30 Tip Wall 11-8 Toggle 2-24, 2-69 Toolbar 2-44, 4-3
AutoGrid5
Index
INDEX
Topology 7-3 Copy 7-6 Default 3-15 Default (O4H) 7-7 High Staggered Blade 7-21 HOH 7-32 Library 7-5 Optimization 7-22 Paste 7-6 Staggered 3-16 User Defined 7-47 Trailing Control 7-10 Trailing Edge Curve 11-11 Trailing Edge Wizard 5-23 Tree 2-50 Popup Menu 2-51 Type of Boundary Conditions 2-27 U Unstructured 1-2 User Defined Topology 7-47 Control Layer 7-51 Create Mesh 7-51 Geometry Control 7-48 Mesh Control 7-49 View Control 7-54 User Mode 4-3 V View 2-55, 4-8 3D 2-76 Blade-to-Blade 2-76 Buttons 2-72 Depth 2-22 Displacement 2-22 Interaction 2-77 Meridional 2-75 Symbolic 2-75 View Management 4-5 Viewing Scope 2-68 Visibility 2-17, 4-11 W Wake Control 7-17, 7-58 Whole Grid 7-54 Width 2-17 Wind Turbine 4-17 Wizard 4-2 X X11 1-5
vi
AutoGrid5

Usermanual AUTOGRID5 87

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Usermanual AUTOGRID5 87

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

User Manual

NUMERICAL MECHANICS APPLICATIONS

NUMERICAL MECHANICS APPLICATIONS

what is AutoGrid5, how to use this guide, how to start AutoGrid5.

turbofan, turboprop, turboshaft,

Structured vs. Unstructured

Definition of the geometry:

new_prefix.geomTurbo and new_prefix.geomTurbo.xmt_txt (.geomTurbo.X_T): the geometry

FIGURE 1.2.5-1 Example

of file management for an AutoGrid5 project

How To Use This Manual

How To Use This Manual

This manual consists of four distinct parts:

First Time Use

First Time Use

Installation of AutoGrid5 according to the described procedure in a directory chosen by the

Expert Graphics Options

How to Start AutoGrid5 Interface

b) Background & Foreground Colors

How to Start AutoGrid5 Interface

Graphical User Interface

FIGURE 2.1.0-1 AutoGrid5

Expert Mode Interface.

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar (section 2-3) Toolbar (section 2-4)

Graphics area (section 2-7)

Quick Access Pad (section 2-5)

Control area (section 2-6)

FIGURE 2.1.0-2 AutoGrid5

Graphical User Interface (Expert Mode)

Create New Template/Project

Graphical User Interface

). A new window will appear,

Open Existing Template/Project

Graphical User Interface

Main Menu Bar

Main Menu Bar

2-3.1.1 Open Project

2-3.1.2 New Project

Main Menu Bar

Graphical User Interface

2-3.1.3 Save Project / Save Project As

2-3.1.4 Save Template / Save Template As

Graphical User Interface

Main Menu Bar

2-3.1.5 Save Grid -> Save Grid As

2-3.1.7 Save Grid -> Save Grid As Fine 7.4

2-3.1.7 Save Grid -> Save Grid As Fine 8.6

2-3.1.8 Save Grid -> Merge Project Grid

2-3.1.9 Save Grid -> Save Fluid Domain(s)

2-3.1.10 Project List -> Transfer File List

2-3.1.11 Project List -> Open File List

2-3.1.12 Scripts -> Edit

Main Menu Bar

Graphical User Interface

2-3.1.13 Scripts -> Save All

2-3.1.14 Scripts -> Execute

2-3.1.15 Scripts -> Re-execute Last

2-3.1.16 Print -> As PostScript

2-3.1.17 Print -> As Bitmap PostScript

2-3.1.18 Print -> As PNG

Graphical User Interface

Main Menu Bar